This is a modern-English version of The Theory and Practice of Perspective, originally written by Storey, G. A. (George Adolphus). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.





 

Lines in the sample drawings are not always parallel. In some cases this may be an artifact of the scanning process, but more often the pictures were not positioned evenly in the original book. Page numbers shown in brackets [ ] held illustrations without text. They will sometimes be out of sequence with adjoining page numbers.

Lines in the sample drawings aren't always parallel. In some cases, this might be a result of the scanning process, but more often, the images weren't lined up evenly in the original book. Page numbers in brackets [ ] contained illustrations without text. They may sometimes be out of order with neighboring page numbers.

A few typographical errors have been corrected. They have been marked in the text with mouse-hover popups.

A few typos have been fixed. They've been highlighted in the text with mouse-hover popups.

 


 
 


HENRY FROWDE, M.A.
PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD
LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK
TORONTO AND MELBOURNE

 
 


THE

THEORY AND PRACTICE
OF PERSPECTIVE

 

BY

G. A. STOREY, A.R.A.

TEACHER OF PERSPECTIVE AT THE ROYAL ACADEMY

 


‘QUÎ FIT?’

‘WHO DID IT?’

 

OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1910

 
 


OXFORD
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY

 
 



iii
DEDICATED
TO

SIR EDWARD J. POYNTER

BARONET
PRESIDENT OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY
IN TOKEN OF FRIENDSHIP
AND REGARD

v

PREFACE

It is much easier to understand and remember a thing when a reason is given for it, than when we are merely shown how to do it without being told why it is so done; for in the latter case, instead of being assisted by reason, our real help in all study, we have to rely upon memory or our power of imitation, and to do simply as we are told without thinking about it. The consequence is that at the very first difficulty we are left to flounder about in the dark, or to remain inactive till the master comes to our assistance.

It is much easier to understand and remember something when a reason is given for it, rather than when we are just shown how to do it without being told why it's done that way; in the latter case, instead of being guided by reason, which is our real help in all learning, we have to rely on memory or our ability to copy, simply doing what we’re told without thinking about it. As a result, when we face the first challenge, we’re left struggling in the dark or remaining inactive until the teacher comes to help us.

Now in this book it is proposed to enlist the reasoning faculty from the very first: to let one problem grow out of another and to be dependent on the foregoing, as in geometry, and so to explain each thing we do that there shall be no doubt in the mind as to the correctness of the proceeding. The student will thus gain the power of finding out any new problem for himself, and will therefore acquire a true knowledge of perspective.

Now in this book, we aim to engage your reasoning skills from the start: to let one problem build on another and depend on the previous one, just like in geometry, and to clarify everything we do so that there’s no doubt about the correctness of each step. This way, the student will develop the ability to solve new problems independently and will gain a real understanding of perspective.

vii

CONTENTS

BOOK I
page
1
6
I. Definitions 13
II.

The Point of Sight, the Horizon, and the Point of Distance.

The Point of View, the Horizon, and the Distance Point.

15
III. Point of Distance 16
IV.

Perspective of a Point, Visual Rays, &c.

Perspective of a Point, Visual Rays, etc.

20
V. Trace and Projection 21
VI. Scientific Definition of Perspective 22
Rules:
VII. The Rules and Conditions of Perspective 24
VIII.

A Table or Index of the Rules of Perspective

A Table or Index of the Rules of Perspective

40
BOOK II
IX. The Square in Parallel Perspective 42
X. The Diagonal 43
XI. The Square 43
XII.

Geometrical and Perspective Figures Contrasted

Geometric and Perspective Figures Compared

46
XIII.

Of Certain Terms made use of in Perspective

Of Certain Terms Used in Perspective

48
XIV.

How to Measure Vanishing or Receding Lines

How to Measure Vanishing or Receding Lines

49
XV. How to Place Squares in Given Positions 50
XVI. How to Draw Pavements, &c. 51
XVII.

Of Squares placed Vertically and at Different Heights, or the Cube in Parallel Perspective

Of squares positioned vertically and at various heights, or the cube in parallel perspective

53
XVIII. The Transposed Distance 53
XIX.

The Front View of the Square and of the Proportions of Figures at Different Heights

The Front View of the Square and the Proportions of Shapes at Different Heights

54
XX.

Of Pictures that are Painted according to the Position they are to Occupy

Of Pictures that are Painted Based on the Space They Will Fill

59
XXI. Interiors 62
XXII. The Square at an Angle of 45° 64
XXIII. The Cube at an Angle of 45° 65
XXIV.

Pavements Drawn by Means of Squares at 45°

Pavements Made with 45° Squares

66
XXV. The Perspective Vanishing Scale 68
viii XXVI.

The Vanishing Scale can be Drawn to any Point on the Horizon

The Vanishing Scale can be drawn to any point on the horizon.

69
XXVII.

Application of Vanishing Scales to Drawing Figures

Application of Vanishing Scales to Drawing Figures

71
XXVIII.

How to Determine the Heights of Figures on a Level Plane

How to Figure Out the Heights of Shapes on a Flat Surface

71
XXIX. The Horizon above the Figures 72
XXX. Landscape Perspective 74
XXXI.

Figures of Different Heights. The Chessboard

Figures of Different Heights. The Chessboard

74
XXXII.

Application of the Vanishing Scale to Drawing Figures at an Angle when their Vanishing Points are Inaccessible or Outside the Picture

Application of the Vanishing Scale to Drawing Figures at an Angle when their Vanishing Points are Unreachable or Outside the Frame

77
XXXIII.

The Reduced Distance. How to Proceed when the Point of Distance is Inaccessible

The Reduced Distance. How to Proceed when the Distance Point is Unreachable

77
XXXIV.

How to Draw a Long Passage or Cloister by Means of the Reduced Distance

How to Draw a Long Passage or Cloister Using the Scale Down Method

78
XXXV.

How to Form a Vanishing Scale that shall give the Height, Depth, and Distance of any Object in the Picture

How to Create a Vanishing Scale that will show the Height, Depth, and Distance of any Object in the Picture

79
XXXVI. Measuring Scale on Ground 81
XXXVII.

Application of the Reduced Distance and the Vanishing Scale to Drawing a Lighthouse, &c.

Application of the Reduced Distance and the Vanishing Scale to Drawing a Lighthouse, etc.

84
XXXVIII.

How to Measure Long Distances such as a Mile or Upwards

How to Measure Long Distances like a Mile or More

85
XXXIX.

Further Illustration of Long Distances and Extended Views.

Further Illustration of Long Distances and Extended Views.

87
XL.

How to Ascertain the Relative Heights of Figures on an Inclined Plane

How to Determine the Relative Heights of Objects on an Inclined Plane

88
XLI.

How to Find the Distance of a Given Figure or Point from the Base Line

How to Measure the Distance of a Figure or Point from the Base Line

89
XLII.

How to Measure the Height of Figures on Uneven Ground

How to Measure the Height of People on Uneven Ground

90
XLIII.

Further Illustration of the Size of Figures at Different Distances and on Uneven Ground

Further Illustration of the Size of Figures at Different Distances and on Uneven Ground

91
XLIV. Figures on a Descending Plane 92
XLV.

Further Illustration of the Descending Plane

Further Illustration of the Descending Plane

95
XLVI. Further Illustration of Uneven Ground 95
XLVII. The Picture Standing on the Ground 96
XLVIII. The Picture on a Height 97
BOOK III
XLIX. Angular Perspective 98
L.

How to put a Given Point into Perspective

How to Put a Given Point into Perspective

99
LI.

A Perspective Point being given, Find its Position on the Geometrical Plane

A perspective point is provided; determine its position on the geometric plane.

100
ix LII.

How to put a Given Line into Perspective

How to Put a Given Line into Perspective

101
LIII.

To Find the Length of a Given Perspective Line

To Find the Length of a Given Perspective Line

102
LIV.

To Find these Points when the Distance-Point is Inaccessible

To find these points when the distance point is unreachable

103
LV.

How to put a Given Triangle or other Rectilineal Figure into Perspective

How to Place a Given Triangle or Other Straight-Sided Shape into Perspective

104
LVI.

How to put a Given Square into Angular Perspective

How to Place a Given Square in Angular Perspective

105
LVII. Of Measuring Points 106
LVIII.

How to Divide any Given Straight Line into Equal or Proportionate Parts

How to Split Any Straight Line into Equal or Proportional Parts

107
LIX.

How to Divide a Diagonal Vanishing Line into any Number of Equal or Proportional Parts

How to Split a Diagonal Vanishing Line into Any Number of Equal or Proportional Sections

107
LX. Further Use of the Measuring Point O 110
LXI. Further Use of the Measuring Point O 110
LXII.

Another Method of Angular Perspective, being that Adopted in our Art Schools

Another Method of Angular Perspective, which is the one Used in our Art Schools

112
LXIII.

Two Methods of Angular Perspective in one Figure

Two Methods of Angular Perspective in One Figure

115
LXIV. To Draw a Cube, the Points being Given 115
LXV.

Amplification of the Cube Applied to Drawing a Cottage

Amplification of the Cube Used for Drawing a Cottage

116
LXVI. How to Draw an Interior at an Angle 117
LXVII.

How to Correct Distorted Perspective by Doubling the Line of Distance

How to Fix Distorted Perspective by Doubling the Distance Line

118
LXVIII.

How to Draw a Cube on a Given Square, using only One Vanishing Point

How to Draw a Cube on a Given Square, using just One Vanishing Point

119
LXIX.

A Courtyard or Cloister Drawn with One Vanishing Point

A Courtyard or Cloister Designed with One Vanishing Point

120
LXX.

How to Draw Lines which shall Meet at a Distant Point, by Means of Diagonals

How to Draw Lines That Will Meet at a Distant Point Using Diagonals

121
LXXI.

How to Divide a Square Placed at an Angle into a Given Number of Small Squares

How to Split a Square Positioned at an Angle into a Specific Number of Smaller Squares

122
LXXII.

Further Example of how to Divide a Given Oblique Square into a Given Number of Equal Squares, say Twenty-five

Further Example of how to Divide a Given Oblique Square into a Given Number of Equal Squares, say Twenty-five

122
LXXIII. Of Parallels and Diagonals 124
LXXIV.

The Square, the Oblong, and their Diagonals

The Square, the Rectangle, and their Diagonals

125
LXXV.

Showing the Use of the Square and Diagonals in Drawing Doorways, Windows, and other Architectural Features

Showing the Use of Squares and Diagonals in Designing Doorways, Windows, and Other Architectural Elements

126
LXXVI. How to Measure Depths by Diagonals 127
LXXVII.

How to Measure Distances by the Square and Diagonal

How to Measure Distances Using the Square and Diagonal

128
LXXVIII.

How by Means of the Square and Diagonal we can Determine the Position of Points in Space

How we can determine the position of points in space using the square and diagonal

129
x LXXIX.

Perspective of a Point Placed in any Position within the Square

Perspective of a Point Located Anywhere Inside the Square

131
LXXX.

Perspective of a Square Placed at an Angle. New Method

Perspective of a Square Positioned at an Angle. New Approach

133
LXXXI.

On a Given Line Placed at an Angle to the Base Draw a Square in Angular Perspective, the Point of Sight, and Distance, being given

On a line positioned at an angle to the base, draw a square in angular perspective, with the point of sight and distance provided.

134
LXXXII.

How to Draw Solid Figures at any Angle by the New Method

How to Draw Solid Shapes from Any Angle Using the New Method

135
LXXXIII. Points in Space 137
LXXXIV.

The Square and Diagonal Applied to Cubes and Solids Drawn Therein

The Square and Diagonal Used for Cubes and Solids Shown There

138
LXXXV.

To Draw an Oblique Square in Another Oblique Square without Using Vanishing-points

To Draw a Slanted Square Inside Another Slanted Square without Using Vanishing Points

139
LXXXVI.

Showing how a Pedestal can be Drawn by the New Method

Showing how a Pedestal can be Drawn by the New Method

141
LXXXVII. Scale on Each Side of the Picture 143
LXXXVIII. The Circle 145
LXXXIX.

The Circle in Perspective a True Ellipse

The Circle in Perspective: a True Ellipse

145
XC. Further Illustration of the Ellipse 146
XCI.

How to Draw a Circle in Perspective Without a Geometrical Plan

How to Draw a Circle in Perspective Without a Geometric Plan

148
XCII.

How to Draw a Circle in Angular Perspective

How to Draw a Circle in Angular Perspective

151
XCIII.

How to Draw a Circle in Perspective more Correctly, by Using Sixteen Guiding Points

How to Draw a Circle in Perspective More Accurately by Using Sixteen Guiding Points

152
XCIV.

How to Divide a Perspective Circle into any Number of Equal Parts

How to Split a Perspective Circle into Any Number of Equal Parts

153
XCV. How to Draw Concentric Circles 154
XCVI.

The Angle of the Diameter of the Circle in Angular and Parallel Perspective

The Angle of the Diameter of the Circle in Angular and Parallel Perspective

156
XCVII.

How to Correct Disproportion in the Width of Columns

How to Fix Uneven Column Widths

157
XCVIII.

How to Draw a Circle over a Circle or a Cylinder

How to Draw a Circle on Top of a Circle or a Cylinder

158
XCIX. To Draw a Circle Below a Given Circle 159
C. Application of Previous Problem 160
CI. Doric Columns 161
CII.

To Draw Semicircles Standing upon a Circle at any Angle

To Draw Semicircles Standing on a Circle at Any Angle

162
CIII. A Dome Standing on a Cylinder 163
CIV. Section of a Dome or Niche 164
CV. A Dome 167
CVI.

How to Draw Columns Standing in a Circle

How to Draw Columns arranged in a Circle

169
CVII. Columns and Capitals 170
CVIII.

Method of Perspective Employed by Architects

Method of Perspective Used by Architects

170
xi CIX. The Octagon 172
CX.

How to Draw the Octagon in Angular Perspective

How to Draw an Octagon in Angular Perspective

173
CXI.

How to Draw an Octagonal Figure in Angular Perspective

How to Draw an Octagonal Shape in Angular Perspective

174
CXII.

How to Draw Concentric Octagons, with Illustration of a Well

How to Draw Concentric Octagons, with an Illustration of a Well

174
CXIII.

A Pavement Composed of Octagons and Small Squares

A pavement made of octagons and small squares

176
CXIV. The Hexagon 177
CXV. A Pavement Composed of Hexagonal Tiles 178
CXVI.

A Pavement of Hexagonal Tiles in Angular Perspective

A Pavement of Hexagonal Tiles in Angular Perspective

181
CXVII. Further Illustration of the Hexagon 182
CXVIII.

Another View of the Hexagon in Angular Perspective

Another View of the Hexagon in Angular Perspective

183
CXIX.

Application of the Hexagon to Drawing a Kiosk

Application of the Hexagon to Drawing a Kiosk

185
CXX. The Pentagon 186
CXXI. The Pyramid 189
CXXII. The Great Pyramid 191
CXXIII. The Pyramid in Angular Perspective 193
CXXIV.

To Divide the Sides of the Pyramid Horizontally

To Split the Sides of the Pyramid Horizontally

193
CXXV. Of Roofs 195
CXXVI. Of Arches, Arcades, Bridges, &c. 198
CXXVII.

Outline of an Arcade with Semicircular Arches

Outline of an Arcade with Semicircular Arches

200
CXXVIII.

Semicircular Arches on a Retreating Plane

Semicircular Arches on a Sloping Surface

201
CXXIX. An Arcade in Angular Perspective 202
CXXX. A Vaulted Ceiling 203
CXXXI. A Cloister, from a Photograph 206
CXXXII. The Low or Elliptical Arch 207
CXXXIII. Opening or Arched Window in a Vault 208
CXXXIV. Stairs, Steps, &c. 209
CXXXV. Steps, Front View 210
CXXXVI. Square Steps 211
CXXXVII.

To Divide an Inclined Plane into Equal Parts—such as a Ladder Placed against a Wall

To divide an inclined plane into equal parts—like a ladder leaning against a wall

212
CXXXVIII. Steps and the Inclined Plane 213
CXXXIX. Steps in Angular Perspective 214
CXL. A Step Ladder at an Angle 216
CXLI. Square Steps Placed over each other 217
CXLII.

Steps and a Double Cross Drawn by Means of Diagonals and one Vanishing Point

Steps and a Double Cross Created Using Diagonals and One Vanishing Point

218
CXLIII. A Staircase Leading to a Gallery 221
CXLIV. Winding Stairs in a Square Shaft 222
CXLV. Winding Stairs in a Cylindrical Shaft 225
CXLVI. Of the Cylindrical Picture or Diorama 227
xii BOOK IV
CXLVII. The Perspective of Cast Shadows 229
CXLVIII. The Two Kinds of Shadows 230
CXLIX. Shadows Cast by the Sun 232
CL.

The Sun in the Same Plane as the Picture

The Sun in the Same Plane as the Image

233
CLI. The Sun Behind the Picture 234
CLII.

Sun Behind the Picture, Shadows Thrown on a Wall

Sun Behind the Picture, Shadows Cast on a Wall

238
CLIII.

Sun Behind the Picture Throwing Shadow on an Inclined Plane

Sun Behind the Picture Casting a Shadow on a Sloped Surface

240
CLIV. The Sun in Front of the Picture 241
CLV. The Shadow of an Inclined Plane 244
CLVI. Shadow on a Roof or Inclined Plane 245
CLVII.

To Find the Shadow of a Projection or Balcony on a Wall

To Find the Shadow of a Projection or Balcony on a Wall

246
CLVIII.

Shadow on a Retreating Wall, Sun in Front

Shadow on a Retreating Wall, Sun in Front

247
CLIX. Shadow of an Arch, Sun in Front 249
CLX. Shadow in a Niche or Recess 250
CLXI. Shadow in an Arched Doorway 251
CLXII. Shadows Produced by Artificial Light 252
CLXIII.

Some Observations on Real Light and Shade

Some Observations on Real Light and Shade

253
CLXIV. Reflection 257
CLXV. Angles of Reflection 259
CLXVI.

Reflections of Objects at Different Distances

Reflections of Objects at Different Distances

260
CLXVII. Reflection in a Looking-glass 262
CLXVIII. The Mirror at an Angle 264
CLXIX.

The Upright Mirror at an Angle of 45° to the Wall

The Upright Mirror at a 45° Angle to the Wall

266
CLXX. Mental Perspective 269
Index 270
1

BOOK FIRST

THE NECESSITY OF THE STUDY OF PERSPECTIVE TO PAINTERS, SCULPTORS, AND ARCHITECTS

Leonardo da Vinci tells us in his celebrated Treatise on Painting that the young artist should first of all learn perspective, that is to say, he should first of all learn that he has to depict on a flat surface objects which are in relief or distant one from the other; for this is the simple art of painting. Objects appear smaller at a distance than near to us, so by drawing them thus we give depth to our canvas. The outline of a ball is a mere flat circle, but with proper shading we make it appear round, and this is the perspective of light and shade.

Leonardo da Vinci explains in his famous Treatise on Painting that every young artist should start by learning perspective. This means understanding how to represent three-dimensional objects on a flat surface, which is the basic skill of painting. Objects look smaller when they are farther away than when they are close to us, so by drawing them this way, we create depth on our canvas. The outline of a ball is just a flat circle, but with the right shading, we can make it look round. This is the perspective of light and shade.

‘The next thing to be considered is the effect of the atmosphere and light. If two figures are in the same coloured dress, and are standing one behind the other, then they should be of slightly different tone, so as to separate them. And in like manner, according to the distance of the mountains in a landscape and the greater or less density of the air, so do we depict space between them, not only making them smaller in outline, but less distinct.’1

The next thing to consider is the impact of atmosphere and light. If two figures are wearing the same color, and one is standing behind the other, they should have slightly different tones to differentiate them. Similarly, based on the distance of mountains in a landscape and how dense the air is, we depict the space between them by not only making them smaller in outline but also less distinct. 1

Sir Edwin Landseer used to say that in looking at a figure in a picture he liked to feel that he could walk round it, and this exactly expresses the impression that the true art of painting should make upon the spectator.

Sir Edwin Landseer used to say that when looking at a figure in a painting, he wanted to feel like he could walk around it, and this perfectly captures the feeling that true art should create in the viewer.

There is another observation of Leonardo’s that it is well I should here transcribe; he says: ‘Many are desirous of learning to draw, and are very fond of it, who are notwithstanding void of a proper disposition for it. This may be known by their want of perseverance; like boys who draw everything in a hurry, never finishing or shadowing.’ This shows they do not care for their work, and all instruction is thrown away upon them. At the present time there is too much of this ‘everything in a hurry’, 2 and beginning in this way leads only to failure and disappointment. These observations apply equally to perspective as to drawing and painting.

There’s another point Leonardo made that I should mention here; he says: ‘Many people want to learn to draw and really enjoy it, but they lack the right mindset for it. You can tell by their lack of persistence; it’s like kids who rush to draw everything without ever finishing or adding shading.’ This shows they don’t care about their work, and all the teaching in the world won’t help them. Nowadays, there’s way too much of this ‘rushing through everything,’ 2 and starting out this way only leads to failure and disappointment. These observations apply to perspective just as much as they do to drawing and painting.

Unfortunately, this study is too often neglected by our painters, some of them even complacently confessing their ignorance of it; while the ordinary student either turns from it with distaste, or only endures going through it with a view to passing an examination, little thinking of what value it will be to him in working out his pictures. Whether the manner of teaching perspective is the cause of this dislike for it, I cannot say; but certainly most of our English books on the subject are anything but attractive.

Unfortunately, this study is often overlooked by our painters, some of whom even admit they have no knowledge of it; while the average student either turns away from it in disgust or only tolerates it to pass an exam, hardly realizing how valuable it will be for creating their artwork. I can’t say if the way perspective is taught is the reason for this aversion, but it’s clear that most of our English books on the subject are far from appealing.

All the great masters of painting have also been masters of perspective, for they knew that without it, it would be impossible to carry out their grand compositions. In many cases they were even inspired by it in choosing their subjects. When one looks at those sunny interiors, those corridors and courtyards by De Hooghe, with their figures far off and near, one feels that their charm consists greatly in their perspective, as well as in their light and tone and colour. Or if we study those Venetian masterpieces by Paul Veronese, Titian, Tintoretto, and others, we become convinced that it was through their knowledge of perspective that they gave such space and grandeur to their canvases.

All the great masters of painting have also been experts in perspective because they understood that without it, they couldn't achieve their grand compositions. In many cases, they were even inspired by perspective when selecting their subjects. When you look at those sunny interiors, those corridors and courtyards by De Hooghe, with their figures both far away and nearby, you realize that their charm comes significantly from their perspective, as well as from their use of light, tone, and color. Or when we examine those Venetian masterpieces by Paul Veronese, Titian, Tintoretto, and others, we become convinced that it was their understanding of perspective that enabled them to create such space and grandeur in their canvases.

I need not name all the great artists who have shown their interest and delight in this study, both by writing about it and practising it, such as Albert Dürer and others, but I cannot leave out our own Turner, who was one of the greatest masters in this respect that ever lived; though in his case we can only judge of the results of his knowledge as shown in his pictures, for although he was Professor of Perspective at the Royal Academy in 1807—over a hundred years ago—and took great pains with the diagrams he prepared to illustrate his lectures, they seemed to the students to be full of confusion and obscurity; nor am I aware that any record of them remains, although they must have contained some valuable teaching, had their author possessed the art of conveying it.

I don't need to name all the great artists who have expressed their interest and passion for this study, both by writing about it and practicing it, like Albert Dürer and others. However, I can't overlook our own Turner, who was one of the greatest masters in this area who ever lived. In his case, we can only evaluate the results of his knowledge as seen in his paintings. Although he was the Professor of Perspective at the Royal Academy in 1807—over a hundred years ago—and worked hard on the diagrams he created to illustrate his lectures, the students found them to be confusing and unclear. I’m not aware of any record of these diagrams remaining, although they must have contained some valuable lessons if their creator had possessed the skill to communicate them effectively.

However, we are here chiefly concerned with the necessity of this study, and of the necessity of starting our work with it.

However, we are mainly focused on the importance of this study and the need to begin our work with it.

3 Before undertaking a large composition of figures, such as the ‘Wedding-feast at Cana’, by Paul Veronese, or ‘The School of Athens’, by Raphael, the artist should set out his floors, his walls, his colonnades, his balconies, his steps, &c., so that he may know where to place his personages, and to measure their different sizes according to their distances; indeed, he must make his stage and his scenery before he introduces his actors. He can then proceed with his composition, arrange his groups and the accessories with ease, and above all with correctness. But I have noticed that some of our cleverest painters will arrange their figures to please the eye, and when fairly advanced with their work will call in an expert, to (as they call it) put in their perspective for them, but as it does not form part of their original composition, it involves all sorts of difficulties and vexatious alterings and rubbings out, and even then is not always satisfactory. For the expert may not be an artist, nor in sympathy with the picture, hence there will be a want of unity in it; whereas the whole thing, to be in harmony, should be the conception of one mind, and the perspective as much a part of the composition as the figures.

3 Before starting a large work featuring multiple figures, like ‘The Wedding Feast at Cana’ by Paul Veronese or ‘The School of Athens’ by Raphael, the artist should lay out the floors, walls, columns, balconies, steps, etc., so they know where to place their characters and can measure their sizes based on their distances. Essentially, they need to design the stage and scenery before introducing their actors. This way, they can easily compose their work, arrange groups and accessories accurately, and most importantly, correctly. However, I've noticed that some of our most skilled painters arrange their figures for visual appeal and, once they've made significant progress, will bring in a specialist to (as they put it) add the perspective for them. But because this doesn’t integrate with their original composition, it leads to all sorts of complications and frustrating revisions, and even then, it isn’t always satisfactory. The specialist might not be an artist or resonate with the painting, which causes a lack of unity; whereas the entire piece, to achieve harmony, should come from a single vision, with the perspective being just as integral to the composition as the figures.

If a ceiling has to be painted with figures floating or flying in the air, or sitting high above us, then our perspective must take a different form, and the point of sight will be above our heads instead of on the horizon; nor can these difficulties be overcome without an adequate knowledge of the science, which will enable us to work out for ourselves any new problems of this kind that we may have to solve.

If a ceiling needs to be painted with figures floating or flying in the air, or sitting high above us, our perspective has to change, and our point of view will be above us instead of on the horizon. We can't solve these challenges without a solid understanding of the science, which will allow us to tackle any new problems of this kind that come up.

Then again, with a view to giving different effects or impressions in this decorative work, we must know where to place the horizon and the points of sight, for several of the latter are sometimes required when dealing with large surfaces such as the painting of walls, or stage scenery, or panoramas depicted on a cylindrical canvas and viewed from the centre thereof, where a fresh point of sight is required at every twelve or sixteen feet.

Then again, to create different effects or impressions in this decorative work, we need to know where to place the horizon and the viewpoints, as multiple viewpoints are often necessary when working with large areas like wall paintings, stage scenery, or panoramas shown on a cylindrical canvas viewed from the center, where a new viewpoint is needed every twelve or sixteen feet.

Without a true knowledge of perspective, none of these things can be done. The artist should study them in the great compositions of the masters, by analysing their pictures and seeing 4 how and for what reasons they applied their knowledge. Rubens put low horizons to most of his large figure-subjects, as in ‘The Descent from the Cross’, which not only gave grandeur to his designs, but, seeing they were to be placed above the eye, gave a more natural appearance to his figures. The Venetians often put the horizon almost on a level with the base of the picture or edge of the frame, and sometimes even below it; as in ‘The Family of Darius at the Feet of Alexander’, by Paul Veronese, and ‘The Origin of the “Via Lactea”’, by Tintoretto, both in our National Gallery. But in order to do all these things, the artist in designing his work must have the knowledge of perspective at his fingers' ends, and only the details, which are often tedious, should he leave to an assistant to work out for him.

Without a true understanding of perspective, none of these things can be achieved. The artist should study them in the great works of the masters by analyzing their paintings and observing how and why they used their knowledge. Rubens set his horizons low in most of his large figure pieces, like ‘The Descent from the Cross,’ which not only added grandeur to his designs but, since they were intended to be placed above eye level, gave a more natural look to his figures. The Venetians often placed the horizon almost at the bottom of the painting or even below it, as seen in ‘The Family of Darius at the Feet of Alexander’ by Paul Veronese and ‘The Origin of the “Via Lactea”’ by Tintoretto, both in our National Gallery. However, to do all these things, the artist must have a solid grasp of perspective in their work, reserving the more tedious details for an assistant to handle.

We must remember that the line of the horizon should be as nearly as possible on a level with the eye, as it is in nature; and yet one of the commonest mistakes in our exhibitions is the bad placing of this line. We see dozens of examples of it, where in full-length portraits and other large pictures intended to be seen from below, the horizon is placed high up in the canvas instead of low down; the consequence is that compositions so treated not only lose in grandeur and truth, but appear to be toppling over, or give the impression of smallness rather than bigness. Indeed, they look like small pictures enlarged, which is a very different thing from a large design. So that, in order to see them properly, we should mount a ladder to get upon a level with their horizon line (see Fig. 66, double-page illustration).

We need to remember that the horizon line should be as close to eye level as possible, just like it is in nature; yet one of the most common mistakes in our exhibitions is placing this line incorrectly. We often see many examples where, in full-length portraits and other large artworks meant to be viewed from below, the horizon is placed too high on the canvas instead of lower down. As a result, these compositions not only lose grandeur and authenticity but also seem to be toppling over or give the impression of being smaller instead of larger. They end up looking like small pictures that have been blown up, which is quite different from a large design. Therefore, to view them properly, we would need to climb a ladder to be level with their horizon line (see Fig. 66, double-page illustration).

We have here spoken in a general way of the importance of this study to painters, but we shall see that it is of almost equal importance to the sculptor and the architect.

We have talked broadly about how important this study is for painters, but we will see that it is almost equally important for sculptors and architects.

A sculptor student at the Academy, who was making his drawings rather carelessly, asked me of what use perspective was to a sculptor. ‘In the first place,’ I said, ‘to reason out apparently difficult problems, and to find how easy they become, will improve your mind; and in the second, if you have to do monumental work, it will teach you the exact size to make your figures according to the height they are to be placed, and also the boldness with which they should be treated to give them their full effect.’ 5 He at once acknowledged that I was right, proved himself an efficient pupil, and took much interest in his work.

A sculpture student at the Academy, who was sketching quite carelessly, asked me how perspective was useful for a sculptor. ‘First of all,’ I said, ‘figuring out seemingly tough problems and seeing how easy they can actually be will sharpen your thinking; and secondly, if you're working on something monumental, it will teach you the precise size for your figures based on how high they're meant to be placed, as well as the boldness required to make them impactful.’ 5 He immediately admitted I was right, showed himself to be a keen student, and became very engaged in his work.

I cannot help thinking that the reason our public monuments so often fail to impress us with any sense of grandeur is in a great measure owing to the neglect of the scientific study of perspective. As an illustration of what I mean, let the student look at a good engraving or photograph of the Arch of Constantine at Rome, or the Tombs of the Medici, by Michelangelo, in the sacristy of San Lorenzo at Florence. And then, for an example of a mistake in the placing of a colossal figure, let him turn to the Tomb of Julius II in San Pietro in Vinculis, Rome, and he will see that the figure of Moses, so grand in itself, not only loses much of its dignity by being placed on the ground instead of in the niche above it, but throws all the other figures out of proportion or harmony, and was quite contrary to Michelangelo’s intention. Indeed, this tomb, which was to have been the finest thing of its kind ever done, was really the tragedy of the great sculptor’s life.

I can't help but think that the reason our public monuments often fail to inspire a sense of grandeur is largely due to the neglect of properly studying perspective. To illustrate this, the student should look at a good engraving or photograph of the Arch of Constantine in Rome, or the Tombs of the Medici, created by Michelangelo, in the sacristy of San Lorenzo in Florence. Then, as an example of a mistake in placing a colossal figure, they should check out the Tomb of Julius II in San Pietro in Vinculis, Rome. There, the figure of Moses, which is impressive on its own, loses much of its dignity by being placed on the ground instead of in the niche above it. This placement throws all the other figures out of proportion and harmony, going against Michelangelo’s original intention. In fact, this tomb, which was meant to be the finest of its kind ever created, ended up being a tragedy in the life of the great sculptor.

The same remarks apply in a great measure to the architect as to the sculptor. The old builders knew the value of a knowledge of perspective, and, as in the case of Serlio, Vignola, and others, prefaced their treatises on architecture with chapters on geometry and perspective. For it showed them how to give proper proportions to their buildings and the details thereof; how to give height and importance both to the interior and exterior; also to give the right sizes of windows, doorways, columns, vaults, and other parts, and the various heights they should make their towers, walls, arches, roofs, and so forth. One of the most beautiful examples of the application of this knowledge to architecture is the Campanile of the Cathedral, at Florence, built by Giotto and Taddeo Gaddi, who were painters as well as architects. Here it will be seen that the height of the windows is increased as they are placed higher up in the building, and the top windows or openings into the belfry are about six times the size of those in the lower story.

The same points apply largely to architects as they do to sculptors. The old builders understood the importance of knowing perspective, and, like Serlio, Vignola, and others, they started their architecture treatises with sections on geometry and perspective. This knowledge helped them create proper proportions for their buildings and their details, giving height and significance to both the interior and exterior. It also ensured the correct sizes for windows, doorways, columns, vaults, and other elements, and determined the various heights for their towers, walls, arches, roofs, and more. One of the most stunning examples of applying this knowledge in architecture is the Campanile of the Cathedral in Florence, built by Giotto and Taddeo Gaddi, who were both painters and architects. Here, you can see that the height of the windows increases as they ascend within the building, and the top windows or openings into the belfry are about six times larger than those in the lower story.

6

WHAT IS PERSPECTIVE?

figure
Fig. 1.

Perspective is a subtle form of geometry; it represents figures and objects not as they are but as we see them in space, whereas geometry represents figures not as we see them but as they are. When we have a front view of a figure such as a square, its perspective and geometrical appearance is the same, and we see it as it really is, that is, with all its sides equal and all its angles right angles, the perspective only varying in size according to the distance we are from it; but if we place that square flat on the table and look at it sideways or at an angle, then we become conscious of certain changes in its form—the side farthest from us appears shorter than that near to us, 7 and all the angles are different. Thus A (Fig. 2) is a geometrical square and B is the same square seen in perspective.

Viewpoint is a subtle form of geometry; it shows figures and objects not as they really are, but as we perceive them in space, whereas geometry depicts figures as they truly are. When we look at a figure like a square from the front, its perspective and geometric appearance are identical, and we see it as it actually is, with all its sides equal and all its angles as right angles, with the perspective only changing in size based on how far away we are from it. However, if we lay that square flat on the table and view it from the side or at an angle, we start to notice changes in its shape—the side that is farthest from us looks shorter than the side that is closer, and all the angles appear different. Thus, A (Fig. 2) is a geometric square, while B shows the same square in perspective.

figure figure
Fig. 2.

The science of perspective gives the dimensions of objects seen in space as they appear to the eye of the spectator, just as a perfect tracing of those objects on a sheet of glass placed vertically between him and them would do; indeed its very name is derived from perspicere, to see through. But as no tracing done by hand could possibly be mathematically correct, the mathematician teaches us how by certain points and measurements we may yet give a perfect image of them. These images are called projections, but the artist calls them pictures. In this sketch K is the vertical transparent plane or picture, O is a cube placed on one side of it. The young student is the spectator on the other side of it, the dotted lines drawn from the corners of the cube to the eye of the spectator are the visual rays, and the points on the transparent picture plane where these visual rays pass through it indicate the perspective position 8 of those points on the picture. To find these points is the main object or duty of linear perspective.

The science of perspective explains how objects appear in space from the viewer's eye, just like how a perfect tracing on a vertical sheet of glass between the viewer and the objects would look; in fact, its name comes from perspicere, meaning to see through. However, since no hand-drawn tracing can be mathematically accurate, mathematicians teach us how to create a perfect image using specific points and measurements. These images are called projections, but artists refer to them as pictures. In this sketch, K represents the vertical transparent plane or picture, while O is a cube placed on one side of it. The young student stands as the viewer on the other side, and the dotted lines from the corners of the cube to the viewer's eye represent the visual rays. The points where these visual rays intersect the transparent picture plane show the perspective position8 of those points on the picture. Finding these points is the main goal or task of linear perspective.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.

Perspective up to a certain point is a pure science, not depending upon the accidents of vision, but upon the exact laws of reasoning. Nor is it to be considered as only pertaining to the craft of the painter and draughtsman. It has an intimate connexion with our mental perceptions and with the ideas that are impressed upon the brain by the appearance of all that surrounds us. If we saw everything as depicted by plane geometry, that is, as a map, we should have no difference of view, no variety of ideas, and we should live in a world of unbearable monotony; but as we see everything in perspective, which is infinite in its variety of aspect, our minds are subjected to countless phases of thought, making the world around us constantly interesting, so it is devised that we shall see the infinite wherever we turn, and marvel at it, and delight in it, although perhaps in many cases unconsciously.

Perspective, up to a certain point, is a pure science that doesn’t rely on the randomness of vision but on precise laws of reasoning. It shouldn’t be seen as just a skill for painters and draftsmen. It’s closely linked to our mental perceptions and the ideas that are shaped in our minds by everything around us. If we viewed everything as it is represented in flat geometry, like in a map, we would have no differing perspectives, no variety of ideas, and we would dwell in a world of unbearable monotony. However, since we see everything in perspective, which offers infinite variety, our minds engage with countless thoughts, making the world around us consistently interesting. We are designed to perceive the infinite wherever we look, to marvel at it, and to find joy in it, often without even realizing it.

In perspective, as in geometry, we deal with parallels, squares, triangles, cubes, circles, &c.; but in perspective the same figure takes an endless variety of forms, whereas in geometry it has but one. Here are three equal geometrical squares: they are all alike. Here are three equal perspective squares, but all varied 9 in form; and the same figure changes in aspect as often as we view it from a different position. A walk round the dining-room table will exemplify this.

In perspective, just like in geometry, we work with parallels, squares, triangles, cubes, circles, etc.; but in perspective, the same figure can take on countless forms, while in geometry it has only one. Here are three equal geometric squares: they are all the same. Here are three equal perspective squares, but each one is different in shape; and the same figure changes its appearance every time we look at it from a different angle. Walking around the dining room table illustrates this. 9

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5.

It is in proving that, notwithstanding this difference of appearance, the figures do represent the same form, that much of our work consists; and for those who care to exercise their reasoning powers it becomes not only a sure means of knowledge, but a study of the greatest interest.

It’s in demonstrating that, despite this difference in appearance, the figures represent the same form, that much of our work lies; and for those who want to sharpen their reasoning skills, it not only becomes a reliable way to gain knowledge, but also a fascinating study.

Perspective is said to have been formed into a science about the fifteenth century. Among the names mentioned by the unknown but pleasant author of The Practice of Perspective, written by a Jesuit of Paris in the eighteenth century, we find Albert Dürer, who has left us some rules and principles in the fourth book of his Geometry; Jean Cousin, who has an express treatise on the art wherein are many valuable things; also Vignola, who altered the plans of St. Peter’s left by Michelangelo; Serlio, whose treatise is one of the best I have seen of these early writers; Du Cerceau, Serigati, Solomon de Cause, Marolois, Vredemont; Guidus Ubaldus, who first introduced foreshortening; the Sieur de Vaulizard, the Sieur Dufarges, Joshua Kirby, for whose Method of Perspective made Easy (?) Hogarth drew the well-known frontispiece; and lastly, the above-named Practice of Perspective by a Jesuit of Paris, which is very clear and excellent as far as it goes, and was the book used by Sir Joshua Reynolds.2 But nearly all these authors treat chiefly of parallel perspective, which they do with clearness and simplicity, and also mathematically, as shown in the short treatise in Latin by Christian Wolff, but they scarcely touch upon the more difficult problems of angular and oblique perspective. Of modern books, those to which I am most indebted are the Traité Pratique de Perspective of M. A. Cassagne (Paris, 1873), which is thoroughly artistic, and full of pictorial examples admirably done; and to M. Henriet’s Cours Rational de Dessin. There are many other foreign books of excellence, notably M. Thibault's Perspective, and some German and Swiss books, and yet, notwithstanding this imposing array of authors, I venture to say that many new features and original 10 problems are presented in this book, whilst the old ones are not neglected. As, for instance, How to draw figures at an angle without vanishing points (see p. 141, Fig. 162, &c.), a new method of angular perspective which dispenses with the cumbersome setting out usually adopted, and enables us to draw figures at any angle without vanishing lines, &c., and is almost, if not quite, as simple as parallel perspective (see p. 133, Fig. 150, &c.). How to measure distances by the square and diagonal, and to draw interiors thereby (p. 128, Fig. 144). How to explain the theory of perspective by ocular demonstration, using a vertical sheet of glass with strings, placed on a drawing-board, which I have found of the greatest use (see p. 29, Fig. 29). Then again, I show how all our perspective can be done inside the picture; that we can measure any distance into the picture from a foot to a mile or twenty miles (see p. 86, Fig. 94); how we can draw the Great Pyramid, which stands on thirteen acres of ground, by putting it 1,600 feet off (Fig. 224), &c., &c. And while preserving the mathematical science, so that all our operations can be proved to be correct, my chief aim has been to make it easy of application to our work and consequently useful to the artist.

Perspective is said to have developed into a science around the fifteenth century. Among the names mentioned by the unknown but agreeable author of The Practice of Perspective, written by a Jesuit from Paris in the eighteenth century, we find Albert Dürer, who provided some rules and principles in the fourth book of his Geometry; Jean Cousin, who has a specific treatise on the art containing many valuable insights; Vignola, who modified the plans of St. Peter’s left by Michelangelo; Serlio, whose treatise is one of the best I’ve encountered among early writers; Du Cerceau, Serigati, Solomon de Cause, Marolois, Vredemont; Guidus Ubaldus, who was the first to introduce foreshortening; Sieur de Vaulizard, Sieur Dufarges, and Joshua Kirby, for whose Method of Perspective made Easy (?) Hogarth created the well-known frontispiece; and lastly, the previously mentioned Practice of Perspective by a Jesuit of Paris, which is very clear and excellent for its purpose and was the book used by Sir Joshua Reynolds.2 However, nearly all these authors mainly focus on parallel perspective, which they address with clarity and simplicity, also mathematically, as shown in the short Latin treatise by Christian Wolff, though they hardly touch on the more challenging issues of angular and oblique perspective. Among modern books, the ones I rely on the most are M. A. Cassagne’s Traité Pratique de Perspective (Paris, 1873), which is thoroughly artistic and filled with beautifully executed pictorial examples; and M. Henriet’s Cours Rational de Dessin. There are many other excellent foreign books, notably M. Thibault's Perspective, along with some German and Swiss texts, and yet, despite this impressive list of authors, I dare to say that many new features and original 10 problems are introduced in this book, while the old ones are not overlooked. For instance, how to draw figures at an angle without vanishing points (see p. 141, Fig. 162, &c.), a new method of angular perspective that avoids the tedious setup usually used and allows us to draw figures at any angle without vanishing lines, &c., and is nearly, if not completely, as straightforward as parallel perspective (see p. 133, Fig. 150, &c.). How to measure distances using the square and diagonal and to draw interiors accordingly (p. 128, Fig. 144). How to explain the theory of perspective through visual demonstration, using a vertical sheet of glass with strings on a drawing board, which I’ve found extremely useful (see p. 29, Fig. 29). Additionally, I demonstrate how all our perspective work can be conducted inside the picture, allowing us to measure any distance within the picture from a foot to a mile or even twenty miles (see p. 86, Fig. 94); how we can draw the Great Pyramid, which occupies thirteen acres, by placing it 1,600 feet away (Fig. 224), &c., &c. And while maintaining the mathematical foundation so that all our operations can be verified as correct, my main goal has been to make it easy to apply to our work, thereby making it valuable for the artist.

The Egyptians do not appear to have made any use of linear perspective. Perhaps it was considered out of character with their particular kind of decoration, which is to be looked upon as picture writing rather than pictorial art; a table, for instance, would be represented like a ground-plan and the objects upon it in elevation or standing up. A row of chariots with their horses and drivers side by side were placed one over the other, and although the Egyptians had no doubt a reason for this kind of representation, for they were grand artists, it seems to us very primitive; and indeed quite young beginners who have never drawn from real objects have a tendency to do very much the same thing as this ancient people did, or even to emulate the mathematician and represent things not as they appear but as they are, and will make the top of a table an almost upright square and the objects upon it as if they would fall off.

The Egyptians didn’t seem to use linear perspective. Maybe they felt it didn’t fit their unique style of decoration, which is more like visual storytelling than pictorial art. For example, a table would be shown like a blueprint, with the items on it represented from the side. A row of chariots, with their horses and drivers lined up, was arranged one above the other. While the Egyptians likely had their reasons for this way of representing things—they were, after all, great artists—it comes across as very basic to us. In fact, even inexperienced beginners who haven't drawn from real-life often end up doing something similar to what this ancient civilization did. They might try to imitate a mathematical approach, showing things not as they look but as they are, making the top of a table appear like a nearly upright square, with objects on it looking as if they could fall off.

No doubt the Greeks had correct notions of perspective, for the paintings on vases, and at Pompeii and Herculaneum, which were either by Greek artists or copied from Greek pictures, 11 show some knowledge, though not complete knowledge, of this science. Indeed, it is difficult to conceive of any great artist making his perspective very wrong, for if he can draw the human figure as the Greeks did, surely he can draw an angle.

The Greeks definitely understood the basics of perspective. The paintings on vases and those found in Pompeii and Herculaneum, whether created by Greek artists or inspired by Greek works, 11 demonstrate some understanding, though not a full grasp, of this technique. In fact, it's hard to imagine any great artist getting perspective really wrong. If he can depict the human figure like the Greeks did, then surely he can also draw an angle.

The Japanese, who are great observers of nature, seem to have got at their perspective by copying what they saw, and, although they are not quite correct in a few things, they convey the idea of distance and make their horizontal planes look level, which are two important things in perspective. Some of their landscapes are beautiful; their trees, flowers, and foliage exquisitely drawn and arranged with the greatest taste; whilst there is a character and go about their figures and birds, &c., that can hardly be surpassed. All their pictures are lively and intelligent and appear to be executed with ease, which shows their authors to be complete masters of their craft.

The Japanese, who are keen observers of nature, seem to have developed their perspective by studying what they saw, and although they aren’t entirely accurate in some details, they effectively convey a sense of distance and make their horizontal planes appear level, both of which are crucial in perspective. Some of their landscapes are stunning; their trees, flowers, and foliage are beautifully drawn and arranged with exceptional taste; while the character and energy in their figures and birds, etc., are hard to match. All their artwork is vibrant and expressive, and it seems to be created with such ease, demonstrating that the artists are complete masters of their craft.

The same may be said of the Chinese, although their perspective is more decorative than true, and whilst their taste is exquisite their whole art is much more conventional and traditional, and does not remind us of nature like that of the Japanese.

The same can be said about the Chinese, although their perspective is more about decoration than reality, and while their taste is exquisite, their entire art is much more conventional and traditional, not evoking nature in the same way that Japanese art does.

We may see defects in the perspective of the ancients, in the mediaeval painters, in the Japanese and Chinese, but are we always right ourselves? Even in celebrated pictures by old and modern masters there are occasionally errors that might easily have been avoided, if a ready means of settling the difficulty were at hand. We should endeavour then to make this study as simple, as easy, and as complete as possible, to show clear evidence of its correctness (according to its conditions), and at the same time to serve as a guide on any and all occasions that we may require it.

We might notice flaws in how ancient artists, medieval painters, and even Japanese and Chinese artists depicted perspective, but are we always accurate ourselves? Even in famous works by both old and modern masters, there are sometimes mistakes that could have easily been corrected if a quick solution had been available. Therefore, we should aim to make this study straightforward, accessible, and thorough, providing clear proof of its accuracy (based on its criteria), and also serve as a helpful resource whenever we need it.

To illustrate what is perspective, and as an experiment that any one can make, whether artist or not, let us stand at a window that looks out on to a courtyard or a street or a garden, &c., and trace with a paint-brush charged with Indian ink or water-colour the outline of whatever view there happens to be outside, being careful to keep the eye always in the same place by means of a rest; when this is dry, place a piece of drawing-paper over it and trace through with a pencil. Now we will rub out the tracing on the glass, which is sure to be rather clumsy, and, fixing 12 our paper down on a board, proceed to draw the scene before us, using the main lines of our tracing as our guiding lines.

To explain what perspective is, and as an experiment that anyone can try, whether they're an artist or not, let’s stand at a window that overlooks a courtyard, street, garden, etc., and use a paintbrush loaded with Indian ink or watercolor to outline whatever view is outside. Make sure to keep your eye in the same spot with a rest. Once it's dry, place a piece of drawing paper over it and trace it with a pencil. Now, we’ll erase the tracing on the glass, which will probably be a bit messy, and then, securing our paper to a board, we can start drawing the scene in front of us, using the main lines of our tracing as guides. 12

If we take pains over our work, we shall find that, without troubling ourselves much about rules, we have produced a perfect perspective of perhaps a very difficult subject. After practising for some little time in this way we shall get accustomed to what are called perspective deformations, and soon be able to dispense with the glass and the tracing altogether and to sketch straight from nature, taking little note of perspective beyond fixing the point of sight and the horizontal-line; in fact, doing what every artist does when he goes out sketching.

If we put effort into our work, we’ll find that, without worrying too much about the rules, we’ve created a perfect perspective of possibly a very challenging subject. After practicing like this for a while, we’ll become familiar with what are known as perspective distortions, and soon we’ll be able to get rid of the glass and tracing altogether and sketch directly from nature, paying little attention to perspective beyond establishing the viewpoint and the horizon line; in other words, doing what every artist does when they go out sketching.

Fig. 6. This is a much reduced reproduction of a drawing made on my studio window in this way some twenty years ago, when the builder started covering the fields at the back with rows and rows of houses.

Fig. 6. This is a much smaller version of a drawing I made on my studio window about twenty years ago, when the builder began to cover the fields behind us with rows and rows of houses.

13

THE THEORY OF PERSPECTIVE

Definitions
I

Fig. 7. In this figure, AKB represents the picture or transparent vertical plane through which the objects to be represented can be seen, or on which they can be traced, such as the cube C.

Fig. 7. In this figure, AKB48 represents the image or clear vertical plane that allows us to see the objects being represented or on which they can be outlined, like the cube C.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

The line HD is the Horizontal-line or Horizon, the chief line in perspective, as upon it are placed the principal points to which our perspective lines are drawn. First, the Point of Sight and next D, the Point of Distance. The chief vanishing points and measuring points are also placed on this line.

The line HD is the Horizontal-line or Horizon, the main line for perspective, as the key points where we draw our perspective lines are positioned on it. First is the Point of Sight, followed by D, the Point of Distance. The main vanishing points and measuring points are also located on this line.

Another important line is AB, the Base or Ground line, as it is on this that we measure the width of any object to be represented, such as ef, the base of the square efgh, on which the cube C is raised. E is the position of the eye of the spectator, being drawn in perspective, and is called the Station-point.

Another important line is AB, the Base or Ground line, because we use this line to measure the width of any object we want to represent, like ef, the base of the square efgh, which the cube C is built upon. E represents the position of the viewer's eye, depicted in perspective, and is referred to as the Station-point.

Note that the perspective of the board, and the line SE, is not 14 the same as that of the cube in the picture AKB, and also that so much of the board which is behind the picture plane partially represents the Perspective-plane, supposed to be perfectly level and to extend from the base line to the horizon. Of this we shall speak further on. In nature it is not really level, but partakes in extended views of the rotundity of the earth, though in small areas such as ponds the roundness is infinitesimal.

Note that the viewpoint of the board, and the line SE, is not 14 the same as that of the cube in the image AKB, and also that a lot of the board that is behind the picture plane partially represents the Perspective-plane, which is supposed to be perfectly level and to extend from the baseline to the horizon. We will discuss this further on. In reality, it isn't completely level, but instead reflects the curvature of the earth in wide views, although in small areas like ponds, the roundness is hardly noticeable.

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8. This is a side view of the previous figure, the picture plane K being represented edgeways, and the line SE its full length. It also shows the position of the eye in front of the point of sight S. The horizontal-line HD and the base or ground-line AB are represented as receding from us, and in that case are called vanishing lines, a not quite satisfactory term.

Fig. 8. This is a side view of the previous figure, with the picture plane K shown edge-on, and the line SE depicted at its full length. It also illustrates the position of the eye in front of the point of sight S. The horizontal line HD and the base or ground line AB are shown as receding from us, and in this context, they are referred to as vanishing lines, a term that is not entirely satisfactory.

It is to be noted that the cube C is placed close to the transparent picture plane, indeed touches it, and that the square fj faces the spectator E, and although here drawn in perspective it appears to him as in the other figure. Also, it is at the same time a perspective and a geometrical figure, and can therefore be measured with the compasses. Or in other words, we can 15 touch the square fj, because it is on the surface of the picture, but we cannot touch the square ghmb at the other end of the cube and can only measure it by the rules of perspective.

It’s important to note that the cube C is positioned close to the transparent picture plane, in fact, it touches it, and that the square fj is facing the viewer E. Even though it’s drawn in perspective here, it appears the same as in the other figure. Additionally, it is both a perspective and a geometric figure, so it can be measured with a compass. In other words, we can 15 touch the square fj since it’s on the surface of the picture, but we can’t touch the square ghmb at the opposite end of the cube and can only measure it using the rules of perspective.

II
The Point of Sight, the Horizon, and the Point of Distance

There are three things to be considered and understood before we can begin a perspective drawing. First, the position of the eye in front of the picture, which is called the Station-point, and of course is not in the picture itself, but its position is indicated by a point on the picture which is exactly opposite the eye of the spectator, and is called the Point of Sight, or Principal Point, or Centre of Vision, but we will keep to the first of these.

There are three things to consider and understand before we can start a perspective drawing. First, the position of the eye in front of the picture, known as the Station-point, which is not in the picture itself but is indicated by a point on the picture directly opposite the viewer's eye. This point is called the Point of Sight, Principal Point, or Centre of Vision, but we'll stick with the first term.

figure figure
Fig. 9. Fig. 10.

If our picture plane is a sheet of glass, and is so placed that we can see the landscape behind it or a sea-view, we shall find that the distant line of the horizon passes through that point of sight, and we therefore draw a line on our picture which exactly corresponds with it, and which we call the Horizontal-line or Horizon.3 The height of the horizon then depends entirely upon the position of the eye of the spectator: if he rises, so does the horizon; if he stoops or descends to lower ground, so does the horizon follow his movements. You may sit in a boat on a calm sea, and the horizon will be as low down as you are, or you may go to the top of a high cliff, and still the horizon will be on the same level as your eye.

If our picture plane is like a sheet of glass positioned in such a way that we can see the landscape behind it or a view of the sea, we’ll notice that the distant line of the horizon aligns with our sight point. Therefore, we draw a line on our picture that matches this line, which we call the Horizontal-line or Horizon. 3 The height of the horizon depends entirely on where the viewer's eye is: if the viewer rises, the horizon rises; if they crouch or move to lower ground, the horizon comes down with them. You could be sitting in a boat on a calm sea, and the horizon will be at the same level as you, or you could be at the top of a high cliff, and the horizon will still be on the same level as your eye.

16 This is an important line for the draughtsman to consider, for the effect of his picture greatly depends upon the position of the horizon. If you wish to give height and dignity to a mountain or a building, the horizon should be low down, so that these things may appear to tower above you. If you wish to show a wide expanse of landscape, then you must survey it from a height. In a composition of figures, you select your horizon according to the subject, and with a view to help the grouping. Again, in portraits and decorative work to be placed high up, a low horizon is desirable, but I have already spoken of this subject in the chapter on the necessity of the study of perspective.

16 This is a crucial point for the artist to think about, as the impact of their work heavily relies on the horizon's position. If you want to give a mountain or a building a sense of height and grandeur, the horizon should be set low so that these elements seem to rise above you. If you aim to capture a broad view of landscape, then you need to look at it from a higher vantage point. In a composition featuring figures, you choose your horizon based on the subject and to facilitate the grouping. Additionally, in portraits and decorative pieces that will be displayed up high, a low horizon is preferred, but I have already covered this topic in the chapter on the importance of studying perspective.

III
Point of Distance
figure
Fig. 11.

Fig. 11. The distance of the spectator from the picture is of great importance; as the distortions and disproportions arising from too near a view are to be avoided, the object of drawing being to make things look natural; thus, the floor should look level, and not as if it were running up hill—the top of a table flat, and not on a slant, as if cups and what not, placed upon it, would fall off.

Fig. 11. The distance of the viewer from the picture is very important; distortions and disproportion that come from being too close should be avoided, as the goal of drawing is to make things appear natural. The floor should look level, not sloping upwards—the top of a table should be flat, not tilted, so that cups and other objects placed on it wouldn’t fall off.

In this figure we have a geometrical or ground plan of two squares at different distances from the picture, which is represented by the line KK. The spectator is first at A, the corner of the near square Acd. If from A we draw a diagonal of that square and produce it to the line KK (which may represent the horizontal-line in the picture), where it intersects that line at marks the distance that the spectator is from the point of sight S. For it will be seen that line SA equals line SA·. In like manner, if the spectator is at B, his distance from the point S is also found on the horizon by means of the diagonal BB´, so that all lines or diagonals at 45° are drawn to the point of distance (see Rule 6).

In this figure, we have a layout of two squares positioned at different distances from the image, represented by the line KK. The observer begins at A, the corner of the closer square Acd. If we draw a diagonal from A and extend it to the line KK (which may represent the horizontal line in the image), where it intersects the line at A., marks the distance the observer is from the point of view S. It can be seen that line SA is equal to line SA. Similarly, if the observer is at B, their distance from point S is also determined on the horizon using the diagonal BB', so that all lines or diagonals at a 45° angle point toward the distance point (see Rule 6).

Figs. 12 and 13. In these two figures the difference is shown between the effect of the short-distance point and the long-distance point ; the first, Acd, does not appear to lie so flat on the ground as the second square, Bef.

Figs. 12 and 13. These two figures show the difference between the effect of the short-distance point A. and the long-distance point ; the first, Acd, doesn’t seem to lie as flat on the ground as the second square, Bef.

From this it will be seen how important it is to choose the 17 right point of distance: if we take it too near the point of sight, as in Fig. 12, the square looks unnatural and distorted. This, I may note, is a common fault with photographs taken with a wide-angle lens, which throws everything out of proportion, and will make the east end of a church or a cathedral appear higher than the steeple or tower; but as soon as we make our 18 line of distance sufficiently long, as at Fig. 13, objects take their right proportions and no distortion is noticeable.

From this, it’s clear how crucial it is to choose the 17 correct distance: if we place it too close to the viewpoint, like in Fig. 12, the square appears unnatural and warped. This is a common issue with photos taken with a wide-angle lens, which distorts everything and can make the east end of a church or cathedral look taller than the steeple or tower; however, once we extend our 18 viewing distance enough, as shown in Fig. 13, the objects return to their proper proportions and the distortion disappears.

figure figure
Fig. 12. Fig. 13.

In some books on perspective we are told to make the angle of vision 60°, so that the distance SD (Fig. 14) is to be rather less than the length or height of the picture, as at A. The French recommend an angle of 28°, and to make the distance about double the length of the picture, as at B (Fig. 15), which is far more agreeable. For we must remember that the distance-point is not only the point from which we are supposed to make our tracing on the vertical transparent plane, or a point transferred to the horizon to make our measurements by, but it is also the point in front of the canvas that we view the picture from, called the station-point. It is ridiculous, then, to have it so close that we must almost touch the canvas with our noses before we can see its perspective properly.

In some books about perspective, we’re advised to set the angle of vision at 60°, meaning the distance SD (Fig. 14) should be slightly less than the length or height of the picture, like at A. The French suggest an angle of 28° and recommend making the distance about double the length of the picture, as shown at B (Fig. 15), which is much more pleasing. We need to keep in mind that the distance-point isn’t just where we trace on a vertical transparent plane or a point transferred to the horizon for measurements; it’s also the spot in front of the canvas where we look at the picture, known as the station-point. So, it’s silly to have it so close that we have to nearly touch the canvas with our noses to see its perspective properly.

figure figure
Fig. 14. Fig. 15.

Now a picture should look right from whatever distance we 19 view it, even across the room or gallery, and of course in decorative work and in scene-painting a long distance is necessary.

Now a picture should look good from any distance we 19 view it, even from across the room or gallery, and of course, in decorative work and scene-painting, being able to see it from far away is important.

We need not, however, tie ourselves down to any hard and fast rule, but should choose our distance according to the impression of space we wish to convey: if we have to represent a domestic scene in a small room, as in many Dutch pictures, we must not make our distance-point too far off, as it would exaggerate the size of the room.

We don't have to stick to any strict rules, but we should pick our distance based on the sense of space we want to create. If we're depicting a cozy scene in a small room, like many Dutch paintings, we shouldn't place our viewpoint too far away, as it would make the room look bigger than it actually is.

Fig. 16. Cattle. By Paul Potter.

Fig. 16. Cattle. By Paul Potter.

20 The height of the horizon is also an important consideration in the composition of a picture, and so also is the position of the point of sight, as we shall see farther on.

20 The height of the horizon is an important factor in how we compose an image, and so is the location of the viewpoint, as we will explore later.

In landscape and cattle pictures a low horizon often gives space and air, as in this sketch from a picture by Paul Potter—where the horizontal-line is placed at one quarter the height of the canvas. Indeed, a judicious use of the laws of perspective is a great aid to composition, and no picture ever looks right unless these laws are attended to. At the present time too little attention is paid to them; the consequence is that much of the art of the day reflects in a great measure the monotony of the snap-shot camera, with its everyday and wearisome commonplace.

In landscape and cattle paintings, a low horizon often creates a sense of space and openness, as seen in this sketch from a work by Paul Potter—where the horizon line is positioned a quarter of the way up the canvas. In fact, skillful application of perspective principles greatly enhances composition, and no artwork appears correct unless these principles are acknowledged. Nowadays, there's too little focus on them; as a result, much of contemporary art tends to mimic the boring sameness of a snapshot camera, filled with everyday and tedious subjects.

IV
Perspective of a Point, Visual Rays, &c.

We perceive objects by means of the visual rays, which are imaginary straight lines drawn from the eye to the various points of the thing we are looking at. As those rays proceed from the pupil of the eye, which is a circular opening, they form themselves into a cone called the Optic Cone, the base of which increases in proportion to its distance from the eye, so that the larger the view which we wish to take in, the farther must we be removed from it. The diameter of the base of this cone, with the visual rays drawn from each of its extremities to the eye, form the angle of vision, which is wider or narrower according to the distance of this diameter.

We see objects through visual rays, which are imaginary straight lines drawn from our eyes to different points of whatever we’re looking at. As these rays come from the pupil of the eye, which is a round opening, they shape into a cone called the Optic Cone. The base of this cone gets larger the farther it is from the eye, meaning the broader the view we want to take in, the farther away we need to be. The diameter of the base of this cone, along with the visual rays extending from each end to the eye, creates the angle of vision, which becomes wider or narrower depending on the distance of this diameter.

figure
Fig. 17.

Now let us suppose a visual ray EA to be directed to some small object on the floor, say the head of a nail, A (Fig. 17). If we interpose between this nail and our eye a sheet of glass, K, placed vertically on the floor, we continue to see the nail through the glass, and it is easily understood that its perspective appearance thereon is the point a, where the visual ray passes through it. If now we trace on the floor a line AB from the nail to the spot B, just under the eye, and from the point o, where this line passes through or under the glass, we raise a perpendicular oS, that perpendicular passes through the precise point that the visual ray 21 passes through. The line AB traced on the floor is the horizontal trace of the visual ray, and it will be seen that the point a is situated on the vertical raised from this horizontal trace.

Now let's assume a visual ray EA is directed at a small object on the floor, like the head of a nail, A (Fig. 17). If we place a vertical sheet of glass, K, on the floor between the nail and our eye, we can still see the nail through the glass, and it's clear that its perspective appearance there is the point a, where the visual ray passes through it. Next, if we draw a line AB on the floor from the nail to the spot B, which is directly under our eye, and from the point o where this line goes through or under the glass, we raise a perpendicular oS. This perpendicular goes through exactly the point where the visual ray 21 passes through. The line AB drawn on the floor is the horizontal trace of the visual ray, and we can see that point a is located on the vertical line rising from this horizontal trace.

V
Trace and Projection

If from any line A or B or C (Fig. 18), &c., we drop perpendiculars from different points of those lines on to a horizontal plane, the intersections of those verticals with the plane will be on a line called the horizontal trace or projection of the original line. We may liken these projections to sun-shadows when the sun is in the meridian, for it will be remarked that the trace does not represent the length of the original line, but only so much of it as would be embraced by the verticals dropped from each end of it, and although line A is the same length as line B its horizontal 22 trace is longer than that of the other; that the projection of a curve (C) in this upright position is a straight line, that of a horizontal line (D) is equal to it, and the projection of a perpendicular or vertical (E) is a point only. The projections of lines or points can likewise be shown on a vertical plane, but in that case we draw lines parallel to the horizontal plane, and by this means we can get the position of a point in space; and by the assistance of perspective, as will be shown farther on, we can carry out the most difficult propositions of descriptive geometry and of the geometry of planes and solids.

If we drop perpendiculars from any points on lines A, B, or C (Fig. 18) onto a horizontal plane, the intersections of those verticals with the plane will form a line called the horizontal trace or projection of the original line. We can compare these projections to shadow cast by the sun at noon, as the trace does not reflect the full length of the original line, but only the portion covered by the verticals dropped from each end. Although line A has the same length as line B, its horizontal trace is longer than that of the other. The projection of a curve (C) in this upright position is a straight line, while that of a horizontal line (D) matches it, and the projection of a perpendicular or vertical line (E) is a single point. Projections of lines or points can also be represented on a vertical plane, but in this case, we draw lines parallel to the horizontal plane. This way, we can establish the position of a point in space; with the help of perspective, as we will later discuss, we can tackle even the most complex problems of descriptive geometry and the geometry of planes and solids.

Fig. 18.

Fig. 18.

The position of a point in space is given by its projection on a vertical and a horizontal plane—

The position of a point in space is represented by its projection on a vertical and a horizontal plane—

Fig. 19.

Fig. 19.

Thus is the projection of E on the vertical plane K, and e·· is the projection of E on the horizontal plane; fe·· is the horizontal trace of the plane fE, and e·f is the trace of the same plane on the vertical plane K.

Thus is the projection of E onto the vertical plane K, and e·· is the projection of E onto the horizontal plane; fe·· is the horizontal trace of the plane fE, and e·f is the trace of the same plane on the vertical plane K.

VI
Scientific Definition of Perspective

The projections of the extremities of a right line which passes through a vertical plane being given, one on either side of it, to find the intersection of that line with the vertical plane. AE (Fig. 20) is the right line. The projection of its extremity A on the vertical plane is , the projection of E, the other extremity, is . AS is the horizontal trace of AE, and a·e· is its trace 23 on the vertical plane. At point f, where the horizontal trace intersects the base Bc of the vertical plane, raise perpendicular fP till it cuts a·e· at point P, which is the point required. For it is at the same time on the given line AE and the vertical plane K.

The endpoints of a straight line that passes through a vertical plane are given, one on each side of it, and we need to find where that line intersects the vertical plane. AE (Fig. 20) is the straight line. The projection of its endpoint A onto the vertical plane is , and the projection of E, the other endpoint, is . AS is the horizontal line of AE, and a·e· is its trace on the vertical plane. At point f, where the horizontal trace meets the base Bc of the vertical plane, raise a perpendicular fP until it intersects a·e· at point P, which is the required point. This point is simultaneously on the given line AE and the vertical plane K.

Fig. 20.

Fig. 20.

This figure is similar to the previous one, except that the extremity A of the given line is raised from the ground, but the same demonstration applies to it.

This figure is similar to the previous one, except that the end A of the given line is lifted off the ground, but the same demonstration applies to it.

Fig. 21.

Fig. 21.

And now let us suppose the vertical plane K to be a sheet of glass, and the given line AE to be the visual ray passing from 24 the eye to the object A on the other side of the glass. Then if E is the eye of the spectator, its projection on the picture is S, the point of sight.

And now let's imagine that the vertical plane K is a sheet of glass, and the given line AE is the visual ray traveling from 24 the eye to the object A on the other side of the glass. If E represents the spectator's eye, its projection on the picture is S, the point of sight.

If I draw a dotted line from E to little a, this represents another visual ray, and o, the point where it passes through the picture, is the perspective of little a. I now draw another line from g to S, and thus form the shaded figure ga·Po, which is the perspective of aAa·g.

If I draw a dotted line from E to little a, this represents another visual ray, and o, the point where it passes through the picture, is the perspective of little a. I now draw another line from g to S, creating the shaded figure ga·Po, which represents the perspective of aAa·g.

Let it be remarked that in the shaded perspective figure the lines P and go are both drawn towards S, the point of sight, and that they represent parallel lines A and ag, which are at right angles to the picture plane. This is the most important fact in perspective, and will be more fully explained farther on, when we speak of retreating or so-called vanishing lines.

It should be noted that in the shaded perspective drawing, the lines P and go are both directed toward S, the point of sight, and they represent parallel lines A and ag, which are perpendicular to the picture plane. This is the most crucial fact in perspective and will be explained in more detail later when we discuss retreating or so-called vanishing lines.

RULES
VII
The Rules and Conditions of Perspective

The conditions of linear perspective are somewhat rigid. In the first place, we are supposed to look at objects with one eye only; that is, the visual rays are drawn from a single point, and not from two. Of this we shall speak later on. Then again, the eye must be placed in a certain position, as at E (Fig. 22), at a given height from the ground, S·E, and at a given distance from the picture, as SE. In the next place, the picture or picture plane itself must be vertical and perpendicular to the ground or horizontal plane, which plane is supposed to be as level as a billiard-table, and to extend from the base line, ef, of the picture to the horizon, that is, to infinity, for it does not partake of the rotundity of the earth.

The rules of linear perspective are pretty strict. First, we're meant to view objects with just one eye; in other words, the visual rays come from a single point rather than two. We’ll discuss this later. Additionally, the eye needs to be positioned in a specific spot, like at E (Fig. 22), at a certain height above the ground, S.E., and at a specific distance from the picture, as SE. Furthermore, the picture or picture plane itself has to be vertical and perpendicular to the ground or horizontal plane, which should be as level as a billiard table and extend from the baseline, ef, of the picture to the horizon, meaning to infinity, since it doesn’t take on the curvature of the earth.

Fig. 22.

Fig. 22.

figure
Fig. 23. Front view of above figure.

We can only work out our propositions and figures in space with mathematical precision by adopting such conditions as the above. But afterwards the artist or draughtsman may modify and suit them to a more elastic view of things; that is, he can make his figures separate from one another, instead of their outlines coming close together as they do when we look at them 25 with only one eye. Also he will allow for the unevenness of the ground and the roundness of our globe; he may even move his head and his eyes, and use both of them, and in fact make himself quite at his ease when he is out sketching, for Nature does all his perspective for him. At the same time, a knowledge of this rigid perspective is the sure and unerring basis of his freehand drawing.

We can only work out our ideas and shapes in space with mathematical accuracy by using conditions like those mentioned above. However, later on, the artist or draftsman can adjust them to a more flexible perspective; in other words, they can space their figures apart instead of having their outlines close together as they appear when we look at them 25 with just one eye. They will also take into account the unevenness of the ground and the curve of our planet; they might even move their head and eyes, using both of them, making themselves completely comfortable while sketching, since Nature handles all the perspective for them. At the same time, understanding this strict perspective is the solid and reliable foundation for their freehand drawing.

26
Rule 1

All straight lines remain straight in their perspective appearance.4

All straight lines continue to look straight from their perspective. 4

Rule 2
figure
Fig. 24.

Vertical lines remain vertical in perspective, and are divided in the same proportion as AB (Fig. 24), the original line, and a·b·, the perspective line, and if the one is divided at O the other is divided at in the same way.

Vertical lines stay vertical in perspective and are divided in the same proportion as AB (Fig. 24), the original line, and a·b·, the perspective line. If the original line is divided at O, then the perspective line is divided at in the same way.

It is not an uncommon error to suppose that the vertical lines of a high building should converge towards the top; so they would if we stood at the foot of that building and looked up, for then we should alter the conditions of our perspective, and our point of sight, instead of being on the horizon, would be up in the sky. But if we stood sufficiently far away, so as to bring the whole of the building within our angle of vision, and the point of sight down to the horizon, then these same lines would appear perfectly parallel, and the different stories in their true proportion.

It’s a common mistake to think that the vertical lines of a tall building should come together at the top. They would if we were standing at the base of the building looking up, because that would change our perspective, moving our viewpoint from the horizon to the sky. But if we stood far enough away to see the entire building within our line of sight, with our viewpoint back at the horizon, then those lines would look perfectly parallel, and the different floors would appear in their correct proportions.

Rule 3
figure
Fig. 25.

Horizontals parallel to the base of the picture are also parallel to that base in the picture. Thus a·b· (Fig. 25) is parallel to AB, 27 and to GL, the base of the picture. Indeed, the same argument may be used with regard to horizontal lines as with verticals. If we look at a straight wall in front of us, its top and its rows of bricks, &c., are parallel and horizontal; but if we look along it sideways, then we alter the conditions, and the parallel lines converge to whichever point we direct the eye.

Horizontals that are parallel to the base of the picture are also parallel to that base within the picture. So, a·b· (Fig. 25) is parallel to AB, 27 and to GL, the base of the picture. In fact, the same reasoning can be applied to horizontal lines as it is to vertical ones. If we look at a straight wall in front of us, its top and the rows of bricks, etc., are parallel and horizontal; however, if we look along the wall from the side, we change the perspective, and the parallel lines converge at whatever point we focus our gaze.

This rule is important, as we shall see when we come to the consideration of the perspective vanishing scale. Its use may be illustrated by this sketch, where the houses, walls, &c., are parallel to the base of the picture. When that is the case, then objects 28 exactly facing us, such as windows, doors, rows of boards, or of bricks or palings, &c., are drawn with their horizontal lines parallel to the base; hence it is called parallel perspective.

This rule is important, as we’ll see when we look at the perspective vanishing scale. Its use can be shown by this sketch, where the houses, walls, etc., are parallel to the bottom of the picture. When that happens, objects 28 directly facing us, like windows, doors, rows of boards, bricks, or fences, etc., are drawn with their horizontal lines parallel to the base; therefore, it’s called parallel perspective.

Fig. 26.

Fig. 26.

Rule 4

All lines situated in a plane that is parallel to the picture plane diminish in proportion as they become more distant, but do not undergo any perspective deformation; and remain in the same relation and proportion each to each as the original lines. This is called the front view.

All lines in a plane parallel to the picture plane decrease in size as they get further away, but they don’t change in perspective; they maintain the same relation and proportion to each other as the original lines. This is known as the front view.

Fig. 27.

Fig. 27.

Rule 5

All horizontals which are at right angles to the picture plane are drawn to the point of sight.

All horizontal lines that are at right angles to the picture plane are drawn to the viewpoint.

Thus the lines AB and CD (Fig. 28) are horizontal or parallel to the ground plane, and are also at right angles to the picture plane K. It will be seen that the perspective lines B, D, must, according to the laws of projection, be drawn to the point of sight.

Thus the lines AB and CD (Fig. 28) are horizontal or parallel to the ground, and they are also at right angles to the picture plane K. You'll notice that the perspective lines B and D must, according to the rules of projection, be drawn to the point of sight.

Fig. 28.

Fig. 28.

This is the most important rule in perspective (see Fig. 7 at beginning of Definitions).

This is the most important rule in perspective (see Fig. 7 at the beginning of Definitions).

figure
Fig. 29.
figure
Fig. 30.

An arrangement such as there indicated is the best means of illustrating this rule. But instead of tracing the outline of the square or cube on the glass, as there shown, I have a hole drilled through at the point S (Fig. 29), which I select for the point of sight, and through which I pass two loose strings A and B, fixing their ends at S.

An arrangement like this is the best way to illustrate this rule. But instead of drawing the outline of the square or cube on the glass, as shown, I had a hole drilled at point S (Fig. 29), which I chose for the viewpoint, and through which I run two loose strings A and B, securing their ends at S.

29

As SD represents the distance the spectator is from the glass or picture, I make string SA equal in length to SD. Now if the pupil takes this string in one hand and holds it at right angles to the glass, that is, exactly in front of S, and then places one eye at the end A (of course with the string extended), he will be at the proper distance from the picture. Let him then take the other string, SB, in the other hand, and apply it to point where the square touches the glass, and he will find that it exactly tallies with the side b´f 30 of the square a·b´fe. If he applies the same string to , the other corner of the square, his string will exactly tally or cover the side a·e, and he will thus have ocular demonstration of this important rule.

As SD shows the distance the viewer is from the glass or picture, I make string SA the same length as SD. Now, if the viewer takes this string in one hand and holds it perpendicular to the glass, meaning directly in front of S, then places one eye at the end A (with the string stretched out), they will be at the correct distance from the picture. Next, they should grab the other string, SB, with their other hand and align it with point where the square meets the glass. They will find that it perfectly matches the side b´f of the square a·b´fe. If they use the same string on , the opposite corner of the square, the string will also perfectly match the side a·e, giving them a visual confirmation of this important rule.

In this little picture (Fig. 30) in parallel perspective it will be seen that the lines which retreat from us at right angles to the picture plane are directed to the point of sight S.

In this small image (Fig. 30) using parallel perspective, you can see that the lines going away from us at right angles to the picture plane are aimed at the point of sight S.

Rule 6

All horizontals which are at 45°, or half a right angle to the picture plane, are drawn to the point of distance.

All horizontals that are at a 45° angle, or half a right angle to the picture plane, are drawn to the vanishing point.

We have already seen that the diagonal of the perspective square, if produced to meet the horizon on the picture, will mark on that horizon the distance that the spectator is from the point of sight (see definition, p. 16). This point of distance becomes then the measuring point for all horizontals at right angles to the picture plane.

We’ve already noted that if you extend the diagonal of the perspective square to meet the horizon in the picture, it will indicate how far the viewer is from the point of sight (see definition, p. 16). This distance point then serves as the reference for all horizontal lines that are at right angles to the picture plane.

Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.

31 Thus in Fig. 31 lines AS and BS are drawn to the point of sight S, and are therefore at right angles to the base AB. AD being drawn to D (the distance-point), is at an angle of 45° to the base AB, and AC is therefore the diagonal of a square. The line 1C is made parallel to AB, consequently A1CB is a square in perspective. The line BC, therefore, being one side of that square, is equal to AB, another side of it. So that to measure a length on a line drawn to the point of sight, such as BS, we set out the length required, say BA, on the base-line, then from A draw a line to the point of distance, and where it cuts BS at C is the length required. This can be repeated any number of times, say five, so that in this figure BE is five times the length of AB.

31 In Fig. 31, lines AS and BS are drawn to the point of sight S and are therefore at right angles to the base AB. Line AD, which is drawn to D (the distance point), makes a 45° angle with the base AB, and AC is thus the diagonal of a square. The line 1C is parallel to AB, making A1CB a square in perspective. Therefore, the line BC, being one side of that square, is equal to AB, another side. To measure a length on a line drawn to the point of sight, like BS, we mark the desired length, say BA, on the base line. Then, from point A, draw a line to the distance point, and where it intersects BS at C is the length required. This process can be repeated any number of times, say five, making Be five times the length of AB.

Rule 7

All horizontals forming any other angles but the above are drawn to some other points on the horizontal line. If the angle is greater than half a right angle (Fig. 32), as EBG, the point is within the point of distance, as at . If it is less, as ABV´´, then 32 it is beyond the point of distance, and consequently farther from the point of sight.

All horizontal lines that form any angles other than the ones mentioned above are drawn to different points on the horizontal line. If the angle is greater than half a right angle (Fig. 32), like EBG, then the point is within the distance point, as shown at V’. If it is smaller, like ABV, then 32 it lies beyond the distance point, making it farther from the line of sight.

Fig. 32.

Fig. 32.

In Fig. 32, the dotted line BD, drawn to the point of distance D, is at an angle of 45° to the base AG. It will be seen that the line BV´ is at a greater angle to the base than BD; it is therefore drawn to a point , within the point of distance and nearer to the point of sight S. On the other hand, the line BV´´ is at a more acute angle, and is therefore drawn to a point some way beyond the other distance point.

In Fig. 32, the dotted line BD, drawn to the point of distance D, is at a 45° angle to the base AG. You can see that the line BV' is at a steeper angle to the base than BD; it’s therefore drawn to a point V', within the point of distance and closer to the point of sight S. On the other hand, the line BV´´ is at a sharper angle, and it’s therefore drawn to a point some distance beyond the other distance point.

Note.—When this vanishing point is a long way outside the picture, the architects make use of a centrolinead, and the painters fix a long string at the required point, and get their perspective lines by that means, which is very inconvenient. But I will show you later on how you can dispense with this trouble by a very simple means, with equally correct results.

Note.—When this vanishing point is far outside the picture, architects use a centerline, and painters attach a long string at the necessary point to create their perspective lines, which is quite inconvenient. However, I will later demonstrate how you can avoid this hassle with a very simple method, achieving equally accurate results.

Rule 8

Lines which incline upwards have their vanishing points above the horizontal line, and those which incline downwards, below it. In both cases they are on the vertical which passes through the vanishing point (S) of their horizontal projections.

Lines that slope upwards have their vanishing points above the horizontal line, and those that slope downwards have them below it. In both instances, they are located on the vertical line that goes through the vanishing point (S) of their horizontal projections.

33

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

This rule is useful in drawing steps, or roads going uphill and downhill.

This rule is helpful for sketching paths or roads that go up and down.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

34
Rule 9

The farther a point is removed from the picture plane the nearer does its perspective appearance approach the horizontal line so long as it is viewed from the same position. On the contrary, if the spectator retreats from the picture plane K (which we suppose to be transparent), the point remaining at the same place, the perspective appearance of this point will approach the ground-line in proportion to the distance of the spectator.

The further a point is from the picture plane, the more its perspective looks like a horizontal line as long as it's viewed from the same spot. On the other hand, if the viewer steps back from the picture plane K (which we assume is transparent), keeping the point in the same place, the perspective of that point will seem to move closer to the ground line in relation to how far the viewer is.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 36.

Fig. 36.

The spectator at two different distances from the picture.

The viewer at two different distances from the image.

35 Therefore the position of a given point in perspective above the ground-line or below the horizon is in proportion to the distance of the spectator from the picture, or the picture from the point.

35 So, the location of a specific point in perspective, whether it’s above the ground line or below the horizon, corresponds to how far the viewer is from the image or how far the image is from that point.

Fig. 37.

Fig. 37.

Figures 38 and 39 are two views of the same gallery from different distances. In Fig. 38, where the distance is too short, there is a want of proportion between the near and far objects, which is corrected in Fig. 39 by taking a much longer distance.

Figures 38 and 39 show two views of the same gallery from different distances. In Fig. 38, the distance is too close, resulting in a lack of proportion between the nearby and distant objects, which is fixed in Fig. 39 by using a much longer distance.

The picture at two different distances from the point.
figure figure
Fig. 38. Fig. 39.
36
Rule 10

Horizontals in the same plane which are drawn to the same point on the horizon are parallel to each other.

Horizontals in the same plane that are drawn to the same point on the horizon are parallel to one another.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 40.

This is a very important rule, for all our perspective drawing depends upon it. When we say that parallels are drawn to the same point on the horizon it does not imply that they meet at that point, which would be a contradiction; perspective parallels never reach that point, although they appear to do so. Fig. 40 will explain this.

This is a really important rule, as all our perspective drawing relies on it. When we say that parallels are drawn to the same point on the horizon, it doesn't mean they actually meet at that point, which would be contradictory; perspective parallels never actually reach that point, even though they seem to. Fig. 40 will clarify this.

Suppose S to be the spectator, AB a transparent vertical plane which represents the picture seen edgeways, and HS and DC two parallel lines, mark off spaces between these parallels equal to SC, the height of the eye of the spectator, and raise verticals 2, 3, 4, 5, &c., forming so many squares. Vertical line 2 viewed from S will appear on AB but half its length, vertical 3 will be only a third, vertical 4 a fourth, and so on, and if we multiplied these spaces ad infinitum we must keep on dividing the line AB by the same number. So if we suppose AB to be a yard high and the distance from one vertical to another to be also a yard, then if one of these were a thousand yards away its representation at AB would be the thousandth part of a yard, or ten thousand yards away, its representation at AB would be the ten-thousandth part, and whatever the distance it must always be something; and therefore HS and DC, however far they may be produced 37 and however close they may appear to get, can never meet.

Suppose S is the viewer, AB is a transparent vertical plane that represents the picture seen from the side, and HS and Washington, D.C. are two parallel lines. Mark off spaces between these parallels equal to SC, the height of the viewer's eye, and draw vertical lines 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., forming several squares. Vertical line 2 viewed from S will appear on AB at half its length, vertical 3 will appear at a third, vertical 4 at a fourth, and so on. If we keep multiplying these spaces ad infinitum, we must continue dividing the line AB by the same number. So if we assume AB is a yard high and the distance from one vertical to another is also a yard, then if one of these were a thousand yards away, its representation at AB would be a thousandth of a yard, or if it were ten thousand yards away, its representation at AB would be a ten-thousandth of a yard. Regardless of the distance, it must always represent something; therefore, HS and DC, no matter how far they are extended 37 and however close they may seem to get, can never actually meet.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41 is a perspective view of the same figure—but more extended. It will be seen that a line drawn from the tenth upright K to S cuts off a tenth of AB. We look then upon these two lines SP, OP, as the sides of a long parallelogram of which SK is the diagonal, as cefd, the figure on the ground, is also a parallelogram.

Fig. 41 shows a perspective view of the same figure, but it's more extended. You can see that a line drawn from the tenth upright K to S cuts off a tenth of AB. We then consider these two lines SP, OP as the sides of a long parallelogram, with SK as the diagonal, just like cefd, which is the figure on the ground, is also a parallelogram.

The student can obtain for himself a further illustration of this rule by placing a looking-glass on one of the walls of his studio and then sketching himself and his surroundings as seen therein. 38 He will find that all the horizontals at right angles to the glass will converge to his own eye. This rule applies equally to lines which are at an angle to the picture plane as to those that are at right angles or perpendicular to it, as in Rule 7. It also applies to those on an inclined plane, as in Rule 8.

The student can further illustrate this rule by putting a mirror on one of the walls of his studio and then sketching himself and his surroundings as seen in it. 38 He will discover that all the horizontal lines that are at right angles to the mirror will converge at his own eye. This rule applies equally to lines that are at an angle to the picture plane and to those that are at right angles or perpendicular to it, as in Rule 7. It also applies to those on an inclined plane, as in Rule 8.

Fig. 42. Sketch of artist in studio.

Fig. 42. Sketch of artist in studio.

39 With the above rules and a clear notion of the definitions and conditions of perspective, we should be able to work out any proposition or any new figure that may present itself. At any rate, a thorough understanding of these few pages will make the labour now before us simple and easy. I hope, too, it may be found interesting. There is always a certain pleasure in deceiving and being deceived by the senses, and in optical and other illusions, such as making things appear far off that are quite near, in making a picture of an object on a flat surface to look as if it stood out and in relief by a kind of magic. But there is, I think, a still greater pleasure than this, namely, in invention and in overcoming difficulties—in finding out how to do things for ourselves by our reasoning faculties, in originating or being original, as it were. Let us now see how far we can go in this respect.

39 With the rules above and a clear understanding of the definitions and conditions of perspective, we should be able to figure out any proposition or new figure that comes up. At least, having a solid grasp of these few pages will make the task ahead straightforward and manageable. I also hope it will be interesting. There's always a certain pleasure in tricking and being tricked by our senses, and in optical and other illusions, like making things that are actually close seem far away, or creating an image of an object on a flat surface that looks three-dimensional through a kind of magic. But I believe there’s an even greater pleasure in invention and overcoming challenges—in figuring out how to do things for ourselves through our reasoning abilities, in being original, so to speak. Let’s see how far we can take this.

40
VIII
A Table or Index of the Rules of Perspective

The rules here set down have been fully explained in the previous pages, and this table is simply for the student's ready reference.

The rules outlined here have been fully explained in the previous pages, and this table is just for the student's quick reference.

Rule 1

All straight lines remain straight in their perspective appearance.

All straight lines look straight from their perspective.

Rule 2

Vertical lines remain vertical in perspective.

Vertical lines stay vertical in perspective.

Rule 3

Horizontals parallel to the base of the picture are also parallel to that base in the picture.

Horizontals that are parallel to the base of the picture are also parallel to that base in the picture.

Rule 4

All lines situated in a plane that is parallel to the picture plane diminish in proportion as they become more distant, but do not undergo any perspective deformation. This is called the front view.

All lines in a plane that’s parallel to the picture plane get smaller as they go further away, but they don’t change shape due to perspective. This is known as the front view.

Rule 5

All horizontal lines which are at right angles to the picture plane are drawn to the point of sight.

All horizontal lines that are perpendicular to the picture plane are drawn to the point of sight.

Rule 6

All horizontals which are at 45° to the picture plane are drawn to the point of distance.

All horizontal lines that are at a 45° angle to the picture plane are drawn to the vanishing point.

Rule 7

All horizontals forming any other angles but the above are drawn to some other points on the horizontal line.

All horizontal lines that form any angles other than the ones mentioned above are drawn to different points on the horizontal line.

Rule 8

Lines which incline upwards have their vanishing points above the horizon, and those which incline downwards, below it. In both cases they are on the vertical which passes through the vanishing point of their ground-plan or horizontal projections.

Lines that slope upwards have their vanishing points above the horizon, while those that slope downwards have theirs below it. In both situations, these points are located on the vertical line that runs through the vanishing point of their ground plan or horizontal projections.

41
Rule 9

The farther a point is removed from the picture plane the nearer does it appear to approach the horizon, so long as it is viewed from the same position.

The farther a point is from the picture plane, the closer it seems to get to the horizon, as long as it's viewed from the same spot.

Rule 10

Horizontals in the same plane which are drawn to the same point on the horizon are perspectively parallel to each other.

Horizontals in the same plane that extend to the same point on the horizon are considered perspective parallel to one another.

42

BOOK SECOND

THE PRACTICE OF PERSPECTIVE

In the foregoing book we have explained the theory or science of perspective; we now have to make use of our knowledge and to apply it to the drawing of figures and the various objects that we wish to depict.

In the previous book, we explained the theory or science of perspective; now we need to use our knowledge and apply it to drawing figures and the different objects we want to depict.

The first of these will be a square with two of its sides parallel to the picture plane and the other two at right angles to it, and which we call

The first of these will be a square with two of its sides parallel to the picture plane and the other two at right angles to it, and which we call

IX
The Square in Parallel Perspective

From a given point on the base line of the picture draw a line at right angles to that base. Let P be the given point on the base line AB, and S the point of sight. We simply draw a line along the ground to the point of sight S, and this line will be at right angles to the base, as explained in Rule 5, and consequently angle APS will be equal to angle SPB, although it does not look so here. This is our first difficulty, but one that we shall soon get over.

From a specific point on the baseline of the picture, draw a line that’s perpendicular to that base. Let P be the specified point on the baseline AB, and S the point of sight. We just draw a line on the ground toward the point of sight S, and this line will be perpendicular to the base, as explained in Rule 5. This means that angle APS will be equal to angle SPB, even if it doesn’t seem that way here. This is our first challenge, but one we’ll soon overcome.

Fig. 43.

Fig. 43.

43 In like manner we can draw any number of lines at right angles to the base, or we may suppose the point P to be placed at so many different positions, our only difficulty being to conceive these lines to be parallel to each other. See Rule 10.

43 Similarly, we can draw as many lines as we want at right angles to the base, or we can imagine placing point P in various positions, with the only challenge being to envision these lines as parallel to one another. See Rule 10.

Fig. 44.

Fig. 44.

X
The Diagonal
figure
Fig. 45.

From a given point on the base line draw a line at 45°, or half a right angle, to that base. Let P be the given point. Draw a line from P to the point of distance D and this line PD will be at an angle of 45°, or at the same angle as the diagonal of a square. See definitions.

From a point on the baseline, draw a line at a 45° angle, which is half of a right angle, to that baseline. Let P be that point. Draw a line from P to the point at distance D, and this line PD will be at a 45° angle, the same angle as the diagonal of a square. See definitions.

XI
The Square

Draw a square in parallel perspective on a given length on the base line. Let ab be the given length. From its two 44 extremities a and b draw aS and bS to the point of sight S. These two lines will be at right angles to the base (see Fig. 43). From a draw diagonal aD to point of distance D; this line will be 45° to base. At point c, where it cuts bS, draw dc parallel to ab and abcd is the square required.

Draw a square in parallel perspective using a specified length along the baseline. Let ab be the specified length. From its two ends, a and b, draw lines aS and bS to the point of sight S. These two lines will be at right angles to the baseline (see Fig. 43). From a, draw diagonal aD to the point of distance D; this line will be at a 45° angle to the baseline. At point c, where it intersects bS, draw dc parallel to ab and abcd is the square you need.

figure figure
Fig. 46. Fig. 47.

We have here proceeded in much the same way as in drawing a geometrical square (Fig. 47), by drawing two lines AE and BC at right angles to a given line, AB, and from A, drawing the diagonal AC at 45° till it cuts BC at C, and then through C drawing EC parallel to AB. Let it be remarked that because the two perspective lines (Fig. 48) AS and BS are at right angles to the base, they must consequently be parallel to each other, and therefore are perspectively equidistant, so that all lines parallel to AB and lying between them, such as ad, cf, &c., must be equal.

We have done this similarly to how we draw a geometric square (Fig. 47) by creating two lines AE and BC at right angles to a given line, AB. From A, we draw the diagonal AC at 45° until it intersects BC at C. Then, through C, we draw EC parallel to AB. It's important to note that because the two perspective lines (Fig. 48) AS and BS are at right angles to the base, they must be parallel to each other and, therefore, are equidistant in perspective. As a result, all lines parallel to AB that lie between them, such as ad, cf, etc., must be equal.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

figure
Fig. 49.

So likewise all diagonals drawn to the point of distance, which 45 are contained between these parallels, such as Ad, af, &c., must be equal. For all straight lines which meet at any point on the horizon are perspectively parallel to each other, just as two geometrical parallels crossing two others at any angle, as at Fig. 49. Note also (Fig. 48) that all squares formed between the two vanishing lines AS, BS, and by the aid of these diagonals, are also equal, and further, that any number of squares such as are shown in this figure (Fig. 50), formed in the same way and having equal bases, are also equal; and the nine squares contained in the square abcd being equal, they divide each side of the larger square into three equal parts.

Similarly, all the diagonals drawn to the vanishing point, which 45 are found between these parallels, like Ad, af, etc., must be equal. All straight lines that meet at any point on the horizon are perspective parallels, just like two geometric parallels intersecting two others at any angle, as shown in Fig. 49. Also, note in Fig. 48 that all squares created between the two vanishing lines AS and BS, using these diagonals, are equal. Additionally, any set of squares shown in this figure (Fig. 50), created the same way and having equal bases, are also equal. The nine squares within the square abcd are equal, dividing each side of the larger square into three equal parts.

From this we learn how we can measure any number of given 46 lengths, either equal or unequal, on a vanishing or retreating line which is at right angles to the base; and also how we can measure any width or number of widths on a line such as dc, that is, parallel to the base of the picture, however remote it may be from that base.

From this, we learn how to measure any number of lengths, whether they are equal or different, on a line that is disappearing or moving away, which is at a right angle to the base; and also how to measure any width or multiple widths on a line like dc, which is parallel to the base of the image, no matter how far it is from that base.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 50.

XII
Geometrical and Perspective Figures Contrasted

As at first there may be a little difficulty in realizing the resemblance between geometrical and perspective figures, and also about certain expressions we make use of, such as horizontals, perpendiculars, parallels, &c., which look quite different in perspective, I will here make a note of them and also place side by side the two views of the same figures.

As there may initially be some difficulty in recognizing the similarities between geometric and perspective figures, as well as with certain terms we use, like horizontals, perpendiculars, parallels, etc., which appear quite different in perspective, I will note them here and also show the two views of the same figures side by side.

figure figure
Fig. 51 A. The geometrical view. Fig. 51 B. The perspective view.
47 figure figure
Fig. 51 C. A geometrical square. Fig. 51 D. A perspective square.
figure figure
Fig. 51 E. Geometrical parallels. Fig. 51 F. Perspective parallels.
figure figure
Fig. 51 G. Geometrical perpendicular. Fig. 51 H. Perspective perpendicular.
figure figure
Fig. 51 I. Geometrical equal lines. Fig. 51 J. Perspective equal lines.
48 figure figure
Fig. 51 K. A geometrical circle. Fig. 51 Left. A perspective circle.
XIII
Of Certain Terms made use of in Perspective
figure
Fig. 52. Horizontals.

Of course when we speak of Perpendiculars we do not mean verticals only, but straight lines at right angles to other lines in any position. Also in speaking of lines a right or straight line is to be understood; or when we speak of horizontals we mean all straight lines that are parallel to the perspective plane, such as those on Fig. 52, no matter what direction they take so long as they are level. They are not to be confused with the horizon or horizontal-line.

Of course, when we talk about Perpendiculars, we're not just referring to vertical lines; we're talking about straight lines that form right angles with other lines in any position. Similarly, when we mention lines, we mean right or straight lines; and when we refer to horizontals, we are referring to all straight lines that are parallel to the perspective plane, like those shown in Fig. 52, regardless of their direction as long as they remain level. They shouldn't be confused with the horizon or horizontal line.

There are one or two other terms used in perspective which are not satisfactory because they are confusing, such as vanishing lines and vanishing points. The French term, fuyante or lignes fuyantes, or going-away lines, is more expressive; and point de fuite, instead of vanishing point, is much better. I have occasionally called the former retreating lines, but the simple meaning is, lines that are not parallel to the picture plane; but a vanishing line implies a line that disappears, and a vanishing point implies 49 a point that gradually goes out of sight. Still, it is difficult to alter terms that custom has endorsed. All we can do is to use as few of them as possible.

There are a couple of other terms used in perspective that aren't very clear, like vanishing lines and vanishing points. The French term, fuyante or lignes fuyantes, or going-away lines, is more descriptive; and point de fuite, instead of vanishing point, is much better. I've sometimes referred to the former as retreating lines, but the straightforward meaning is lines that aren't parallel to the picture plane; however, a vanishing line suggests a line that disappears, and a vanishing point suggests a point that gradually fades out of view. Still, it’s hard to change terms that have become widely accepted. All we can do is use as few of them as possible.

XIV
How to Measure Vanishing or Receding Lines

Divide a vanishing line which is at right angles to the picture plane into any number of given measurements. Let SA be the given line. From A measure off on the base line the divisions required, say five of 1 foot each; from each division draw diagonals to point of distance D, and where these intersect the line AC the corresponding divisions will be found. Note that as lines AB and AC are two sides of the same square they are necessarily equal, and so also are the divisions on AC equal to those on AB.

Divide a vanishing line that is perpendicular to the picture plane into any number of specified measurements. Let SA be the specified line. From A, measure off the required divisions on the base line, for example, five sections of 1 foot each; from each division, draw diagonals to the vanishing point D, and where these intersect the line AC, you'll find the corresponding divisions. Keep in mind that since lines AB and AC are two sides of the same square, they are necessarily equal, and the divisions on AC are also equal to those on AB.

Fig. 53.

Fig. 53.

figure
Fig. 54.

The line AB being the base of the picture, it is at the same time a perspective line and a geometrical one, so that we can use it as a scale for measuring given lengths thereon, but should there not be enough room on it to measure the required number we draw a second line, DC, which we divide in the same proportion and proceed to divide cf. This geometrical figure gives, as it were, a bird's-eye view or ground-plan of the above.

The line AB serves as the base of the picture, functioning as both a perspective line and a geometrical one. We can use it as a scale for measuring specific lengths on it. If there isn’t enough space on it to measure the necessary lengths, we draw a second line, DC, which we then divide in the same proportion and continue to divide cf. This geometric figure offers a bird's-eye view or ground plan of what we've described above.

50
XV
How to Place Squares in Given Positions

Draw squares of given dimensions at given distances from the base line to the right or left of the vertical line, which passes through the point of sight.

Draw squares of specified sizes at certain distances from the baseline, either to the right or left of the vertical line that goes through the point of view.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.

Let ab (Fig. 55) represent the base line of the picture divided into a certain number of feet; HD the horizon, VO the vertical. It is required to draw a square 3 feet wide, 2 feet to the right of the vertical, and 1 foot from the base.

Let ab (Fig. 55) represent the baseline of the picture divided into a specific number of feet; HD the horizon, VO the vertical. You need to draw a square that is 3 feet wide, positioned 2 feet to the right of the vertical, and 1 foot up from the base.

First measure from V, 2 feet to e, which gives the distance from the vertical. Second, from e measure 3 feet to b, which gives the width of the square; from e and b draw eS, bS, to point of sight. From either e or b measure 1 foot to the left, to f or . Draw fD to point of distance, which intersects eS at P, and gives the required distance from base. Draw Pg and B parallel to the base, and we have the required square.

First, measure from V 2 feet to e, which shows the distance from the vertical. Second, from e, measure 3 feet to b, which indicates the width of the square; from e and b, draw eS and bS to the point of sight. From either e or b, measure 1 foot to the left, to f or . Draw fD to the point of distance, which intersects eS at P, giving the required distance from the base. Draw Pg and B parallel to the base, and now we have the required square.

Square A to the left of the vertical is 2½ feet wide, 1 foot from the vertical and 2 feet from the base, and is worked out in the same way.

Square A, to the left of the vertical, is 2.5 feet wide, 1 foot away from the vertical, and 2 feet from the base, and is calculated in the same way.

Note.—It is necessary to know how to work to scale, especially in architectural drawing, where it is indispensable, but in working 51 out our propositions and figures it is not always desirable. A given length indicated by a line is generally sufficient for our requirements. To work out every problem to scale is not only tedious and mechanical, but wastes time, and also takes the mind of the student away from the reasoning out of the subject.

Note.—It's important to know how to work to scale, especially in architectural drawing, where it's essential. However, when developing our proposals and illustrations, it's not always necessary. A certain length shown by a line is usually enough for our needs. Working out every problem to scale is not only boring and mechanical, but it also wastes time and distracts students from understanding the subject.

XVI
How To Draw Pavements, &c.

Divide a vanishing line into parts varying in length. Let BS· be the vanishing line: divide it into 4 long and 3 short spaces; then proceed as in the previous figure. If we draw horizontals through the points thus obtained and from these raise verticals, we form, as it were, the interior of a building in which we can place pillars and other objects.

Divide a vanishing line into sections of different lengths. Let BS be the vanishing line: divide it into 4 long segments and 3 short segments; then continue as shown in the previous figure. If we draw horizontal lines through the points obtained and then raise vertical lines from these, we'll create, so to speak, the inside of a building where we can place columns and other objects.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

52 Or we can simply draw the plan of the pavement as in this figure.

52 Or we can just layout the pavement plan as shown in this figure.

Fig. 57.

Fig. 57.

And then put it into perspective.

And then put it in perspective.

Fig. 58.

Fig. 58.

53
XVII
Of Squares placed Vertically and at Different Heights, or the Cube in Parallel Perspective

On a given square raise a cube.

On a square, place a cube.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

ABCD is the given square; from A and B raise verticals AE, BF, equal to AB; join EF. Draw ES, FS, to point of sight; from C and D raise verticals CG, DH, till they meet vanishing lines ES, FS, in G and H, and the cube is complete.

ABCD is the square we're working with; from A and B, draw vertical lines AE and BF, each equal to AB; connect EF. Draw lines ES and FS to the point of sight; from C and D, draw vertical lines CG and DH until they intersect the vanishing lines ES and FS at points G and H, and the cube is complete.

XVIII
The Transposed Distance

The transposed distance is a point on the vertical VD·, at exactly the same distance from the point of sight as is the point of distance on the horizontal line.

The transposed distance is a point on the vertical VD, at the same distance from the point of view as the point of distance on the horizontal line.

It will be seen by examining this figure that the diagonals of the squares in a vertical position are drawn to this vertical distance-point, thus saving the necessity of taking the measurements first on the base line, as at CB, which in the case of distant objects, such as the farthest window, would be very inconvenient. Note that the windows at K are twice as high as they are wide. 54 Of course these or any other objects could be made of any proportion.

It can be observed by looking at this figure that the diagonals of the squares in an upright position are drawn to this vertical distance point, eliminating the need to take the measurements first on the baseline, like at CB, which would be quite inconvenient for distant objects, such as the farthest window. Note that the windows at K are twice as tall as they are wide. 54 Of course, these or any other objects could be made in any proportion.

Fig. 60.

Fig. 60.

XIX
The Front View of the Square and of the Proportions of Figures at Different Heights

According to Rule 4, all lines situated in a plane parallel to the picture plane diminish in length as they become more distant, but remain in the same proportions each to each as the original lines; as squares or any other figures retain the same form. Take the two squares ABCD, abcd (Fig. 61), one inside the other; although moved back from square EFGH they retain the same form. So 55 in dealing with figures of different heights, such as statuary or ornament in a building, if actually equal in size, so must we represent them.

According to Rule 4, all lines that are in a plane parallel to the picture plane get shorter as they get further away, but they stay proportional to the original lines, just like squares or any other shapes keep their form. Take the two squares ABCD and abcd (Fig. 61), with one inside the other; even though they are pushed back from square EFGH, they still keep the same shape. So 55 when dealing with figures of different heights, like statues or decorations in a building, if they are actually the same size, we need to represent them that way.

figure figure
Fig. 61. Fig. 62.

In this square K, with the checker pattern, we should not think of making the top squares smaller than the bottom ones; so it is with figures.

In this square K, with the checkerboard pattern, we should not consider making the top squares smaller than the bottom ones; the same applies to figures.

56 This subject requires careful study, for, as pointed out in our opening chapter, there are certain conditions under which we have to modify and greatly alter this rule in large decorative work.

56 This topic needs thorough examination, because, as mentioned in our first chapter, there are specific circumstances that necessitate modifying and significantly changing this guideline in extensive decorative projects.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 63.

In Fig. 63 the two statues A and B are the same size. So if traced through a vertical sheet of glass, K, as at c and d, they would also be equal; but as the angle b at which the upper one is seen is smaller than angle a, at which the lower figure or statue is seen, it will appear smaller to the spectator (S) both in reality and in the picture.

In Fig. 63, the two statues A and B are the same size. So, if traced through a vertical sheet of glass, K, like at c and d, they would also be equal. However, since the angle b from which the upper statue is viewed is smaller than angle a from which the lower statue is seen, it will appear smaller to the spectator (S) both in reality and in the picture.

57

Fig. 64.

Fig. 64.

But if we wish them to appear the same size to the spectator who is viewing them from below, we must make the angles a and b (Fig. 64), at which they are viewed, both equal. Then draw lines through equal arcs, as at c and d, till they cut the vertical NO (representing the side of the building where the figures are to be placed). We shall then obtain the exact size of the figure at that height, which will make it look the same size as the lower one, N. The same rule applies to the picture K, when it is of large proportions. As an example in painting, take Michelangelo’s large altar-piece in the Sistine Chapel, ‘The Last Judgement’; here the figures forming the upper group, with our Lord in judgement surrounded by saints, are about four times the size, that is, about twice the height, of those at the lower part of the fresco. The 58 figures on the ceiling of the same chapel are studied not only according to their height from the pavement, which is 60 ft., but to suit the arched form of it. For instance, the head of the figure of Jonah at the end over the altar is thrown back in the design, but owing to the curvature in the architecture is actually more forward than the feet. Then again, the prophets and sybils seated round the ceiling, which are perhaps the grandest figures in the whole range of art, would be 18 ft. high if they stood up; these, too, are not on a flat surface, so that it required great knowledge to give them their right effect.

But if we want them to look the same size to someone viewing them from below, we need to make the angles a and b (Fig. 64) equal. Then draw lines through equal arcs, as at c and d, until they intersect with the vertical NO (which represents the side of the building where the figures will be placed). This will give us the exact size of the figure at that height, making it appear the same size as the lower one, N. The same principle applies to the picture K, when it is large. For example, look at Michelangelo’s large altar-piece in the Sistine Chapel, ‘The Last Judgement’; the figures in the upper group, which includes our Lord in judgment surrounded by saints, are about four times the size, meaning about twice the height, of those at the bottom of the fresco. The 58 figures on the ceiling of the same chapel are designed not only with regard to their distance from the floor, which is 60 ft., but also to match the arched form of it. For example, the head of the figure of Jonah at the end above the altar is tilted back in the design, but because of the curvature in the architecture, it actually stands out more than the feet. Moreover, the prophets and sybils around the ceiling, which are arguably the most impressive figures in all of art, would be 18 ft. tall if they were standing; these, too, are not on a flat surface, which required great skill to ensure they have the correct effect.

figure
Fig. 65.

Of course, much depends upon the distance we view these statues or paintings from. In interiors, such as churches, halls, galleries, &c., we can make a fair calculation, such as the length of the nave, if the picture is an altar-piece—or say, half the length; so also with statuary in niches, friezes, and other architectural ornaments. The nearer we are to them, and the more we have to look up, the larger will the upper figures have to be; but if these are on the outside of a building that can be looked at from a long distance, then it is better not to have too great a difference.

Of course, a lot depends on how far away we are when we look at these statues or paintings. In places like churches, halls, galleries, etc., we can make a good estimate based on the length of the nave if the artwork is an altar piece—or about half that length for other pieces. The same goes for sculptures in niches, friezes, and other architectural decorations. The closer we are, and the more we have to look up, the larger the upper figures need to be. But if these are on the outside of a building that can be viewed from far away, it’s better not to have too much variation in size.

59 For the farther we recede the more equal are the angles at which we view the objects at their different stages, so that in each case we may have to deal with, we must consider the conditions attending it.

59 The farther we move away, the more uniform the angles become from which we see the objects at their various stages. Therefore, in each situation we encounter, we must take into account the surrounding conditions.

These remarks apply also to architecture in a great measure. Buildings that can only be seen from the street below, as pictures in a narrow gallery, require a different treatment from those out in the open, that are to be looked at from a distance. In the former case the same treatment as the Campanile at Florence is in some cases desirable, but all must depend upon the taste and judgement of the architect in such matters. All I venture to do here is to call attention to the subject, which seems as a rule to be ignored, or not to be considered of importance. Hence the many mistakes in our buildings, and the unsatisfactory and mean look of some of our public monuments.

These comments also apply quite a bit to architecture. Buildings that can only be seen from the street below, like pictures in a narrow gallery, need a different approach than those that are in open spaces and meant to be viewed from a distance. In the former case, a similar approach to the Campanile in Florence is sometimes preferable, but it all depends on the taste and judgment of the architect. All I want to do here is to draw attention to this topic, which often seems to be overlooked or considered unimportant. This leads to many mistakes in our buildings and the unsatisfactory and cheap appearance of some of our public monuments.

XX
Of Pictures that are Painted according to the Position they are to Occupy

In this double-page illustration of the wall of a picture-gallery, I have, as it were, hung the pictures in accordance with the style in which they are painted and the perspective adopted by their painters. It will be seen that those placed on the line level with the eye have their horizon lines fairly high up, and are not suited to be placed any higher. The Giorgione in the centre, the Monna Lisa to the right, and the Velasquez and Watteau to the left, are all pictures that fit that position; whereas the grander compositions above them are so designed, and are so large in conception, that we gain in looking up to them.

In this double-page illustration of a picture gallery wall, I've arranged the paintings based on their style and the perspective chosen by their artists. You'll notice that the ones positioned at eye level have their horizon lines situated high up and shouldn't be placed any higher. The Giorgione in the center, the Monna Lisa to the right, and the Velasquez and Watteau to the left all fit well in that spot; meanwhile, the larger, more impressive works above are designed in such a way that we gain a better appreciation for them when we look up.

Fig. 66.

Larger View

Fig. 66.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Note how grandly the young prince on his pony, by Velasquez, tells out against the sky, with its low horizon and strong contrast of light and dark; nor does it lose a bit by being placed where it is, over the smaller pictures.

Note how impressively the young prince on his pony, by Velasquez, stands out against the sky, with its low horizon and strong contrast of light and dark; it doesn’t lose any impact by being placed where it is, above the smaller pictures.

The Rembrandt, on the opposite side, with its burgomasters in black hats and coats and white collars, is evidently intended and painted for a raised position, and to be looked up to, which is evident from the perspective of the table. The grand Titian in 60 the centre, an altar-piece in one of the churches in Venice (here reversed), is also painted to suit its elevated position, with low horizon and figures telling boldly against the sky. Those placed low down are modern French pictures, with the horizon high up and almost above their frames, but placed on the ground they fit into the general harmony of the arrangement.

The Rembrandt on the opposite side, featuring burgomasters in black hats, coats, and white collars, is clearly designed to be displayed at a height, meant to be viewed from below, which is apparent from the table's perspective. The magnificent Titian in the center, an altarpiece from one of the churches in Venice (shown here in reverse), is also painted for an elevated display, with a low horizon and figures that stand out against the sky. The modern French paintings placed lower down have a high horizon, almost above their frames, but when set on the ground, they blend well with the overall harmony of the arrangement.

It seems to me it is well, both for those who paint and for those who hang pictures, that this subject should be taken into consideration. For it must be seen by this illustration that a bigger style is adopted by the artists who paint for high places in palaces or churches than by those who produce smaller easel-pictures intended to be seen close. Unfortunately, at our picture exhibitions, we see too often that nearly all the works, whether on large or small canvases, are painted for the line, and that those which happen to get high up look as if they were toppling over, because they have such a high horizontal line; and instead of the figures telling against the sky, as in this picture of the ‘Infant’ by Velasquez, the Reynolds, and the fat man treading on a flag, we have fields or sea or distant landscape almost to the top of the frame, and all, so methinks, because the perspective is not sufficiently considered.

It seems to me that it’s important for both artists and those who display their work to think about this topic. You can tell from this example that artists who create for prominent places in palaces or churches use a grander style than those who make smaller paintings meant to be viewed up close. Unfortunately, at our art exhibitions, we often see that nearly all the pieces, regardless of size, are painted for a straight-on view, and those that are placed high up often appear as if they might fall, because they have such a high horizontal line. Instead of the figures standing out against the sky, like in Velasquez’s painting of the ‘Infant’, Reynolds, or the heavy man stepping on a flag, we often have fields, ocean, or distant landscapes filling the top of the frame, and I think that’s mostly because the perspective hasn’t been given enough thought.

Note.—Whilst on this subject, I may note that the painter in his large decorative work often had difficulties to contend with, which arose from the form of the building or the shape of the wall on which he had to place his frescoes. Painting on the ceiling was no easy task, and Michelangelo, in a humorous sonnet addressed to Giovanni da Pistoya, gives a burlesque portrait of himself while he was painting the Sistine Chapel:—

Note.—While talking about this topic, I should mention that the painter often faced challenges in his large decorative work due to the shape of the building or the wall where he had to apply his frescoes. Painting on the ceiling was not an easy job, and Michelangelo, in a funny sonnet addressed to Giovanni da Pistoya, offers a humorous portrayal of himself while he was working on the Sistine Chapel:—

“I’ho già fatto un gozzo in questo stento.”

Now have I such a goitre ’neath my chin

Now I have a lump under my chin.

That I am like to some Lombardic cat,

That I'm like some Lombard cat,

My beard is in the air, my head i’ my back,

My beard is up in the air, my head is leaning back,

My chest like any harpy’s, and my face

My chest like any harpy's, and my face

Patched like a carpet by my dripping brush.

Patched like a carpet by my dripping paintbrush.

Nor can I see, nor can I budge a step;

Nor can I see, nor can I move an inch;

My skin though loose in front is tight behind,

My skin is loose in the front but tight in the back,

And I am even as a Syrian bow.

And I am just like a Syrian bow.

Alas! methinks a bent tube shoots not well;

Alas! I think a bent tube doesn't shoot very well;

So give me now thine aid, my Giovanni.

So please help me now, my Giovanni.

figure
Fig. 67.
‘Draw upon part of wall MN half the figure you mean to represent, and the other half upon the cove above (MR).’ Leonardo da Vinci’s Treatise on Painting.

61 At present that difficulty is got over by using large strong canvas, on which the picture can be painted in the studio and afterwards placed on the wall.

61 Right now, that challenge is tackled by using thick, durable canvas, where the artwork can be painted in the studio and later mounted on the wall.

However, the other difficulty of form has to be got over also. A great portion of the ceiling of the Sistine Chapel, and notably the prophets and sibyls, are painted on a curved surface, in which case a similar method to that explained by Leonardo da Vinci has to be adopted.

However, the other challenge of form also needs to be addressed. A large part of the ceiling of the Sistine Chapel, especially the prophets and sibyls, is painted on a curved surface, where a similar technique to the one described by Leonardo da Vinci must be used.

In Chapter CCCI he shows us how to draw a figure twenty-four braccia high upon a wall twelve braccia high. (The braccia is 1 ft. 10⅞ in.). He first draws the figure upright, then from the various points draws lines to a point F on the floor of the building, marking their intersections on the profile of the wall somewhat in the manner we have indicated, which serve as guides in making the outline to be traced.

In Chapter CCCI, he shows us how to draw a figure that’s twenty-four braccia tall on a wall that’s twelve braccia high. (A braccia is 1 ft. 10⅞ in.). He starts by drawing the figure upright, then from various points, he draws lines to a point F on the floor of the building, marking where they intersect on the profile of the wall in a way similar to what we've shown, which acts as guides for creating the outline to be traced.

62
XXI
Interiors

Fig. 68. Interior by de Hoogh.

Fig. 68. Interior by de Hoogh.

To draw the interior of a cube we must suppose the side facing us to be removed or transparent. Indeed, in all our figures which represent solids we suppose that we can see through them, 63 and in most cases we mark the hidden portions with dotted lines. So also with all those imaginary lines which conduct the eye to the various vanishing points, and which the old writers called ‘occult’.

To draw the inside of a cube, we need to imagine that the side facing us is either removed or transparent. In fact, in all of our illustrations that show three-dimensional shapes, we assume that we can see through them, 63 and in most cases, we indicate the hidden parts with dotted lines. This also applies to all those imaginary lines that guide the eye to different vanishing points, which the older authors referred to as ‘occult’.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 69.

When the cube is placed below the horizon (as in Fig. 59), we see the top of it; when on the horizon, as in the above (Fig. 69), if the side facing us is removed we see both top and bottom of it, or if a room, we see floor and ceiling, but otherwise we should see but one side (that facing us), or at most two sides. When the cube is above the horizon we see underneath it.

When the cube is positioned below the horizon (as in Fig. 59), we see its top; when it's on the horizon, as shown above (Fig. 69), if the side facing us is taken away, we can see both the top and the bottom, or if it's a room, we can see the floor and the ceiling. Otherwise, we would only see one side (the one facing us) or, at most, two sides. When the cube is above the horizon, we can see underneath it.

We shall find this simple cube of great use to us in architectural subjects, such as towers, houses, roofs, interiors of rooms, &c.

We will find this simple cube really useful for architectural things, like towers, houses, roofs, interiors of rooms, etc.

In this little picture by de Hoogh we have the application of the perspective of the cube and other foregoing problems.

In this little picture by de Hoogh, we see the use of cube perspective and other earlier challenges.

64
XXII
The Square at an Angle of 45°

When the square is at an angle of 45° to the base line, then its sides are drawn respectively to the points of distance, DD, and one of its diagonals which is at right angles to the base is drawn to the point of sight S, and the other ab, is parallel to that base or ground line.

When the square is tilted at a 45° angle to the baseline, its sides are aligned with the distance points, DD. One of its diagonals, which is perpendicular to the baseline, is drawn to the sight point S, while the other diagonal ab runs parallel to the baseline.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70.

To draw a pavement with its squares at this angle is but an amplification of the above figure. Mark off on base equal distances, 1, 2, 3, &c., representing the diagonals of required squares, and from each of these points draw lines to points of distance DD´. These lines will intersect each other, and so form the squares of the pavement; to ensure correctness, lines should also be drawn from these points 1, 2, 3, to the point of sight S, and also horizontals parallel to the base, as ab.

To create a pavement with squares at this angle is just an extension of the figure mentioned above. Mark off equal distances along the base, 1, 2, 3, etc., to represent the diagonals of the required squares. From each of these points, draw lines to the distance DD´. These lines will cross each other, forming the squares of the pavement. To ensure accuracy, also draw lines from points 1, 2, 3 to the point of sight S, as well as horizontal lines parallel to the base, like ab.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 71.

65
XXIII
The Cube at an Angle of 45°

Having drawn the square at an angle of 45°, as shown in the previous figure, we find the length of one of its sides, dh, by drawing a line, SK, through h, one of its extremities, till it cuts the base line at K. Then, with the other extremity d for centre and dK for radius, describe a quarter of a circle Km; the chord thereof mK will be the geometrical length of dh. At d raise vertical dC equal to mK, which gives us the height of the cube, then raise verticals at a, h, &c., their height being found by drawing CD and CD´ to the two points of distance, and so completing the figure.

Having drawn the square at a 45° angle, as shown in the previous figure, we find the length of one of its sides, dh, by drawing a line, SK, through h, one of its ends, until it intersects the base line at K. Then, using the other end d as the center and dK as the radius, draw a quarter circle Km; the chord mK will represent the exact length of dh. From d, raise a vertical line dC equal to mK, which gives us the height of the cube. Next, raise verticals at a, h, etc., with their heights determined by drawing CD and CD to the two points of distance, completing the figure.

Fig. 72.

Fig. 72.

66
XXIV
Pavements Drawn by Means of Squares at 45°
figure
Fig. 75.

The square at 45° will be found of great use in drawing pavements, roofs, ceilings, &c. In Figs. 73, 74 it is shown how 67 having set out one square it can be divided into four or more equal squares, and any figure or tile drawn therein. Begin by making a geometrical or ground plan of the required design, as at Figs. 73 and 74, where we have bricks placed at right angles to each other in rows, a common arrangement in brick floors, or tiles of an octagonal form as at Fig. 75.

The square at 45° is really useful for drawing pavements, roofs, ceilings, etc. In Figs. 73, 74, it shows how 67 once you've set out one square, you can divide it into four or more equal squares and draw any figure or tile within them. Start by creating a geometric or ground plan of the design you want, as seen in Figs. 73 and 74, where we have bricks arranged at right angles to each other in rows, a common setup in brick floors, or tiles in an octagonal shape, like in Fig. 75.

Fig. 73.

Fig. 73.

Fig. 74.

Fig. 74.

68
XXV
The Perspective Vanishing Scale

The vanishing scale, which we shall find of infinite use in our perspective, is founded on the facts explained in Rule 10. We there find that all horizontals in the same plane, which are drawn to the same point on the horizon, are perspectively parallel to each other, so that if we measure a certain height or width on the picture plane, and then from each extremity draw lines to any convenient point on the horizon, then all the perpendiculars drawn between these lines will be perspectively equal, however much they may appear to vary in length.

The vanishing scale, which will be incredibly useful for our perspective, is based on the principles outlined in Rule 10. There, we see that all horizontal lines in the same plane that converge at the same point on the horizon are perspective parallels. This means that if we measure a specific height or width on the picture plane and then draw lines from each end to any point on the horizon, all the vertical lines drawn between these lines will be perspective equal, no matter how much they seem to differ in length.

Fig. 76.

Fig. 76.

Let us suppose that in this figure (76) AB and A·B· each represent 5 feet. Then in the first case all the verticals, as e, f, g, h, drawn between AO and BO represent 5 feet, and in the second case all the horizontals e, f, g, h, drawn between A·O and B·O also represent 5 feet each. So that by the aid of this scale we can give the exact perspective height and width of any object in the picture, however far it may be from the base line, for of course we can increase or diminish our measurements at AB and A·B· to whatever length we require.

Let’s assume that in this figure (76) AB and A·B· each represent 5 feet. In the first case, all the vertical lines, like e, f, g, h, drawn between AO and BO represent 5 feet, and in the second case, all the horizontal lines e, f, g, h, drawn between A·O and B·O also represent 5 feet each. This way, using this scale, we can accurately determine the perspective height and width of any object in the picture, no matter how far it is from the baseline, since we can adjust our measurements at AB and A-B to whatever length we need.

As it may not be quite evident at first that the points O may be taken at random, the following figure will prove it.

As it may not be obvious at first that the points O can be chosen randomly, the following figure will demonstrate it.

69
XXVI
The Vanishing Scale can be Drawn to any Point on the Horizon
figure
Fig. 77.

From AB (Fig. 77) draw AO, BO, thus forming the scale, raise vertical C. Now form a second scale from AB by drawing AO· BO·, and therein raise vertical D at an equal distance from the base. First, then, vertical C equals AB, and secondly vertical D equals AB, therefore C equals D, so that either of these scales will measure a given height at a given distance.

From AB (Fig. 77), draw AO and BO to create the scale, then raise vertical C. Next, create a second scale from AB by drawing AO and BO, and raise vertical D at the same distance from the base. First, vertical C is equal to AB, and second, vertical D is equal to AB, so C equals D. This means that either scale can measure a certain height at a specific distance.

(See axioms of geometry.)

(See geometry axioms.)

71
XXVII
Application of Vanishing Scales to Drawing Figures

In this figure we have marked off on a level plain three or four points a, b, c, d, to indicate the places where we wish to stand our figures. AB represents their average height, so we have made our scale AO, BO, accordingly. From each point marked we draw a line parallel to the base till it reaches the scale. From the point where it touches the line AO, raise perpendicular as a, which gives the height required at that distance, and must be referred back to the figure itself.

In this figure, we’ve marked three or four points a, b, c, d on a flat surface to show where we want to place our figures. AB represents their average height, so we’ve set our scale AO, BO accordingly. From each marked point, we draw a line parallel to the base until it reaches the scale. From the point where it touches the line AO, draw a perpendicular line as a, which gives the height needed at that distance, and must be referenced back to the figure itself.

Fig. 78.

Fig. 78.

XXVIII
How to Determine the Heights of Figures on a Level Plane
First Case.

This is but a repetition of the previous figure, excepting that we have substituted these schoolgirls for the vertical lines. If we wish to make some taller than the others, and some shorter, we can easily do so, as must be evident (see Fig. 79).

This is just a repeat of the previous figure, except we’ve replaced the vertical lines with these schoolgirls. If we want to make some taller and some shorter, we can easily do that, as should be clear (see Fig. 79).

[70a] figure

[70a] figure

Fig. 79. Schoolgirls.

Fig. 79. Students.

Note that in this first case the scale is below the horizon, so that we see over the heads of the figures, those nearest to us being the lowest down. That is to say, we are looking on this scene from a slightly raised platform.

Note that in this first case the scale is below the horizon, so we are looking over the heads of the figures, with those closest to us being the lowest down. In other words, we are viewing this scene from a slightly elevated platform.

72
Second Case.

To draw figures at different distances when their heads are above the horizon, or as they would appear to a person sitting on a low seat. The height of the heads varies according to the distance of the figures (Fig. 80).

To draw figures at different distances when their heads are above the horizon, or as they would look to someone sitting in a low seat. The height of the heads changes depending on how far away the figures are (Fig. 80).

[70b] figure

[70b] figure

Fig. 80. Cavaliers.

Cavaliers.

Third Case.

How to draw figures when their heads are about the height of the horizon, or as they appear to a person standing on the same level or walking among them.

How to draw figures when their heads are about the height of the horizon, or how they look to someone standing at the same level or walking among them.

Fig. 81.

Fig. 81.

In this case the heads or the eyes are on a level with the horizon, and we have little necessity for a scale at the side unless it is for the purpose of ascertaining or marking their distances from the base line, and their respective heights, which of course vary; so in all cases allowance must be made for some being taller and some shorter than the scale measurement.

In this case, the heads or the eyes line up with the horizon, and we don’t really need a scale on the side unless it's to find out or note their distances from the baseline and their different heights, which, of course, vary; so in all cases, we must consider that some are taller and some are shorter than the scale measurement.

XXIX
The Horizon above the Figures

In this example from De Hoogh the doorway to the left is higher up than the figure of the lady, and the effect seems to me 73 more pleasing and natural for this kind of domestic subject. This delightful painter was not only a master of colour, of sunlight effect, and perfect composition, but also of perspective, and thoroughly understood the charm it gives to a picture, when cunningly introduced, for he makes the spectator feel that he 74 can walk along his passages and courtyards. Note that he frequently puts the point of sight quite at the side of his canvas, as at S, which gives almost the effect of angular perspective whilst it preserves the flatness and simplicity of parallel or horizontal perspective.

In this example from De Hoogh, the doorway on the left is positioned higher than the lady, and the overall effect feels more pleasing and natural for a domestic scene. This talented painter was not only a master of color, sunlight effects, and perfect composition, but also of perspective. He truly understood the charm it adds to a painting when cleverly used, making the viewer feel as if they can stroll through his corridors and courtyards. Notice that he often places the vanishing point off to the side of his canvas, as seen at S, which creates an almost angular perspective while maintaining the flatness and simplicity of parallel or horizontal perspective.

Fig. 82. Courtyard by De Hoogh.

Fig. 82. Courtyard by De Hoogh.

XXX
Landscape Perspective

In an extended view or landscape seen from a height, we have to consider the perspective plane as in a great measure lying above it, reaching from the base of the picture to the horizon; but of course pierced here and there by trees, mountains, buildings, &c. As a rule in such cases, we copy our perspective from nature, and do not trouble ourselves much about mathematical rules. It is as well, however, to know them, so that we may feel sure we are right, as this gives certainty to our touch and enables us to work with freedom. Nor must we, when painting from nature, forget to take into account the effects of atmosphere and the various tones of the different planes of distance, for this makes much of the difference between a good picture and a bad one; being a more subtle quality, it requires a keener artistic sense to discover and depict it. (See Figs. 95 and 103.)

In a wide view or landscape seen from above, we need to think of the perspective plane as mostly lying above it, stretching from the bottom of the picture to the horizon; but of course, it's interrupted here and there by trees, mountains, buildings, etc. Typically, in these situations, we take our perspective from nature and don’t worry too much about mathematical rules. However, it’s good to understand them so that we can be confident in our work, which allows us to paint with more freedom. Also, when painting from nature, we shouldn’t forget to consider the effects of the atmosphere and the different tones of the various distant planes, as this significantly distinguishes a good picture from a bad one; being a more subtle quality, it requires a sharper artistic sense to recognize and portray it. (See Figs. 95 and 103.)

If the landscape painter wishes to test his knowledge of perspective, let him dissect and work out one of Turner's pictures, or better still, put his own sketch from nature to the same test.

If a landscape painter wants to challenge his understanding of perspective, he should analyze and break down one of Turner's paintings, or even better, put his own outdoor sketch through the same process.

XXXI
Figures of Different Heights
The Chessboard

In this figure the same principle is applied as in the previous one, but the chessmen being of different heights we have to arrange the scale accordingly. First ascertain the exact height of each piece, as Q, K, B, which represent the queen, king, bishop, &c. Refer these dimensions to the scale, as shown at QKB, which will give us the perspective measurement of each piece according to the square on which it is placed.

In this figure, the same principle is applied as in the previous one, but since the chess pieces are of different heights, we need to adjust the scale accordingly. First, determine the exact height of each piece, like Q, K, B, which stand for queen, king, bishop, etc. Refer these dimensions to the scale, as shown at QKB, which will provide the perspective measurement of each piece based on the square it’s on.

[75] figure

[75] figure

Fig. 83. Chessboard and Men.

Fig. 83. Chessboard and Pieces.

76 This is shown in the above drawing (Fig. 83) in the case of the white queen and the black queen, &c. The castle, the knight, and the pawn being about the same height are measured from the fourth line of the scale marked C.

76 This is illustrated in the drawing above (Fig. 83) with the white queen and the black queen, etc. The rook, the knight, and the pawn, which are about the same height, are measured from the fourth line of the scale marked C.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

77
XXXII
Application of the Vanishing Scale to Drawing Figures at an Angle when their Vanishing Points are Inaccessible or Outside the Picture

This is exemplified in the drawing of a fence (Fig. 84). Form scale aS, bS, in accordance with the height of the fence or wall to be depicted. Let ao represent the direction or angle at which it is placed, draw od to meet the scale at d, at d raise vertical dc, which gives the height of the fence at oo·. Draw lines bo·, eo, ao, &c., and it will be found that all these lines if produced will meet at the same point on the horizon. To divide the fence into spaces, divide base line af as required and proceed as already shown.

This is shown in the drawing of a fence (Fig. 84). Use scale aS, bS, based on the height of the fence or wall to be illustrated. Let ao indicate the direction or angle at which it’s positioned, then draw od to meet the scale at d. At d, raise a vertical line dc, which gives the height of the fence at oo·. Draw lines bo·, eo, ao, etc., and you’ll find that all these lines, if extended, will converge at the same point on the horizon. To divide the fence into sections, split base line af as needed and continue as previously demonstrated.

XXXIII
The Reduced Distance. How to Proceed when the Point of Distance is Inaccessible

It has already been shown that too near a point of distance is objectionable on account of the distortion and disproportion resulting from it. At the same time, the long distance-point must be some way out of the picture and therefore inconvenient. The object of the reduced distance is to bring that point within the picture.

It has already been shown that being too close to a subject is problematic due to the distortion and disproportion it causes. At the same time, the far distance-point needs to be somewhat outside the frame and therefore inconvenient. The purpose of reducing the distance is to bring that point into the frame.

Fig. 85.

Fig. 85.

In Fig. 85 we have made the distance nearly twice the length of the base of the picture, and consequently a long way out of it. Draw Sa, Sb, and from a draw aD to point of distance, which cuts Sb at o, and determines the depth of the square acob. But 78 we can find that same point if we take half the base and draw a line from ½ base to ½ distance. But even this ½ distance-point does not come inside the picture, so we take a fourth of the base and a fourth of the distance and draw a line from ¼ base to ¼ distance. We shall find that it passes precisely through the same point o as the other lines aD, &c. We are thus able to find the required point o without going outside the picture.

In Fig. 85, we've made the distance almost twice the length of the base of the image, which places it quite far out. Draw Sa, Sb, and from a, draw aD to the point of distance, which intersects Sb at o, determining the depth of the square acob. But we can find that same point if we take half the base and draw a line from ½ base to ½ distance. However, this ½ distance point still does not fall inside the image, so we take a quarter of the base and a quarter of the distance and draw a line from ¼ base to ¼ distance. We will find that it passes exactly through the same point o as the other lines aD, etc. This way, we can locate the required point o without stepping outside the picture.

Of course we could in the same way take an 8th or even a 16th distance, but the great use of this reduced distance, in addition to the above, is that it enables us to measure any depth into the picture with the greatest ease.

Of course, we could also take an 8th or even a 16th distance, but a major benefit of this shorter distance, in addition to the ones mentioned, is that it allows us to measure any depth in the picture with much more ease.

It will be seen in the next figure that without having to extend the base, as is usually done, we can multiply that base to any amount by making use of these reduced distances on the horizontal line. This is quite a new method of proceeding, and it will be seen is mathematically correct.

It will be shown in the next figure that without needing to extend the base, as is typically done, we can multiply that base to any amount by using these shorter distances on the horizontal line. This is quite a new approach, and it will be demonstrated to be mathematically correct.

XXXIV
How to Draw a Long Passage or Cloister by means of the Reduced Distance

Fig. 86.

Fig. 86.

In Fig. 86 we have divided the base of the first square into four equal parts, which may represent so many feet, so that A4 and Bd being the retreating sides of the square each represents 4 feet. But we found point ¼ D by drawing 3D from ¼ base to ¼ distance, and by proceeding in the same way from each division, 79 A, 1, 2, 3, we mark off on SB four spaces each equal to 4 feet, in all 16 feet, so that by taking the whole base and the ¼ distance we find point O, which is distant four times the length of the base AB. We can multiply this distance to any amount by drawing other diagonals to 8th distance, &c. The same rule applies to this corridor (Fig. 87 and Fig. 88).

In Fig. 86, we’ve divided the bottom of the first square into four equal parts, which can each represent 4 feet. So, A4 and Bd, as the back sides of the square, each represent 4 feet. We found point ¼ D by drawing 3D from ¼ of the base to ¼ of the distance, and by doing the same from each division, 79 we mark off four spaces on SB, each equal to 4 feet, totaling 16 feet. By taking the whole base and the ¼ distance, we find point O, which is four times the length of the base AB. We can extend this distance further by drawing other diagonals to 8th distance, etc. The same rule applies to this corridor (Fig. 87 and Fig. 88).

figure figure
Fig. 87. Fig. 88.
XXXV
How to Form a Vanishing Scale that shall give the Height, Depth, and Distance of any Object in the Picture

If we make our scale to vanish to the point of sight, as in Fig. 89, we can make SB, the lower line thereof, a measuring line for distances. Let us first of all divide the base AB into eight parts, each part representing 5 feet. From each division draw lines to 8th distance; by their intersections with SB we obtain 80 measurements of 40, 80, 120, 160, &c., feet. Now divide the side of the picture BE in the same manner as the base, which gives us the height of 40 feet. From the side BE draw lines 5S, 15S, &c., to point of sight, and from each division on the base line also draw lines 5S, 10S, 15S, &c., to point of sight, and from each division on SB, such as 40, 80, &c., draw horizontals parallel to base. We thus obtain squares 40 feet wide, beginning at base AB and reaching as far as required. Note how the height of the flagstaff, which is 140 feet high and 280 feet distant, is obtained. So also any buildings or other objects can be measured, such as those shown on the left of the picture.

If we make our scale disappear from sight, like in Fig. 89, we can use SB, the lower line, as a measuring line for distances. First, let's divide the base AB into eight parts, with each part representing 5 feet. From each division, draw lines to the 8th distance; the points where they intersect with SB will give us measurements of 40, 80, 120, 160, etc., feet. Next, divide the side of the picture BE in the same way as the base, which gives us a height of 40 feet. From the side BE, draw lines at 5S, 15S, etc., to the point of sight. Also, from each division on the base line, draw lines at 5S, 10S, 15S, etc., to the point of sight, and from each division on SB, such as 40, 80, etc., draw horizontal lines parallel to the base. This way, we get squares that are 40 feet wide, starting from base AB and extending as far as needed. Notice how we can measure the height of the flagpole, which is 140 feet tall and 280 feet away. Similarly, we can measure any buildings or other objects, like those shown on the left side of the picture.

Fig. 89.

Fig. 89.

81
XXXVI
Measuring Scale on Ground

A simple and very old method of drawing buildings, &c., and giving them their right width and height is by means of squares of a given size, drawn on the ground.

A simple and very old way to draw buildings, etc., and to get their correct width and height is by using squares of a specific size drawn on the ground.

Fig. 90.

Fig. 90.

In the above sketch (Fig. 90) the squares on the ground 84 represent 3 feet each way, or one square yard. Taking this as our standard measure, we find the door on the left is 10 feet high, that the archway at the end is 21 feet high and 12 feet wide, and so on.

In the sketch above (Fig. 90), the squares on the ground 84 represent 3 feet on each side, or one square yard. Using this as our standard measurement, we see that the door on the left is 10 feet high, the archway at the end is 21 feet high and 12 feet wide, and so on.

Fig. 91 is a sketch made at Sandwich, Kent, and shows a somewhat similar subject to Fig. 84, but the irregularity and freedom of the perspective gives it a charm far beyond the rigid precision of the other, while it conforms to its main laws. This sketch, however, is the real artist's perspective, or what we might term natural perspective.

Fig. 91 is a sketch made at Sandwich, Kent, and shows a somewhat similar subject to Fig. 84, but the irregularity and freedom of the perspective gives it a charm far beyond the rigid precision of the other, while it conforms to its main laws. This sketch, however, is the real artist's perspective, or what we might call natural perspective.

[82] figure

[82] figure

Fig. 91. Natural Perspective.

Fig. 91. Natural Perspective.

XXXVII
Application of the Reduced Distance and the Vanishing Scale to Drawing a Lighthouse, &c.

In the drawing of Honfleur (Fig. 92) we divide the base AB as 85 in the previous figure, but the spaces measure 5 feet instead of 3 feet: so that taking the 8th distance, the divisions on the vanishing line BS measure 40 feet each, and at point O we have 400 feet of distance, but we require 800. So we again reduce the distance to a 16th. We thus multiply the base by 16. Now let us take a base of 50 feet at f and draw line fD to 16th distance; if we multiply 50 feet by 16 we obtain the 800 feet required.

In the drawing of Honfleur (Fig. 92), we divide the base AB as 85 in the previous figure, but the spaces are 5 feet instead of 3 feet. Therefore, by taking the 8th distance, the divisions on the vanishing line BS measure 40 feet each, and at point O we have 400 feet of distance, but we need 800. So we reduce the distance to a 16th again. This means we multiply the base by 16. Now, let’s take a base of 50 feet at f and draw line fD to 16th distance; if we multiply 50 feet by 16, we get the 800 feet we need.

[83] figure

[83] figure

Fig. 92. Honfleur.

Honfleur.

The height of the lighthouse is found by means of the vanishing scale, which is 15 feet below and 15 feet above the horizon, or 30 feet from the sea-level. At L we raise a vertical LM, which shows the position of the lighthouse. Then on that vertical measure the height required as shown in the figure.

The height of the lighthouse is determined using the vanishing scale, which is 15 feet below and 15 feet above the horizon, totaling 30 feet from sea level. At L, we draw a vertical LM, indicating the location of the lighthouse. Then on that vertical scale, measure the height needed as illustrated in the figure.

Perspective of a lighthouse 135 feet high at 800 feet distance.

Perspective of a lighthouse 135 feet tall from a distance of 800 feet.

Fig. 93. Key to Fig. 92, Honfleur.

Fig. 93. Key to Fig. 92, Honfleur.

The 800 feet could be obtained at once by drawing line fD, or 50 feet, to 16th distance. The other measurements obtained by 8th distance serve for nearer buildings.

The 800 feet can be achieved at once by drawing line fD, or 50 feet, to 16th distance. The other measurements acquired by 8th distance are used for closer buildings.

XXXVIII
How to Measure Long Distances such as a Mile or Upwards

The wonderful effect of distance in Turner's pictures is not to be achieved by mere measurement, and indeed can only be properly done by studying Nature and drawing her perspective as she presents it to us. At the same time it is useful to be able to test and to set out distances in arranging a composition. This latter, if neglected, often leads to great difficulties and sometimes to repainting.

The amazing effect of distance in Turner's paintings isn’t just about measurements; it can really only be captured by observing nature and drawing her perspective as she shows it to us. However, it's also helpful to measure and establish distances when arranging a composition. If this part is overlooked, it can lead to significant issues and sometimes require repainting.

To show the method of measuring very long distances we have to work with a very small scale to the foot, and in Fig. 94 I have divided the base AB into eleven parts, each part representing 10 feet. First draw AS and BS to point of sight. 86 From A draw AD to ¼ distance, and we obtain at 440 on line BS four times the length of AB, or 110 feet × 4 = 440 feet. Again, taking the whole base and drawing a line from S to 8th distance we obtain eight times 110 feet or 880 feet. If now we use the 16th distance we get sixteen times 110 feet, or 1,760 feet, one-third of a mile; by repeating this process, but by using the base at 1,760, which is the same length in perspective as AB, we obtain 3,520 feet, and then again using the base at 3,520 and proceeding in the same way we obtain 5,280 feet, or one mile to the archway. The flags show their heights at their respective distances from the base. By the scale at the side of the picture, BO, we can measure any height above or any depth below the perspective plane.

To demonstrate how to measure very long distances, we need to work with a very small scale to the foot. In Fig. 94, I’ve divided the base AB into eleven parts, with each part representing 10 feet. First, draw AS and BS to the point of sight. 86 From A, draw AD to the ¼ distance, and we get 440 on line BS, which is four times the length of AB, or 110 feet × 4 = 440 feet. Next, taking the whole base and drawing a line from S to the 8th distance gives us eight times 110 feet, or 880 feet. If we now use the 16th distance, we get sixteen times 110 feet, or 1,760 feet, which is one-third of a mile. By repeating this process using the base at 1,760, the same length as AB in perspective, we obtain 3,520 feet, and by using the base at 3,520 and proceeding the same way, we get 5,280 feet, or one mile to the archway. The flags indicate their heights at their respective distances from the base. Using the scale next to the picture, BO, we can measure any height above or depth below the perspective plane.

Fig. 94.
larger view

Fig. 94.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Note.—This figure (here much reduced) should be drawn large by the student, so that the numbering, &c., may be made more distinct. Indeed, many of the other figures should be copied large, and worked out with care, as lessons in perspective.

Note.—This figure (now much smaller) should be drawn larger by the student, so that the numbering, etc., can be clearer. In fact, many of the other figures should be copied in a larger size and done with attention to detail, as lessons in perspective.

87
XXXIX
Further Illustration of Long Distances and Extended Views

An extended view is generally taken from an elevated position, so that the principal part of the landscape lies beneath the perspective plane, as already noted, and we shall presently treat of objects and figures on uneven ground. In the previous figure is shown how we can measure heights and depths to any extent. But when we turn to a drawing by Turner, such as the ‘View from Richmond Hill’, we feel that the only way to accomplish such perspective as this, is to go and draw it from nature, and even then to use our judgement, as he did, as to how much we may emphasize or even exaggerate certain features.

An extended view is usually taken from a high vantage point, so the main part of the landscape is below the perspective plane, as mentioned before, and we will soon discuss objects and figures on uneven ground. The previous figure demonstrates how we can measure heights and depths as needed. However, when we look at a drawing by Turner, like 'View from Richmond Hill', it becomes clear that the only way to achieve a perspective like this is to go out and draw it from real life, and even then we must use our judgment, just as he did, regarding how much we might highlight or even exaggerate certain features.

Fig. 95. Turner's View from Richmond Hill.

Fig. 95. Turner's View from Richmond Hill.

Note in this view the foreground on which the principal figures stand is on a level with the perspective plane, while the river and surrounding park and woods are hundreds of feet below us 88 and stretch away for miles into the distance. The contrasts obtained by this arrangement increase the illusion of space, and the figures in the foreground give as it were a standard of measurement, and by their contrast to the size of the trees show us how far away those trees are.

Note that in this view, the foreground where the main figures stand is even with the perspective plane, while the river and the nearby park and woods are hundreds of feet below us88 and extend for miles into the distance. The contrasts created by this setup enhance the illusion of space, and the figures in the foreground essentially provide a scale for measurement, showing us how far away those trees are by their size contrast.

XL
How to Ascertain the Relative Heights of Figures on an Inclined Plane

The three figures to the right marked f, g, b (Fig. 96) are on level ground, and we measure them by the vanishing scale aS, bS. Those to the left, which are repetitions of them, are on an inclined plane, the vanishing point of which is ; by the side of this plane we have placed another vanishing scale , , by which we measure the figures on that incline in the same way as on the level plane. It will be seen that if a horizontal line is drawn from the foot of one of these figures, say G, to point O on the edge of the incline, then dropped vertically to , then again carried on to o·· where the other figure g is, we find it is the same height and also that the other vanishing scale is the same width at that distance, so that we can work from either one or the other. In the event of the rising ground being uneven we can make use of the scale on the level plane.

The three figures on the right, labeled f, g, b (Fig. 96), are on flat ground, and we measure them using the vanishing scale aS, bS. The figures on the left, which are repeats of these, are on a sloped surface, with the vanishing point at . Alongside this slope, we've set up another vanishing scale , , allowing us to measure the figures on the incline in the same way as those on the flat surface. If we draw a horizontal line from the base of one of these figures, say G, to point O at the edge of the slope, then drop it straight down to , and continue to o·· where the other figure g is, we see that it's the same height and that the other vanishing scale has the same width at that distance, meaning we can use either scale. If the ground slopes unevenly, we can still use the scale on the flat plane.

Fig. 96.

Fig. 96.

89
XLI
How to Find the Distance of a Given Figure or Point from the Base Line

Let P be the given figure. Form scale ACS, S being the point of sight and D the distance. Draw horizontal do through P. From A draw diagonal AD to distance point, cutting do in o, through o draw SB to base, and we now have a square AdoB on the perspective plane; and as figure P is standing on the far side of that square it must be the distance AB, which is one side of it, from the base line—or picture plane. For figures very far away it might be necessary to make use of half-distance.

Let P be the figure in question. Create a scale ACS, where S is the viewpoint and D represents the distance. Draw a horizontal line do through P. From A, draw a diagonal line Ad to the distance point, intersecting do at o. Through o, draw SB to the base. We now have a square AdoB on the perspective plane; since figure P is positioned on the opposite side of that square, it must be the distance AB, which represents one side of it, from the baseline—or picture plane. For figures that are quite far away, it may be necessary to use half the distance.

Fig. 97.

Fig. 97.

90
XLII
How to Measure the Height of Figures on Uneven Ground

In previous problems we have drawn figures on level planes, which is easy enough. We have now to represent some above and some below the perspective plane.

In previous problems, we’ve drawn figures on flat surfaces, which is pretty straightforward. Now, we need to show some figures above and some below the perspective plane.

Fig. 98.

Fig. 98.

91 Form scale bS, cS; mark off distances 20 feet, 40 feet, &c. Suppose figure K to be 60 feet off. From point at his feet draw horizontal to meet vertical On, which is 60 feet distant. At the point m where this line meets the vertical, measure height mn equal to width of scale at that distance, transfer this to K, and you have the required height of the figure in black.

91 Form scale bS, cS; mark off distances of 20 feet, 40 feet, etc. Let's say figure K is 60 feet away. From the point at his feet, draw a horizontal line to meet the vertical On, which is 60 feet away. At point m where this line meets the vertical, measure the height mn equal to the width of the scale at that distance, transfer this to K, and you have the required height of the figure in black.

For the figures under the cliff 20 feet below the perspective plane, form scale FS, GS, making it the same width as the other, namely 5 feet, and proceed in the usual way to find the height of the figures on the sands, which are here supposed to be nearly on a level with the sea, of course making allowance for different heights and various other things.

For the figures under the cliff, 20 feet below the perspective plane, form scale FS, GS, making it the same width as the other, which is 5 feet, and continue in the usual way to determine the height of the figures on the sands, which are assumed to be close to sea level, while of course accounting for different heights and various other factors.

XLIII
Further Illustration of the Size of Figures at Different Distances and on Uneven Ground

92 Let ab be the height of a figure, say 6 feet. First form scale aS, bS, the lower line of which, aS, is on a level with the base or on the perspective plane. The figure marked C is close to base, the group of three is farther off (24 feet), and 6 feet higher up, so we measure the height on the vanishing scale and also above it. The two girls carrying fish are still farther off, and about 12 feet below. To tell how far a figure is away, refer its measurements to the vanishing scale (see Fig. 96).

92 Let ab be the height of a figure, say 6 feet. First, create the scale aS, bS, where the bottom line, aS, is level with the base or on the perspective plane. The figure labeled C is closer to the base, while the group of three is farther away (24 feet) and 6 feet higher. So, we measure the height on the vanishing scale and also above it. The two girls carrying fish are even farther away, positioned about 12 feet below. To determine how far a figure is from the viewer, compare its measurements to the vanishing scale (see Fig. 96).

Fig. 99.

Fig. 99.

XLIV
Figures on a Descending Plane

In this case (Fig. 100) the same rule applies as in the previous problem, but as the road on the left is going down hill, the vanishing point of the inclined plane is below the horizon at point ; AS, BS is the vanishing scale on the level plane; and A·S·, B·S·, that on the incline.

In this case (Fig. 100), the same rule applies as in the previous problem, but since the road on the left is downhill, the vanishing point of the inclined plane is below the horizon at point ; AS, BS is the vanishing scale on the flat plane; and A.S., B.S., that on the incline.

[93a] figure

[93a] figure

Fig. 100.

Fig. 100.

[93b] figure

[93b] figure

Fig. 101. This is an outline of above figure to show the working more plainly.

Fig. 101. This is a sketch of the figure above to make the workings clearer.

Note the wall to the left marked W and the manner in which it appears to drop at certain intervals, its base corresponding with the inclined plane, but the upper lines of each division being made level are drawn to the point of sight, or to their vanishing point on the horizon; it is important to observe this, as it aids greatly in drawing a road going down hill.

Note the wall to the left marked W and how it seems to drop at certain points, with its base matching the slope of the hill, but the top lines of each section being made level are aligned with the viewer's perspective, or to their vanishing point on the horizon; it’s important to notice this, as it really helps in drawing a road going downhill.

95
XLV
Further Illustration of the Descending Plane

In the centre of this picture (Fig. 102) we suppose the road to be descending till it reaches a tunnel which goes under a road or leads to a river (like one leading out of the Strand near Somerset House). It is drawn on the same principle as the foregoing figure. Of course to see the road the spectator must get pretty near to it, otherwise it will be out of sight. Also a level plane must be shown, as by its contrast to the other we perceive that the latter is going down hill.

In the center of this picture (Fig. 102), we imagine the road sloping down until it reaches a tunnel that goes under another road or leads to a river (similar to the one coming out of the Strand near Somerset House). It's created using the same principle as the previous figure. Of course, to see the road, the viewer needs to get fairly close; otherwise, it will be out of view. Additionally, a level surface should be depicted, as its contrast with the other allows us to realize that the latter is sloping downhill.

[94] figure

[94] figure

Fig. 102.

Fig. 102.

XLVI
Further Illustration of Uneven Ground

An extended view drawn from a height of about 30 feet from a road that descends about 45 feet.

An extended view from a height of about 30 feet above a road that slopes down about 45 feet.

Fig. 103. Farningham.

Fig. 103. Farningham.

96 In drawing a landscape such as Fig. 103 we have to bear in mind the height of the horizon, which being exactly opposite the eye, shows us at once which objects are below and which are above us, and to draw them accordingly, especially roofs, buildings, walls, hedges, &c.; also it is well to sketch in the different fields figures of men and cattle, as from the size of these we can judge of the rest.

96 When drawing a landscape like Fig. 103, we need to consider the height of the horizon, which is directly opposite our eye. This helps us easily identify which objects are below and which are above us, so we can draw them accordingly—especially roofs, buildings, walls, hedges, etc. It’s also helpful to include figures of people and animals in the different fields, as their size gives us a better sense of scale for everything else.

XLVII
The Picture Standing on the Ground

Let K represent a frame placed vertically and at a given distance in front of us. If stood on the ground our foreground will touch 97 the base line of the picture, and we can fix up a standard of measurement both on the base and on the side as in this sketch, taking 6 feet as about the height of the figures.

Let K represent a frame set up vertically and at a specific distance in front of us. If it's placed on the ground, our foreground will touch the base line of the picture, and we can establish a standard of measurement both on the base and on the side as shown in this sketch, using 6 feet as approximately the height of the figures. 97

Fig. 104. Toledo.

Toledo.

XLVIII
The Picture on a Height

If we are looking at a scene from a height, that is from a terrace, or a window, or a cliff, then the near foreground, unless it be the terrace, window-sill, &c., would not come into the picture, and we could not see the near figures at A, and the nearest to come into view would be those at B, so that a view from a window, &c., would be as it were without a foreground. Note that the figures at B would be (according to this sketch) 30 feet from the picture plane and about 18 feet below the base line.

If we're looking at a scene from above, like from a terrace, a window, or a cliff, then the immediate foreground, unless it's the terrace or window sill, wouldn't be part of the view. We wouldn't be able to see the nearby figures at A, and the closest ones visible would be those at B. So, a view from a window or similar spot would essentially lack a foreground. Keep in mind that the figures at B would be 30 feet away from the picture plane and about 18 feet below the base line, according to this sketch.

Fig. 105.

Fig. 105.

98

BOOK THIRD

XLIX
Angular Perspective

Hitherto we have spoken only of parallel perspective, which is comparatively easy, and in our first figure we placed the cube with one of its sides either touching or parallel to the transparent plane. We now place it so that one angle only (ab), touches the picture.

So far, we have only discussed parallel perspective, which is relatively simple, and in our first example, we positioned the cube with one of its sides either touching or parallel to the transparent plane. Now we’re placing it so that just one corner (ab) touches the picture.

Fig. 106.

Fig. 106.

Its sides are no longer drawn to the point of sight as in Fig. 7, nor its diagonal to the point of distance, but to some other points on the horizon, although the same rule holds good as regards their parallelism; as for instance, in the case of bc and ad, which, if produced, would meet at V, a point on the horizon called a 99 vanishing point. In this figure only one vanishing point is seen, which is to the right of the point of sight S, whilst the other is some distance to the left, and outside the picture. If the cube is correctly drawn, it will be found that the lines ae, bg, &c., if produced, will meet on the horizon at this other vanishing point. This far-away vanishing point is one of the inconveniences of oblique or angular perspective, and therefore it will be a considerable gain to the draughtsman if we can dispense with it. This can be easily done, as in the above figure, and here our geometry will come to our assistance, as I shall show presently.

Its sides no longer converge at the viewpoint like in Fig. 7, nor does its diagonal extend to the distance, but instead to other points on the horizon. However, the same rule about their parallel lines still applies; for example, lines bc and ad, if extended, would meet at V, a point on the horizon known as a 99 vanishing point. In this illustration, there is only one vanishing point visible, which is located to the right of the viewpoint S, while the other is positioned some distance to the left, off the canvas. If the cube is drawn correctly, you'll find that lines ae, bg, etc., when extended, will meet on the horizon at this other vanishing point. This distant vanishing point is one of the challenges of oblique or angular perspective, so it would be very beneficial for the artist if we could eliminate it. This can be achieved easily, as shown in the figure above, and here our geometry will help us, as I will demonstrate shortly.

L
How to put a Given Point into Perspective

Let us place the given point P on a geometrical plane, to show how far it is from the base line, and indeed in the exact position we wish it to be in the picture. The geometrical plane is supposed to face us, to hang down, as it were, from the base line AB, like the side of a table, the top of which represents the perspective plane. It is to that perspective plane that we now have to transfer the point P.

Let’s position the point P on a geometric plane to demonstrate how far it is from the baseline, and to place it exactly where we want it in the image. The geometric plane is assumed to be facing us, hanging down from the baseline AB, similar to the side of a table, with the top representing the perspective plane. We now need to transfer the point P to that perspective plane.

Fig. 107.

Fig. 107.

From P raise perpendicular Pm till it touches the base line at m. With centre m and radius mP describe arc Pn so that mn is now the same length as mP. As point P is opposite point m, so 100 must it be in the perspective, therefore we draw a line at right angles to the base, that is to the point of sight, and somewhere on this line will be found the required point . We now have to find how far from m must that point be. It must be the length of mn, which is the same as mP. We therefore from n draw nD to the point of distance, which being at an angle of 45°, or half a right angle, makes m the perspective length of mn by its intersection with mS, and thus gives us the point , which is the perspective of the original point.

From P raise a perpendicular line to Pm until it meets the baseline at m. With center m and radius mP, draw an arc Pn so that mn is now the same length as mP. Since point P is directly opposite point m, it must be positioned in perspective accordingly, so we draw a line perpendicular to the base, which is at the point of sight, and somewhere along this line will be the necessary point . Next, we need to determine how far from m that point should be. It has to match the length of mn, which is the same as mP. Therefore, from n we draw nD to the point of distance, which is at a 45° angle, or half a right angle, making m the perspective length of mn by its intersection with mS, thus providing us with point P., the perspective of the original point.

LI
A Perspective Point being given, Find its Position on the Geometrical Plane
figure
Fig. 108.

To do this we simply reverse the foregoing problem. Thus let P be the given perspective point. From point of sight S draw a line through P till it cuts AB at m. From distance D draw another line through P till it cuts the base at n. From m drop perpendicular, and then with centre m and radius mn describe arc, and where it cuts that perpendicular is the required point . We often have to make use of this problem.

To do this, we just reverse the previous problem. Let P be the perspective point. From the viewpoint S, draw a line through P until it intersects AB at m. From distance D, draw another line through P until it cuts the base at n. From m, drop a perpendicular line, and then with center m and radius mn, draw an arc. The point where it intersects the perpendicular line is the point that we need. We often need to use this problem.

101
LII
How to put a Given Line into Perspective

This is simply a question of putting two points into perspective, instead of one, or like doing the previous problem twice over, for the two points represent the two extremities of the line. Thus we have to find the perspective of A and B, namely a·b·. Join those points, and we have the line required.

This is just a matter of looking at two points instead of one, or essentially solving the previous problem twice, since the two points represent the two ends of the line. So, we need to find the perspective of A and B, which is a·b·. Connect those points, and we get the line we need.

Fig. 109.

Fig. 109.

If one end touches the base, as at A (Fig. 110), then we have 102 but to find one point, namely b. We also find the perspective of the angle mAB, namely the shaded triangle mAb. Note also that the perspective triangle equals the geometrical triangle.

If one end touches the base, like at A (Fig. 110), then we have 102 but need to find one point, which is b. We also determine the perspective of the angle mAB, which is the shaded triangle mAb. Also, note that the perspective triangle is the same as the geometrical triangle.

Fig. 110.

Fig. 110.

When the line required is parallel to the base line of the picture, then the perspective of it is also parallel to that base (see Rule 3).

When the line needed is parallel to the base line of the image, then its perspective is also parallel to that base (see Rule 3).

Fig. 111.

Fig. 111.

LIII
To Find the Length of a Given Perspective Line

A perspective line AB being given, find its actual length and the angle at which it is placed.

A perspective line AB is given; find its actual length and the angle at which it's positioned.

figure
Fig. 112.

This is simply the reverse of the previous problem. Let AB be the given line. From distance D through A draw DC, and from S, point of sight, through A draw SO. Drop OP at right angles to base, making it equal to OC. Join PB, and line PB is the actual length of AB.

This is just the opposite of the previous problem. Let AB be the given line. From a distance of D, draw DC through A, and from point S, your point of view, draw SO through A. Drop a line OP perpendicular to the base, making it the same length as OC. Connect PB, and the line PB is the actual length of AB.

103 This problem is useful in finding the position of any given line or point on the perspective plane.

103 This issue helps in determining the location of any specific line or point on the perspective plane.

LIV
To Find these Points when the Distance-Point is Inaccessible

If the distance-point is a long way out of the picture, then the same result can be obtained by using the half distance and half base, as already shown.

If the distance point is far outside the scene, you can get the same result by using half the distance and half the base, as already demonstrated.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 113.

104 From a, half of m, draw quadrant ab, from b (half base), draw line from b to half Dist., which intersects Sm at P, precisely the same point as would be obtained by using the whole distance.

104 From a, half of mP., draw quadrant ab. From b (half base), draw a line from b to half the distance, which intersects Sm at P, exactly the same point you would get by using the full distance.

LV
How to put a Given Triangle or other Rectilineal Figure into Perspective

Here we simply put three points into perspective to obtain the given triangle A, or five points to obtain the five-sided figure at B. So can we deal with any number of figures placed at any angle.

Here we just position three points to create the triangle A, or five points to make the five-sided shape at B. This approach allows us to work with any number of shapes positioned at any angle.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 114.

Both the above figures are placed in the same diagram, showing how any number can be drawn by means of the same point of sight and the same point of distance, which makes them belong to the same picture.

Both of the figures above are shown in the same diagram, demonstrating how any number can be created using the same viewpoint and the same point of distance, which connects them to the same image.

It is to be noted that the figures appear reversed in the perspective. That is, in the geometrical triangle the base at ab is uppermost, whereas in the perspective ab is lowermost, yet both are nearest to the ground line.

It should be noted that the figures appear upside down in the perspective. In the geometrical triangle, the base at ab is on top, while in the perspective, ab is at the bottom, yet both are closest to the ground line.

105
LVI
How to put a Given Square into Angular Perspective

Let ABCD (Fig. 115) be the given square on the geometrical plane, where we can place it as near or as far from the base and at any angle that we wish. We then proceed to find its perspective on the picture by finding the perspective of the four points ABCD as already shown. Note that the two sides of the perspective square dc and ab being produced, meet at point V on the horizon, which is their vanishing point, but to find the point on the horizon where sides bc and ad meet, we should have to go a long way to the left of the figure, which by this method is not necessary.

Let ABCD (Fig. 115) be the square on the geometric plane, where we can position it as close or as far from the base as we want and at any angle we choose. Next, we find its perspective in the image by determining the perspective of the four points ABCD as already demonstrated. Note that the two sides of the perspective square dc and ab, when extended, meet at point V on the horizon, which is their vanishing point. However, to find the point on the horizon where sides bc and ad meet, we would need to look much further to the left of the figure, which isn't necessary with this method.

Fig. 115.

Fig. 115.

106
LVII
Of Measuring Points

We now have to find certain points by which to measure those vanishing or retreating lines which are no longer at right angles to the picture plane, as in parallel perspective, and have to be measured in a different way, and here geometry comes to our assistance.

We now need to identify specific points to measure those disappearing or moving lines that are no longer at right angles to the picture plane, as in parallel perspective, and these need to be measured differently, and that's where geometry helps us out.

Fig. 116.

Fig. 116.

Note that the perspective square P equals the geometrical square K, so that side AB of the one equals side ab of the other. With centre A and radius AB describe arc B till it cuts the base line at . Now AB = A, and if we join bm· then triangle BA is an isosceles triangle. So likewise if we join m·b in the perspective figure will Ab be the same isosceles triangle in perspective. Continue line m·b till it cuts the horizon in m, which point will be the measuring point for the vanishing line AbV. For if in an isosceles triangle we draw lines across it, parallel to its base from one side to the other, we divide both sides in exactly the same quantities and proportions, so that if we measure on the base line of the picture the spaces we require, such as 1, 2, 3, on the length A, and then from these divisions draw lines to 107 the measuring point, these lines will intersect the vanishing line AbV in the lengths and proportions required. To find a measuring point for the lines that go to the other vanishing point, we proceed in the same way. Of course great accuracy is necessary.

Note that the perspective square P is equal to the geometric square K, meaning that side AB of the first square is the same as side ab of the second square. With center A and radius AB, draw arc B until it intersects the baseline at . Now AB = A, and if we connect bm·, triangle BA becomes an isosceles triangle. Similarly, connecting m·b in the perspective figure will show that Ab is the same isosceles triangle in perspective. Extend line m·b until it meets the horizon at m, which will serve as the measuring point for the vanishing line AbV. In an isosceles triangle, if we draw lines parallel to the base from one side to the other, we divide both sides into equal lengths and proportions. Therefore, if we measure the required spaces on the baseline of the picture, such as 1, 2, 3, along A, and then draw lines from these divisions to 107 the measuring point, these lines will intersect the vanishing line AbV at the lengths and proportions needed. To find a measuring point for the lines heading to the other vanishing point, we will follow the same method. Of course, accuracy is crucial.

Note that the dotted lines 1,1, 2,2, &c., are parallel in the perspective, as in the geometrical figure. In the former the lines are drawn to the same point m on the horizon.

Note that the dotted lines 1,1, 2,2, etc., are parallel in perspective, just like in the geometric figure. In the former, the lines are drawn to the same point m on the horizon.

LVIII
How to Divide any Given Straight Line into Equal or Proportionate Parts

Let AB (Fig. 117) be the given straight line that we wish to divide into five equal parts. Draw AC at any convenient angle, and measure off five equal parts with the compasses thereon, as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. From 5C draw line to 5B. Now from each division on AC draw lines 4, 4, 3, 3, &c., parallel to 5,5. Then AB will be divided into the required number of equal parts.

Let AB (Fig. 117) be the straight line we want to divide into five equal sections. Draw AC at a convenient angle, and use a compass to mark off five equal sections along it, labeled 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. From point 5C, draw a line to point 5B. Next, from each division on AC, draw lines 4, 4, 3, 3, etc., that are parallel to 5, 5. This way, AB will be divided into the required number of equal sections.

Fig. 117.

Fig. 117.

LIX
How to Divide a Diagonal Vanishing Line into any Number of Equal or Proportional Parts

In a previous figure (Fig. 116) we have shown how to find a measuring point when the exact measure of a vanishing line is required, but if it suffices merely to divide a line into a given number of equal parts, then the following simple method can be adopted.

In a previous figure (Fig. 116), we demonstrated how to find a measuring point when you need the precise measurement of a vanishing line. However, if it's enough to simply divide a line into a specified number of equal parts, then you can use the following straightforward method.

108 We wish to divide ab into five equal parts. From a, measure off on the ground line the five equal spaces required. From 5, the point to which these measures extend (as they are taken at random), draw a line through b till it cuts the horizon at O. Then proceed to draw lines from each division on the base to point O, and they will intersect and divide ab into the required number of equal parts.

108 We want to divide ab into five equal parts. Starting at a, mark out the five equal spaces on the ground line. From point 5, where these measurements end (as they are taken randomly), draw a line through b until it meets the horizon at O. Next, draw lines from each division on the base to point O, and they will intersect and divide ab into the required number of equal parts.

Fig. 118.

Fig. 118.

The same method applies to a given line to be divided into various proportions, as shown in this lower figure.

The same method works for dividing a specific line into different proportions, as illustrated in this lower figure.

Fig. 119.

Fig. 119.

110
LX
Further Use of the Measuring Point O

One square in oblique or angular perspective being given, draw any number of other squares equal to it by means of this point O and the diagonals.

One square in oblique or angular perspective being given, draw any number of other squares equal to it using this point O and the diagonals.

[109a] figure

[109a] figure

Fig. 120.

Fig. 120.

Let ABCD (Fig. 120) be the given square; produce its sides AB, DC till they meet at point V. From D measure off on base any number of equal spaces of any convenient length, as 1, 2, 3, &c.; from 1, through corner of square C, draw a line to meet the horizon at O, and from O draw lines to the several divisions on base line. These lines will divide the vanishing line DV into the required number of parts equal to DC, the side of the square. Produce the diagonal of the square DB till it cuts the horizon at G. From the divisions on line DV draw diagonals to point G: their intersections with the other vanishing line AV will determine the direction of the cross-lines which form the bases of other squares without the necessity of drawing them to the other vanishing point, which in this case is some distance to the left of the picture. If we produce these cross-lines to the horizon we shall find that they all meet at the other vanishing point, to which of course it is easy to draw them when that point is accessible, as in Fig. 121; but if it is too far out of the picture, then this method enables us to do without it.

Let ABCD (Fig. 120) be the given square; extend its sides AB and DC until they meet at point V. From D, mark out any number of equal spaces along the base, such as 1, 2, 3, etc.; from 1, through the corner of square C, draw a line that meets the horizon at O, and from O draw lines to each division on the base line. These lines will divide the vanishing line DV into the necessary number of segments equal to DC, the side of the square. Extend the diagonal of the square DB until it intersects the horizon at G. From the divisions on line DV, draw diagonals to point G: where they intersect the other vanishing line AV will establish the direction of the cross-lines that create the bases of additional squares without needing to extend them to the other vanishing point, which in this case is quite far to the left of the picture. If we extend these cross-lines to the horizon, we will find that they all converge at the other vanishing point, which can be easily drawn to once that point is reachable, as shown in Fig. 121; but if it is too far outside the picture, this method allows us to bypass it.

[109b] figure

[109b] figure

Fig. 121.

Fig. 121.

Figure 121 corroborates the above by showing the two vanishing points and additional squares. Note the working of the diagonals drawn to point G , in both figures.

Figure 121 supports the previous information by displaying the two vanishing points and extra squares. Pay attention to how the diagonals leading to point G work in both figures.

LXI
Further Use of the Measuring Point O

Suppose we wish to divide the side of a building, as in Fig. 123, or to draw a balcony, a series of windows, or columns, or what not, or, in other words, any line above the horizon, as AB. Then from A we draw AC parallel to the horizon, and mark thereon 111 the required divisions 5, 10, 15, &c.: in this case twenty-five (Fig. 122). From C draw a line through B till it cuts the horizon at O. Then proceed to draw the other lines from each division to O, and thus divide the vanishing line AB as required.

Suppose we want to divide the side of a building, like in Fig. 123, or to draw a balcony, a series of windows, columns, or anything else, basically any line above the horizon, like AB. Starting from A, we draw AC parallel to the horizon and mark the required divisions at 5, 10, 15, etc.: in this case, twenty-five (Fig. 122). From C, draw a line through B until it intersects the horizon at O. Then, draw the other lines from each division to O, thus dividing the vanishing line AB as needed.

Fig. 122 is a front view of the portico, Fig. 123.

Fig. 122 is a front view of the entrance, Fig. 123.

112 In this portico there are thirteen triglyphs with twelve spaces between them, making twenty-five divisions. The required number of parts to draw the columns can be obtained in the same way.

112 In this portico, there are thirteen triglyphs with twelve spaces in between, creating twenty-five sections. You can get the necessary number of parts to draw the columns in the same way.

Fig. 123.

Fig. 123.

LXII
Another Method of Angular Perspective, being that Adopted in our Art Schools

In the previous method we have drawn our squares by means of a geometrical plan, putting each point into perspective as required, and then by means of the perspective drawing thus obtained, finding our vanishing and measuring points. In this method we proceed in exactly the opposite way, setting out our points first, and drawing the square (or other figure) afterwards.

In the previous method, we created our squares using a geometrical plan, positioning each point as needed, and then, using the perspective drawing we created, identified our vanishing and measuring points. In this method, we do the exact opposite: we establish our points first, and then draw the square (or other shape) afterwards.

Fig. 124.

Fig. 124.

Having drawn the horizontal and base lines, and fixed upon the position of the point of sight, we next mark the position of the spectator by dropping a perpendicular, S ST, from that point of sight, making it the same length as the distance we suppose the spectator to be from the picture, and thus we make ST the station-point.

Having drawn the horizontal and base lines, and decided on the position of the point of sight, we next mark where the viewer stands by dropping a vertical line, S ST, from that point of sight, making it the same length as the distance we assume the viewer is from the picture, and thus we establish ST as the station-point.

113 To understand this figure we must first look upon it as a ground-plan or bird’s-eye view, the line V2V1 or horizon line representing the picture seen edgeways, because of course the station-point cannot be in the picture itself, but a certain distance in front of it. The angle at ST, that is the angle which decides the positions of the two vanishing points V1, V2, is always a right angle, and the two remaining angles on that side of the line, called the directing line, are together equal to a right angle or 90°. So that in fixing upon the angle at which the square or other figure is to be placed, we say ‘let it be 60° and 30°, or 70° and 20°’, &c. Having decided upon the station-point and the angle at which the square is to be placed, draw TV1 and TV2, till they cut the horizon at V1 and V2. These are the two vanishing points to which the sides of the figure are respectively drawn. But we still want the measuring points for these two vanishing lines. We therefore take first, V1 as centre and V1T as radius, and describe arc of circle till it cuts the horizon in M1, which is the measuring point for all lines drawn to V1. Then with radius V2T describe arc from centre V2 till it cuts the horizon in M2, which is the measuring point for all vanishing lines drawn to V2. We have now set out our points. Let us proceed to draw the square Abcd. From A, the nearest angle (in this instance touching the base line), measure on each side of it the equal lengths AB and AE, which represent the width or side of the square. Draw EM2 and BM1 from the two measuring points, which give us, by their intersections with the vanishing lines AV1 and AV2, the perspective lengths of the sides of the square Abcd. Join b and V1 and dV2, which intersect each other at C, then Adcb is the square required.

113 To understand this figure, we need to first see it as a ground plan or bird’s-eye view, where the line V2V1 or horizon line represents the view of the picture from the side. The station point can't be in the picture itself but is a certain distance in front of it. The angle at ST, which determines the positions of the two vanishing points V1 and V2, is always a right angle, and the two other angles on that side of the line, called the directing line, together equal a right angle or 90°. So when deciding on the angle where the square or another figure will be placed, we say 'let it be 60° and 30°, or 70° and 20°,' etc. Once we’ve determined the station point and the angle for placing the square, we draw Television1 and Television2 until they meet the horizon at V1 and V2. These are the two vanishing points to which the sides of the figure are drawn. Next, we need the measuring points for these two vanishing lines. First, we take V1 as the center and V1T as the radius, and draw an arc until it meets the horizon at M1, which is the measuring point for all lines drawn to V1. Then, using radius V2T, we draw an arc from center V2 until it meets the horizon at M2, the measuring point for all vanishing lines drawn to V2. Now we have our points laid out. Let’s draw the square Abcd. From A, the nearest corner (touching the baseline in this case), measure equal lengths AB and AE on each side, representing the width or side of the square. Draw EM2 and BM1 from the two measuring points, which will give us the perspective lengths of the sides of square Abcd through their intersections with the vanishing lines AV1 and AV2. Connect points b and V1, and d and V2, which will intersect at C. Thus, Adcb is the required square.

This method, which is easy when you know it, has certain drawbacks, the chief one being that if we require a long-distance point, and a small angle, such as 10° on one side, and 80° on the other, then the size of the diagram becomes so large that it has to be carried out on the floor of the studio with long strings, &c., which is a very clumsy and unscientific way of setting to work. The architects in such cases make use of the centrolinead, a clever mechanical contrivance for getting over the difficulty of the far-off vanishing point, but by the method I have shown you, and shall further illustrate, you will find that you can dispense with 114 all this trouble, and do all your perspective either inside the picture or on a very small margin outside it.

This method, which is straightforward once you understand it, has some drawbacks. The main issue is that if we need to create a long-distance point with a small angle, like 10° on one side and 80° on the other, the size of the diagram becomes so large that it has to be done on the studio floor using long strings, etc., which is a very clumsy and unscientific approach. Architects in these situations use the centrolinead, a clever mechanical tool to tackle the problem of the distant vanishing point. However, with the method I've shown you and will explain further, you'll see that you can avoid all this hassle and do all your perspective work either within the picture or on a small margin outside of it. 114

Perhaps another drawback to this method is that it is not self-evident, as in the former one, and being rather difficult to explain, the student is apt to take it on trust, and not to trouble about the reasons for its construction: but to show that it is equally correct, I will draw the two methods in one figure.

Perhaps another downside to this method is that it isn't obvious, like the previous one, and since it's quite hard to explain, the student might just accept it without questioning the reasons behind it. To demonstrate that it's equally valid, I will illustrate both methods in one diagram.

LXIII
Two Methods of Angular Perspective in one Figure

115 It matters little whether the station-point is placed above or below the horizon, as the result is the same. In Fig. 125 it is placed above, as the lower part of the figure is occupied with the geometrical plan of the other method.

115 It doesn't really matter if the viewpoint is positioned above or below the horizon; the outcome is the same. In Fig. 125, it is positioned above since the lower part of the figure shows the geometric plan of the other method.

Fig. 125.

Fig. 125.

In each case we make the square K the same size and at the same angle, its near corner being at A. It must be seen that by whichever method we work out this perspective, the result is the same, so that both are correct: the great advantage of the first or geometrical system being, that we can place the square at any angle, as it is drawn without reference to vanishing points.

In each case, we make the square K the same size and at the same angle, with its near corner at A. It's important to note that no matter which method we use to determine this perspective, the outcome is the same, meaning both are valid. The main advantage of the first or geometrical system is that we can position the square at any angle, as it's drawn without needing to refer to vanishing points.

We will, however, work out a few figures by the second method.

We will, however, calculate a few figures using the second method.

LXIV
To Draw a Cube, the Points being Given

As in a previous figure (124) we found the various working points of angular perspective, we need now merely transfer them to the horizontal line in this figure, as in this case they will answer our purpose perfectly well.

As shown in the previous figure (124), we found the different working points of angular perspective. Now we just need to transfer them to the horizontal line in this figure, as they will serve our purpose perfectly.

Fig. 126.

Fig. 126.

Let A be the nearest angle touching the base. Draw AV1, AV2. From A, raise vertical Ae, the height of the cube. From e draw eV1, eV2, from the other angles raise verticals bf, dh, cg, to meet eV1, eV2, fV2, &c., and the cube is complete.

Let A be the closest angle touching the base. Draw AV1, AV2. From A, raise a vertical line Ae, which is the height of the cube. From e draw eV1, eV2, and from the other angles draw verticals bf, dh, cg, to meet eV1, eV2, fV2, etc., and the cube is complete.

116
LXV
Amplification of the Cube Applied to Drawing a Cottage

Note that we have started this figure with the cube Adhefb. We have taken three times AB, its width, for the front of our house, and twice AB for the side, and have made it two cubes high, not counting the roof. Note also the use of the measuring-points in connexion with the measurements on the base line, and the upper measuring line TPK.

Note that we have started this figure with the cube Adhefb. We used three times AB, its width, for the front of our house, and twice AB for the side, making it two cubes high, not including the roof. Also, pay attention to the measuring points related to the measurements on the baseline, and the upper measuring line TPK.

Fig. 127.

Fig. 127.

117
LXVI
How to Draw an Interior at an Angle

Here we make use of the same points as in a previous figure, with the addition of the point G, which is the vanishing point of the diagonals of the squares on the floor.

Here we use the same points as in a previous figure, with the addition of the point G, which is the vanishing point of the diagonals of the squares on the floor.

Fig. 128.

Fig. 128.

From A draw square Abcd, and produce its sides in all directions; again from A, through the opposite angle of the square C, draw a diagonal till it cuts the horizon at G. From G draw diagonals through b and d, cutting the base at o, o, make spaces o, o, equal to Ao all along the base, and from them draw diagonals to G; through the points where these diagonals intersect the vanishing lines drawn in the direction of Ab, dc and Ad, bc, draw lines to the other vanishing point V1, thus completing the squares, and so cover the floor with them; they will then serve to measure width of door, windows, &c. Of course horizontal lines on wall 1 are drawn to V1, and those on wall 2 to V2.

From A draw a square Abcd, and extend its sides in all directions; again from A, draw a diagonal through the opposite corner of the square C until it intersects the horizon at G. From G draw diagonals through b and d, intersecting the base at o, o. Create spaces o, o equal to Ao all along the base, and from these points draw diagonals to G; through the points where these diagonals meet the vanishing lines drawn towards Ab, dc, and Ad, bc, draw lines to the other vanishing point V1, thus completing the squares and covering the floor with them; they will then serve to measure the width of doors, windows, etc. Naturally, the horizontal lines on wall 1 are drawn to V1, and those on wall 2 to V2.

In order to see this drawing properly, the eye should be placed about 3 inches from it, and opposite the point of sight; it will then stand out like a stereoscopic picture, and appear as actual space, but otherwise the perspective seems deformed, and the 118 angles exaggerated. To make this drawing look right from a reasonable distance, the point of distance should be at least twice as far off as it is here, and this would mean altering all the other points and sending them a long way out of the picture; this is why artists use those long strings referred to above. I would however, advise them to make their perspective drawing on a small scale, and then square it up to the size of the canvas.

To see this drawing correctly, your eyes should be about 3 inches away from it, directly opposite the focal point. At that distance, it will pop out like a 3D image and look like real space, but if you’re too far away, the perspective will look warped, and the angles will seem exaggerated. 118 To make this drawing appear right from a reasonable distance, the viewing point should be at least twice as far back as it is now, which would require adjusting all the other points and moving them far out of the picture. That’s why artists use those long strings mentioned earlier. However, I would suggest that they create their perspective drawing on a smaller scale and then enlarge it to fit the canvas.

LXVII
How to Correct Distorted Perspective by Doubling the Line of Distance

Here we have the same interior as the foregoing, but drawn with double the distance, so that the perspective is not so violent and the objects are truer in proportion to each other.

Here we have the same interior as the previous one, but depicted from twice the distance, so the perspective isn't as extreme and the objects are more accurately proportioned to each other.

Fig. 129.

Fig. 129.

To redraw the whole figure double the size, including the station-point, would require a very large diagram, that we could not get into this book without a folding plate, but it comes to the same thing if we double the distances between the various 119 points. Thus, if from S to G in the small diagram is 1 inch, in the larger one make it 2 inches. If from S to M2 is 2 inches, in the larger make it 4, and so on.

To redraw the entire figure at double the size, including the station point, would need a really large diagram that wouldn’t fit into this book without a folding plate. However, it works out the same if we just double the distances between the various 119 points. So, if from S to G in the small diagram is 1 inch, then in the larger version, it should be 2 inches. If from S to M2 is 2 inches, then in the larger diagram, it should be 4 inches, and so on.

Or this form may be used: make AB twice the length of AC (Fig. 130), or in any other proportion required. On AC mark the points as in the drawing you wish to enlarge. Make AB the length that you wish to enlarge to, draw CB, and then from each division on AC draw lines parallel to CB, and AB will be divided in the same proportions, as I have already shown (Fig. 117).

Or you can use this method: make AB twice the length of AC (Fig. 130), or any other required ratio. On AC, mark the points that you want to enlarge as shown in the drawing. Set AB to the length you want to enlarge to, draw CB, and then from each division on AC, draw lines parallel to CB. Consequently, AB will be divided in the same proportions, as I have already demonstrated (Fig. 117).

Fig. 130.

Fig. 130.

There is no doubt that it is easier to work direct from the vanishing points themselves, especially in complicated architectural work, but at the same time I will now show you how we can dispense with, at all events, one of them, and that the farthest away.

There’s no doubt that it’s easier to work directly from the vanishing points themselves, especially in complex architectural work, but at the same time, I will now show you how we can do without, at least, one of them, specifically the one that’s farthest away.

LXVIII
How to Draw a Cube on a Given Square, using only One Vanishing Point

ABCD is the given square (Fig. 131). At A raise vertical Aa equal to side of square AB·, from a draw ab to the vanishing point. Raise Bb. Produce VD to E to touch the base line. From E raise vertical EF, making it equal to Aa. From F draw FV. Raise Dd and Cc, their heights being determined by the line FV. Join da and the cube is complete. It will be seen that the verticals raised at each corner of the square are equal perspectively, as they are drawn between parallels which start from equal heights, namely, from EF and Aa to the same point V, the vanishing point. Any other 120 line, such as OO·, can be directed to the inaccessible vanishing point in the same way as ad, &c.

ABCD is the designated square (Fig. 131). At A, raise a vertical line Aa equal to the side of square AB. From point a, draw line ab towards the vanishing point. Raise vertical Bb. Extend VD to E until it touches the baseline. From E, raise vertical line EF, making it equal to Aa. From F, draw line FV. Raise Dd and Cc, their heights being determined by line FV. Connect da and the cube is complete. It will be observed that the verticals raised at each corner of the square are equal perspectively, as they are drawn between parallels that start from equal heights, namely, from EF and Aa, both heading towards the same point V, the vanishing point. Any other 120 line, such as OO·, can be directed to the unreachable vanishing point in the same way as ad, and so on.

Fig. 131.

Fig. 131.

Note. This is only one of many original figures and problems in this book which have been called up by the wish to facilitate the work of the artist, and as it were by necessity.

Note. This is just one of many original figures and problems in this book that have been created to make the artist's work easier, almost out of necessity.

LXIX
A Courtyard or Cloister Drawn with one Vanishing Point

In this figure I have first drawn the pavement by means of the diagonals GA, Go, Go, &c., and the vanishing point V, the square at A being given. From A draw diagonal through opposite corner till it cuts the horizon at G. From this same point G draw 121 lines through the other corners of the square till they cut the ground line at o, o. Take this measurement Ao and mark it along the base right and left of A, and the lines drawn from these points o to point G will give the diagonals of all the squares on the pavement. Produce sides of square A, and where these lines are intersected by the diagonals Go draw lines from the vanishing point V to base. These will give us the outlines of the squares lying between them and also guiding points that will enable us to draw as many more as we please. These again will give us our measurements for the widths of the arches, &c., or between the columns. Having fixed the height of wall or dado, we make use of V point to draw the sides of the building, and by means of proportionate measurement complete the rest, as in Fig. 128.

In this figure, I first created the pavement using the diagonals GA, Go, Go, etc., and established the vanishing point V, with the square at A being defined. From A, draw a diagonal through the opposite corner until it intersects the horizon at G. From this same point G, draw lines through the other corners of the square until they intersect the ground line at o, o. Take this measurement Ao and mark it along the base to the right and left of A, and the lines drawn from these points o to point G will establish the diagonals of all the squares on the pavement. Extend the sides of square A, and where these lines intersect with the diagonals Go, draw lines from the vanishing point V to the base. These will outline the squares located between them and also provide guiding points that will allow us to draw as many more as we want. These will also help us measure the widths of the arches, etc., or between the columns. Once we set the height of the wall or dado, we can use the point V to draw the sides of the building, and through proportional measurement, complete the rest, as in Fig. 128.

Fig. 132.

Fig. 132.

LXX
How to Draw Lines which shall Meet at a Distant Point, by Means of Diagonals

This is in a great measure a repetition of the foregoing figure, and therefore needs no further explanation.

This is mostly a repeat of the previous figure, so it doesn't require any additional explanation.

Fig. 133.

Fig. 133.

I must, however, point out the importance of the point G. In angular perspective it in a measure takes the place of the point of distance in parallel perspective, since it is the vanishing point of diagonals at 45° drawn between parallels such as AV, DV, drawn to a vanishing point V. The method of dividing line AV into a number of parts equal to AB, the side of the square, is also shown in a previous figure (Fig. 120).

I need to emphasize the significance of point G. In angular perspective, it somewhat replaces the point of distance found in parallel perspective since it serves as the vanishing point for the diagonals at 45° that are drawn between parallels like AV and DV, which lead to a vanishing point V. The technique for dividing line AV into parts equal to AB, the side of the square, is also illustrated in a previous figure (Fig. 120).

122
LXXI
How to Divide a Square Placed at an Angle into a Given Number of Small Squares

ABCD is the given square, and only one vanishing point is accessible. Let us divide it into sixteen small squares. Produce side CD to base at E. Divide EA into four equal parts. From each division draw lines to vanishing point V. Draw diagonals BD and AC, and produce the latter till it cuts the horizon in G. Draw the three cross-lines through the intersections made by the diagonals and the lines drawn to V, and thus divide the square into sixteen.

ABCD is the square we’re working with, and there's only one accessible vanishing point. Let's break it down into sixteen smaller squares. Extend side CD to reach base at E. Split EA into four equal segments. From each segment, draw lines to the vanishing point V. Draw diagonals BD and AC, and extend the latter until it intersects the horizon at G. Draw three cross-lines through the intersections created by the diagonals and the lines directed to V, thus dividing the square into sixteen smaller squares.

Fig. 134.

Fig. 134.

This is to some extent the reverse of the previous problem. It also shows how the long vanishing point can be dispensed with, and the perspective drawing brought within the picture.

This is somewhat the opposite of the previous problem. It also demonstrates how the long vanishing point can be eliminated, bringing the perspective drawing into the picture.

LXXII
Further Example of how to Divide a Given Oblique Square into a Given Number of Equal Squares, say Twenty-five

Having drawn the square ABCD, which is enclosed, as will be seen, in a dotted square in parallel perspective, I divide the line 123 EA into five equal parts instead of four (Fig. 135), and have made use of the device for that purpose by measuring off the required number on line EF, &c. Fig. 136 is introduced here simply to show that the square can be divided into any number of smaller squares. Nor need the figure be necessarily a square; it is just as easy to make it an oblong, as ABEF (Fig. 136); for although we begin with a square we can extend it in any direction we please, as here shown.

Having drawn the square ABCD, which is enclosed in a dotted square in parallel perspective, I divide the line 123 EA into five equal parts instead of four (Fig. 135). I used a method to measure off the required number on line EF, etc. Fig. 136 is included just to show that the square can be divided into any number of smaller squares. The figure doesn't have to be a square; it's just as easy to make it a rectangle, like ABEF (Fig. 136). Even though we start with a square, we can extend it in any direction we want, as shown here.

Fig. 135.

Fig. 135.

Fig. 136.

Fig. 136.

124
LXXIII
Of Parallels and Diagonals
figure
Fig. 137 A.
figure
Fig. 137 B.

To find the centre of a square or other rectangular figure we have but to draw its two diagonals, and their intersection will give us the centre of the figure (see 137 A). We do the same with perspective figures, as at B. In Fig. C is shown how a diagonal, drawn from one angle of a square B through the centre O of the opposite side of the square, will enable us to find a second square lying between the same parallels, then a third, a fourth, and so on. At figure K lying on the ground, I have divided the farther side of the square mn into ¼, ⅓, ½. If I draw 125 a diagonal from G (at the base) through the half of this line I cut off on FS the lengths or sides of two squares; if through the quarter I cut off the length of four squares on the vanishing line FS, and so on. In Fig. 137 D is shown how easily any number of objects at any equal distances apart, such as posts, trees, columns, &c., can be drawn by means of diagonals between parallels, guided by a central line GS.

To find the center of a square or any rectangular shape, all we need to do is draw its two diagonals, and where they intersect will show us the center of the shape (see 137 A). We apply the same principle to perspective drawings, as shown at B. In Fig. C, you can see how a diagonal drawn from one corner of a square B through the center O of the opposite side helps us find a second square in between the same parallels, followed by a third, a fourth, and so on. In figure K positioned on the ground, I've divided the far side of the square mn into quarters, thirds, and halves. If I draw 125 a diagonal from G (at the base) through the midpoint of this line section on FS, I can find the lengths or sides of two squares; if I cut through the quarter, I can measure the length of four squares on the vanishing line FS, and so on. In Fig. 137 D, it's shown just how easily we can draw any number of objects spaced equally apart, like posts, trees, columns, etc., using diagonals between parallels, guided by a central line GS.

figure figure
Fig. 137 C. Fig. 137 D.
LXXIV
The Square, the Oblong, and their Diagonals

Having found the centre of a square or oblong, such as Figs. 138 and 139, if we draw a third line through that centre at a given angle and then at each of its extremities draw perpendiculars AB, DC, we divide that square or oblong into three parts, the two outer portions being equal to each other, and the centre one either 126 larger or smaller as desired; as, for instance, in the triumphal arch we make the centre portion larger than the two outer sides. When certain architectural details and spaces are to be put into perspective, a scale such as that in Fig. 123 will be found of great convenience; but if only a ready division of the principal proportions is required, then these diagonals will be found of the greatest use.

Having found the center of a square or rectangle, like Figs. 138 and 139, if we draw a third line through that center at a specific angle and then draw perpendicular lines at each end, AB and DC, we can divide that square or rectangle into three parts, with the two outer sections being equal to each other, and the center section being either larger or smaller as desired. For example, in a triumphal arch, we make the center section larger than the two outer sides. When it comes to putting certain architectural details and spaces into perspective, a scale like the one in Fig. 123 will be very helpful; but if you just need a simple division of the main proportions, then these diagonals will be extremely useful.

figure
Fig. 138. Fig. 139.
LXXV
Showing the Use of the Square and Diagonals in Drawing Doorways, Windows, and other Architectural Features

This example is from Serlio's Architecture (1663), showing what excellent proportion can be obtained by the square and diagonals. The width of the door is one-third of the base of square, the height two-thirds. As a further illustration we have drawn the same figure in perspective.

This example is from Serlio's Architecture (1663), showing how excellent proportions can be achieved using the square and diagonals. The width of the door is one-third of the base of the square, and the height is two-thirds. As an additional illustration, we’ve drawn the same figure in perspective.

figure figure
Fig. 140. Fig. 141.
127
LXXVI
How to Measure Depths by Diagonals

If we take any length on the base of a square, say from A to g, and from g raise a perpendicular till it cuts the diagonal AB in O, then from O draw horizontal O, we form a square AgO, and thus measure on one side of the square the distance or depth A. So can we measure any other length, such as fg, in like manner.

If we take any length along the base of a square, let's say from A to g, and from g we draw a perpendicular line until it intersects the diagonal AB at O, then from O we draw a horizontal line O, creating a square AgO. This allows us to measure the distance or depth A on one side of the square. Similarly, we can measure any other length, like fg, in the same way.

figure figure
Fig. 142. Fig. 143.

To do this in perspective we pursue precisely the same method, as shown in this figure (143).

To achieve this from a perspective, we follow exactly the same method, as illustrated in this figure (143).

128 To measure a length Ag on the side of square AC, we draw a line from g to the point of sight S, and where it crosses diagonal AB at O we draw horizontal Og, and thus find the required depth Ag in the picture.

128 To measure a length Ag on the side of square AC, we draw a line from g to the viewpoint S, and where it intersects diagonal AB at O, we draw a horizontal line Og. This way, we can determine the required depth Ag in the diagram.

LXXVII
How to Measure Distances by the Square and Diagonal

It may sometimes be convenient to have a ready method by which to measure the width and length of objects standing against the wall of a gallery, without referring to distance-points, &c.

It can sometimes be useful to have a simple way to measure the width and length of objects positioned against the wall of a gallery, without needing to consider reference points, etc.

Fig. 144.

Fig. 144.

129 In Fig. 144 the floor is divided into two large squares with their diagonals. Suppose we wish to draw a fireplace or a piece of furniture K, we measure its base ef on AB, as far from B as we wish it to be in the picture; draw eo and fo to point of sight, and proceed as in the previous figure by drawing parallels from Oo, &c.

129 In Fig. 144, the floor is split into two large squares with their diagonals. Let's say we want to draw a fireplace or a piece of furniture K; we measure its base ef on AB, as far from B as we want it to be in the image. Then, we draw eo and fo towards the vanishing point, and we continue as in the previous figure by drawing parallels from Oo, etc.

Let it be observed that the great advantage of this method is, that we can use it to measure such distant objects as XY just as easily as those near to us.

Let it be noted that the main benefit of this method is that we can use it to measure distant objects like XY just as easily as those that are close to us.

There is, however, a still further advantage arising from it, and that is that it introduces us to a new and simpler method of perspective, to which I have already referred, and it will, I hope, be found of infinite use to the artist.

There’s, however, an additional advantage that comes from it, which is that it brings us to a new and easier method of perspective, which I’ve already mentioned, and I hope it will prove to be incredibly useful to the artist.

Note.—As we have founded many of these figures on a given square in angular perspective, it is as well to have a ready and certain means of drawing that square without the elaborate setting out of a geometrical plan, as in the first method, or the more cumbersome and extended system of the second method. I shall therefore show you another method equally correct, but much simpler than either, which I have invented for our use, and which indeed forms one of the chief features of this book.

Note.—Since we've based many of these figures on a specific square in angular perspective, it's helpful to have a quick and reliable way to draw that square without the complex setup of a geometrical plan, like in the first method, or the more complicated and lengthy approach of the second method. So, I’ll show you another method that is just as correct but much simpler than either, one that I’ve created for our use and which is actually one of the main features of this book.

LXXVIII
How by Means of the Square and Diagonal we can Determine the Position of Points in Space

Apart from the aid that perspective affords the draughtsman, there is a further value in it, in that it teaches us almost a new science, which we might call the mystery of aspect, and how it is that the objects around us take so many different forms, or rather appearances, although they themselves remain the same. And also that it enables us, with, I think, great pleasure to ourselves, to fathom space, to work out difficult problems by simple reasoning, and to exercise those inventive and critical faculties which give strength and enjoyment to mental life.

Besides the help that perspective gives to the artist, it has another benefit: it teaches us almost a new science, which we might call the mystery of viewpoint, and explains how the objects around us can appear in so many different ways, even though they remain unchanged. It also allows us, I believe with great satisfaction, to understand space, solve complex problems through straightforward reasoning, and exercise those creative and analytical skills that enhance and enrich our mental experience.

130 And now, after this brief excursion into philosophy, let us come down to the simple question of the perspective of a point.

130 Now, after this short dive into philosophy, let's get back to the straightforward question of the viewpoint of a point.

figure figure
Fig. 145.

Here, for instance, are two aspects of the same thing: the geometrical square A, which is facing us, and the perspective square B, which we suppose to lie flat on the table, or rather on the perspective plane. Line A·C· is the perspective of line AC. On the geometrical square we can make what measurements we please with the compasses, but on the perspective square the only line we can actually measure is the base line. In both figures this base line is the same length. Suppose we want to find the 131 perspective of point P (Fig. 146), we make use of the diagonal CA. From P in the geometrical square draw PO to meet the diagonal in O; through O draw perpendicular fe; transfer length fB, so found, to the base of the perspective square; from f draw fS to point of sight; where it cuts the diagonal in O, draw horizontal OP·, which gives us the point required. In the same way we can find the perspective of any number of points on any side of the square.

Here, for example, are two aspects of the same thing: the geometric square A, which is facing us, and the perspective square B, which we imagine lying flat on the table, or rather on the perspective plane. Line A.C. is the perspective of line AC. On the geometric square, we can make any measurements we like with a compass, but on the perspective square , the only line we can actually measure is the base line. In both figures, this base line is the same length. If we want to find the perspective of point P (Fig. 146), we use the diagonal CA. From P in the geometric square, draw PO to intersect the diagonal at O; through O, draw a perpendicular line fe; transfer the length fB, which we found, to the base of the perspective square; from f, draw fS to the point of sight; where it intersects the diagonal at O, draw horizontal OP, which gives us the required point. In the same way, we can find the perspective of any number of points on any side of the square.

figure figure
Fig. 146.
LXXIX
Perspective of a Point Placed in any Position within the Square

Let the point P be the one we wish to put into perspective. We have but to repeat the process of the previous problem, making use of our measurements on the base, the diagonals, &c.

Let the point P be the one we want to put into perspective. We just need to repeat the process from the previous problem, using our measurements of the base, the diagonals, etc.

figure figure
Fig. 147.

Indeed these figures are so plain and evident that further description of them is hardly necessary, so I will here give two drawings of triangles which explain themselves. To put a triangle into perspective we have but to find three points, such as fEP, Fig. 148 A, and then transfer these points to the perspective square 148 B, as there shown, and form the perspective triangle; but these figures explain themselves. Any other triangle or rectilineal 132 figure can be worked out in the same way, which is not only the simplest method, but it carries its mathematical proof with it.

These shapes are so clear and obvious that additional explanation isn't really needed, so I'll provide two drawings of triangles that speak for themselves. To put a triangle in perspective, we just need to identify three points, like fEP, Fig. 148 A, and then transfer those points to the perspective square 148 B, as shown, to create the perspective triangle; these figures really do explain it all. Any other triangle or straight-edged figure can be done the same way, which is not only the simplest method but also carries its mathematical proof with it.

figure figure
Fig. 148 A. Fig. 148 B.
figure figure
Fig. 149 A. Fig. 149 B.
133
LXXX
Perspective of a Square Placed at an Angle New Method

As we have drawn a triangle in a square so can we draw an oblique square in a parallel square. In Figure 150 A we have drawn the oblique square GEPn. We find the points on the base Am, as in the previous figures, which enable us to construct the oblique perspective square G·E·P· in the parallel perspective square Fig. 150 B. But it is not necessary to construct the geometrical figure, as I will show presently. It is here introduced to explain the method.

As we can draw a triangle in a square, we can also draw an angled square within a parallel square. In Figure 150 A, we have drawn the angled square GEPn. We locate points on the base Am, similar to the previous figures, which help us create the angled perspective square G.E.P. in the parallel perspective square in Fig. 150 B. However, it's not necessary to construct the geometric figure, as I will explain shortly. It is introduced here to illustrate the method.

figure figure
Fig. 150 A. Fig. 150 B.

Fig. 150 B. To test the accuracy of the above, produce sides G·E· and of perspective square till they touch the horizon, where they will meet at V, their vanishing point, and again produce the other sides and P·E· till they meet on the horizon at the other vanishing point, which they must do if the figure is correctly drawn.

Fig. 150 B. To check the accuracy of the above, extend sides GE and of the perspective square until they touch the horizon, where they will meet at V, their vanishing point. Next, extend the other sides and P.E. until they meet on the horizon at the other vanishing point. This must happen if the figure is drawn correctly.

In any parallel square construct an oblique square from 134 a given point—given the parallel square at Fig. 150 B, and given point on base. Make equal to n·m·, draw S and S to point of sight. Where these lines cut the diagonal AC draw horizontals to and , and so find the four points G·E·P· through which to draw the square.

In any parallel square, create an oblique square from 134 a specified point—given the parallel square in Fig. 150 B, and the point on the base. Set equal to n·m·, then draw S and S to the point of sight. Where these lines intersect the diagonal AC, draw horizontal lines to P. and G●, thus locating the four points GEP through which to draw the square.

LXXXI
On a Given Line Placed at an Angle to the Base Draw a Square in Angular Perspective, the Point of Sight, and Distance, being given.

Let AB be the given line, S the point of sight, and D the distance (Fig. 151, 1). Through A draw SC from point of sight to base (Fig. 151, 2 and 3). From C draw CD to point of distance. Draw Ao parallel to base till it cuts CD at o, through o draw SP, from B mark off BE equal to CP. From E draw ES intersecting CD at K, from K draw KM, thus completing the outer parallel square. Through F, where PS intersects MK, draw AV till it cuts the horizon in V, its vanishing point. From V draw VB cutting side KE of outer square in G, and we have the four points 135 AFGB, which are the four angles of the square required. Join FG, and the figure is complete.

Let AB be the given line, S the point of view, and D the distance (Fig. 151, 1). From point A, draw SC to the base (Fig. 151, 2 and 3). From C, draw CD to the point of distance. Draw Ao parallel to the base until it intersects CD at o. Through o, draw SP; from B, measure out BE equal to CP. From E, draw ES intersecting CD at K, and from K, draw KM, thus completing the outer parallel square. Through F, where PS intersects MK, draw AV until it intersects the horizon at V, its vanishing point. From V, draw VB intersecting the side KE of the outer square at G, and we have the four points 135 AFGB, which are the four corners of the required square. Connect FG, and the figure is complete.

Fig. 151.

Fig. 151.

Any other side of the square might be given, such as AF. First through A and F draw SC, SP, then draw Ao, then through o draw CD. From C draw base of parallel square CE, and at M through F draw MK cutting diagonal at K, which gives top of square. Now through K draw SE, giving KE the remaining side thereof, produce AF to V, from V draw VB. Join FG, GB, and BA, and the square required is complete.

Any other side of the square could be used, like AF. First, connect A and F to draw SC and SP, then draw Ao, and through o, draw CD. From C, draw the base of the parallel square CE, and at M, through F, draw MK, intersecting the diagonal at K, which defines the top of the square. Now, through K, draw SE, resulting in KE as the remaining side. Extend AF to V, then from V draw VB. Connect FG, GB, and BA, and the required square is complete.

The student can try the remaining two sides, and he will find they work out in a similar way.

The student can attempt the other two sides, and he'll discover they work out similarly.

LXXXII
How to Draw Solid Figures at any Angle by the New Method

As we can draw planes by this method so can we draw solids, as shown in these figures. The heights of the corners of the triangles are obtained by means of the vanishing scales AS, OS, which have already been explained.

As we can create planes using this method, we can also create solids, as illustrated in these figures. The heights of the corners of the triangles are determined using the vanishing scales AS and OS, which have already been explained.

figure figure
Fig. 152. Fig. 153.

In the same manner we can draw a cubic figure (Fig. 154)—a box, for instance—at any required angle. In this case, besides the scale AS, OS, we have made use of the vanishing lines DV, BV, 136 to corroborate the scale, but they can be dispensed with in these simple objects, or we can use a scale on each side of the figure as a·o·S, should both vanishing points be inaccessible. Let it be noted that in the scale AOS, AO is made equal to BC, the height of the box.

In the same way, we can draw a cubic shape (Fig. 154)—like a box—at any angle we need. In this case, besides the scales AS and OS, we have used the vanishing lines DV and BV to support the scale, but these can be left out for simple objects. Alternatively, we can use a scale on each side of the shape as a·o·S, if both vanishing points are hard to reach. Note that in the scale AOS, AO is equal to Before Christ, which is the height of the box.

Fig. 154.

Fig. 154.

By a similar process we draw these two figures, one on the square, the other on the circle.

By the same method, we create these two shapes, one on the square and the other on the circle.

figure figure
Fig. 155. Fig. 156.
137
LXXXIII
Points in Space

The chief use of these figures is to show how by means of diagonals, horizontals, and perpendiculars almost any figure in space can be set down. Lines at any slope and at any angle can be drawn by this descriptive geometry.

The main purpose of these figures is to demonstrate how, through diagonals, horizontals, and verticals, nearly any shape in space can be represented. Lines at any slope and at any angle can be created using this descriptive geometry.

figure
Fig. 157.

The student can examine these figures for himself, and will understand their working from what has gone before. Here (Fig. 157) in the geometrical square we have a vertical plane AabB standing on its base AB. We wish to place a projection of this figure at a certain distance and at a given angle in space. First of all we transfer it to the side of the cube, where it is seen in perspective, whilst at its side is another perspective square lying flat, on which we have to stand our figure. By means of the diagonal of this flat square, horizontals from figure on side of cube, and lines drawn from point of sight (as already explained), we obtain the direction of base line AB, and also by means of lines aa· and bb· we obtain the two points in space a·b·. Join A, a·b· and B, and we have the projection required, and which may be said to possess the third dimension.

The student can look at these figures for himself and will understand how they work based on what has been discussed previously. Here (Fig. 157), in the geometric square, we have a vertical plane AabB standing on its base AB. We want to create a projection of this figure at a certain distance and angle in space. First, we move it to the side of the cube, where it is shown in perspective, while next to it is another square lying flat that we will use to position our figure. Using the diagonal of this flat square, horizontals from the figure on the side of the cube, and lines drawn from the viewpoint (as explained earlier), we find the direction of the base line AB, and also, through lines aa· and bb·, we find the two points in space a·b·. Connect A, a·b·, and B, and we have the needed projection, which can be said to have a third dimension.

figure
Fig. 158.

In this other case (Fig. 158) we have a wedge-shaped figure standing on a triangle placed on the ground, as in the previous figure, its three corners being the same height. In the vertical geometrical square we have a ground-plan of the figure, from which we draw lines to diagonal and to base, and notify by numerals 1, 3, 138 2, 1, 3; these we transfer to base of the horizontal perspective square, and then construct shaded triangle 1, 2, 3, and raise to the height required as shown at 1·, 2·, 3·. Although we may not want to make use of these special figures, they show us how we could work out almost any form or object suspended in space.

In this other case (Fig. 158), we have a wedge-shaped figure resting on a triangle positioned on the ground, similar to the previous figure, with all three corners at the same height. In the vertical geometric square, we have a ground plan of the figure, from which we draw lines to the diagonal and to the base, labeled with the numbers 1, 3, 138 2, 1, 3; we then transfer these to the base of the horizontal perspective square and construct the shaded triangle 1, 2, 3, raising it to the required height as shown at 1·, 2·, 3·. Even if we may not want to use these specific figures, they illustrate how we could work out almost any shape or object suspended in space.

LXXXIV
The Square and Diagonal Applied to Cubes And Solids Drawn Therein

As we have made use of the square and diagonal to draw figures at various angles so can we make use of cubes either in parallel or angular perspective to draw other solid figures within 139 them, as shown in these drawings, for this is simply an amplification of that method. Indeed we might invent many more such things. But subjects for perspective treatment will constantly present themselves to the artist or draughtsman in the course of his experience, and while I endeavour to show him how to grapple with any new difficulty or subject that may arise, it is impossible to set down all of them in this book.

As we've used squares and diagonals to create figures at various angles, we can also use cubes, whether in parallel or angled perspectives, to draw other solid shapes within them, as demonstrated in these drawings. This is just an extension of that technique. In fact, we could come up with many more variations. However, subjects for perspective will always present themselves to the artist or draftsman throughout their experience. While I try to help them tackle any new challenges or topics that come up, it's not possible to cover all of them in this book. 139

figure figure
Fig. 159. Fig. 160.
LXXXV
To Draw an Oblique Square in Another Oblique Square without Using Vanishing Points

It is not often that both vanishing points are inaccessible, still it is well to know how to proceed when this is the case. We first draw the square ABCD inside the parallel square, as in previous figures. To draw the smaller square K we simply draw a smaller parallel square h h h h, and within that, guided by the intersections of the diagonals therewith, we obtain the four points through which to draw square K. To raise a solid figure on these squares we can make use of the vanishing scales as 140 shown on each side of the figure, thus obtaining the upper square 1 2 3 4, then by means of the diagonal 1 3 and 2 4 and verticals raised from each corner of square K to meet them we obtain the smaller upper square corresponding to K.

It’s not common for both vanishing points to be unreachable, but it’s good to know how to handle it when it happens. First, we draw the square ABCD inside the parallel square, as shown in previous figures. To create the smaller square K, we simply draw a smaller parallel square h h h h, and within that, using the intersections of the diagonals, we find the four points needed to draw square K. To elevate a solid figure on these squares, we can use the vanishing scales as 140 shown on each side of the figure, allowing us to create the upper square 1 2 3 4. Then, by using the diagonals 1 3 and 2 4 along with the verticals raised from each corner of square K to meet them, we get the smaller upper square corresponding to K.

It might be said that all this can be done by using the two vanishing points in the usual way. In the first place, if they were as far off as required for this figure we could not get them into a page unless it were three or four times the width of this one, and to use shorter distances results in distortion, so that the real use of this system is that we can make our figures look quite natural and with much less trouble than by the other method.

It could be argued that all of this can be accomplished by using the two vanishing points in the typical way. First, if they were as far away as needed for this figure, we wouldn't be able to fit them on a page unless it were three or four times wider than this one. Using shorter distances leads to distortion, so the real benefit of this system is that we can make our figures look quite natural with much less hassle than with the other method.

Fig. 161.

Fig. 161.

141
LXXXVI
Showing How a Pedestal can be Drawn by the New Method

This is a repetition of the previous problem, or rather the application of it to architecture, although when there are many details it may be more convenient to use vanishing points or the centrolinead.

This is a repeat of the earlier problem, or more accurately, the application of it to architecture. However, when there are numerous details, it might be easier to use vanishing points or the centrolinead.

Fig. 162.

Fig. 162.

143
LXXXVII
Scale on Each Side of the Picture

As one of my objects in writing this book is to facilitate the working of our perspective, partly for the comfort of the artist, and partly that he may have no excuse for neglecting it, I will here show you how you may, by a very simple means, secure the general correctness of your perspective when sketching or painting out of doors.

As one of my goals in writing this book is to help with understanding perspective, both for the artist's comfort and to ensure there's no excuse for overlooking it, I will now show you how you can, with a very simple method, ensure the overall accuracy of your perspective when sketching or painting outside.

[142] figure

[142] figure

Fig. 163. Honfleur.

Fig. 163. Honfleur.

Let us take this example from a sketch made at Honfleur (Fig. 163), and in which my eye was my only guide, but it stands the test of the rule. First of all note that line HH, drawn from one side of the picture to the other, is the horizontal line; below that is a wall and a pavement marked aV, also going from one side of the picture to the other, and being lower down at a than at V it runs up as it were to meet the horizon at some distant point. In order to form our scale I take first the length of Ha, and measure it above and below the horizon, along the side to our left as many times as required, in this case four or five. I now take the length HV on the right side of the picture and measure it above and below the horizon, as in the other case; and then from these divisions obtain dotted lines crossing the picture from one side to the other which must all meet at some distant point on the horizon. These act as guiding lines, and are sufficient to give us the direction of any vanishing lines going to the same point. For those that go in the opposite direction we proceed in the same way, as from b on the right to on the left. They are here put in faintly, so as not to interfere with the drawing. In the sketch of Toledo (Fig. 164) the same thing is shown by double lines on each side to separate the two sets of lines, and to make the principle more evident.

Let’s take this example from a sketch made in Honfleur (Fig. 163), where my eye was my only guide, but it still follows the rules. First, note that line HH, drawn across the picture, is the horizontal line; below that is a wall and pavement marked aV, also spanning the picture. Since it’s lower at a than at V, it seems to rise to meet the horizon at some distant point. To create our scale, I first take the length of Ha and measure it both above and below the horizon, along the left side, as many times as needed—four or five in this case. Now, I’ll take the length HV on the right side of the picture and measure it above and below the horizon, just like before; then from these measurements, I’ll create dotted lines that cross the picture from side to side, all meeting at some distant point on the horizon. These serve as guiding lines and are enough to indicate the direction of any vanishing lines going to the same point. For the lines going in the opposite direction, we proceed similarly, like from b on the right to V. on the left. They’re drawn faintly here so they don’t disrupt the overall drawing. In the sketch of Toledo (Fig. 164), this is illustrated with double lines on each side to separate the two sets of lines and clarify the principle further.

[144] figure

[144] figure

Fig. 164. Toledo.

Toledo.

145
LXXXVIII
The Circle

If we inscribe a circle in a square we find that it touches that square at four points which are in the middle of each side, as at a b c d. It will also intersect the two diagonals at the four points o (Fig. 165). If, then, we put this square and its diagonals, &c., into perspective we shall have eight guiding points through which to trace the required circle, as shown in Fig. 166, which has the same base as Fig. 165.

If we draw a circle inside a square, we see that it touches the square at four points, located at the center of each side, as at a b c d. It will also cross the two diagonals at the four points o (Fig. 165). So, if we place this square and its diagonals into perspective, we will have eight guiding points to draw the circle we need, as shown in Fig. 166, which shares the same base as Fig. 165.

figure figure
Fig. 165. Fig. 166.
LXXXIX
The Circle in Perspective a True Ellipse

Although the circle drawn through certain points must be a freehand drawing, which requires a little practice to make it true, it is sufficient for ordinary purposes and on a small scale, but to be mathematically true it must be an ellipse. We will first draw an ellipse (Fig. 167). Let ee be its long, or transverse, diameter, and db its short or conjugate diameter. Now take half of the long diameter eE, and from point d with cE for radius mark on ee the two points ff, which are the foci of the ellipse. At each focus fix a pin, then make a loop of fine string that does not stretch and of such a length that when drawn out the double 146 thread will reach from f to e. Now place this double thread round the two pins at the foci ff· and distend it with the pencil point until it forms triangle fdf·, then push the pencil along and right round the two foci, which being guided by the thread will draw the curve, which is a true ellipse, and will pass through the eight points indicated in our first figure. This will be a sufficient proof that the circle in perspective and the ellipse are identical curves. We must also remember that the ellipse is an oblique projection of a circle, or an oblique section of a cone. The difference between the two figures consists in their centres not being in the same place, that of the perspective circle being at c, higher up than e the centre of the ellipse. The latter being a geometrical figure, its long diameter is exactly in the centre of the figure, whereas the centre c and the diameter of the perspective are at the intersection of the diagonals of the perspective square in which it is inscribed.

Although the circle drawn through certain points must be done freehand, which takes a bit of practice to get right, it works for normal use and on a small scale. However, to be mathematically accurate, it needs to be an ellipse. We'll start by drawing an ellipse (Fig. 167). Let ee be its long, or transverse, diameter, and db its short or conjugate diameter. Now take half of the long diameter eE, and from point d, use cE as the radius to mark the two points ff on ee, which are the foci of the ellipse. Fix a pin at each focus, then make a loop of fine string that doesn’t stretch and is long enough so that when pulled, the double thread will reach from f to e. Now place this double thread around the two pins at the foci ff· and stretch it with the pencil point until it forms triangle fdf·. Then move the pencil all the way around the two foci, guided by the thread, which will draw the curve—a true ellipse that will pass through the eight points shown in our first figure. This proves that the perspective circle and the ellipse are the same type of curve. We should also remember that the ellipse is an oblique projection of a circle or an oblique section of a cone. The difference between the two shapes is that their centers are not in the same place; the center of the perspective circle is at c, which is higher than e, the center of the ellipse. The long diameter of the ellipse is exactly in the center of the figure, while the center c and the diameter of the perspective circle are at the intersection of the diagonals of the perspective square in which it is inscribed.

Fig. 167.

Fig. 167.

XC
Further Illustration of the Ellipse

In order to show that the ellipse drawn by a loop as in the previous figure is also a circle in perspective we must reconstruct around it the square and its eight points by means of which it was drawn in the first instance. We start with nothing but 147 the ellipse itself. We have to find the points of sight and distance, the base, &c. Let us start with base AB, a horizontal tangent to the curve extending beyond it on either side. From A and B draw two other tangents so that they shall touch the curve at points such as TT· a little above the transverse diameter and on a level with each other. Produce these tangents till they meet at point S, which will be the point of sight. Through this point draw horizontal line H. Now draw tangent CD parallel to AB. Draw diagonal AD till it cuts the horizon at the point of distance, this will cut through diameter of circle at its centre, and so proceed to find the eight points through which the perspective circle passes, when it will be found that they all lie on the ellipse we have drawn with the loop, showing that the two curves are identical although their centres are distinct.

To demonstrate that the ellipse created by a loop, as shown in the previous figure, is also a circle in perspective, we need to reconstruct the square and its eight reference points that were used to draw it initially. We begin with just the ellipse itself. We must determine the points of sight and distance, the base, etc. Let's start with the base AB, a horizontal tangent to the curve that extends beyond it on both sides. From points A and B, draw two additional tangents that touch the curve at points like TT just above the transverse diameter and at the same level. Extend these tangents until they intersect at point S, which will be the point of sight. From this point, draw a horizontal line H. Next, draw tangent CD parallel to AB. Extend diagonal AD until it intersects the horizon at the point of distance; this will cut through the diameter of the circle at its center. Proceed to identify the eight points through which the perspective circle passes; all of these points will lie on the ellipse drawn with the loop, confirming that the two curves are identical, even though their centers differ.

Fig. 168.

Fig. 168.

148
XCI
How To Draw a Circle in Perspective Without a Geometrical Plan
figure
Fig. 169.
figure
Fig. 170.
figure
Fig. 171.

Divide base AB into four equal parts. At B drop perpendicular Bn, making Bn equal to Bm, or one-fourth of base. Join mn and transfer this measurement to each side of d on base line; that is, make df and df· equal to mn. Draw fS and S, and the intersections of these lines with the diagonals of square will give us the four points o o o o.

Divide base AB into four equal parts. At B, drop a perpendicular line Bn, making Bn equal to Bm, or one-fourth of the base. Connect mn and transfer this measurement to each side of d on the baseline; that is, make df and df· equal to mn. Draw fS and S, and the intersections of these lines with the diagonals of the square will give us the four points o o o o.

The reason of this is that ff· is the measurement on the base AB of another square o o o o which is exactly half of the outer square. For if we inscribe a circle in a square and then inscribe a second square in that circle, this second square will be exactly half the area of the larger one; for its side will be equal to half the diagonal of the larger square, as can be seen by studying 149 the following figures. In Fig. 170, for instance, the side of small square K is half the diagonal of large square o.

The reason for this is that ff· represents the measurement on the base AB of another square o o o o which is exactly half the size of the outer square. When we inscribe a circle in a square and then inscribe a second square inside that circle, the second square will have exactly half the area of the larger one; its side length will equal half the diagonal of the larger square, as can be observed by examining 149 the following figures. For example, in Fig. 170, the side of the smaller square K is half the diagonal of the larger square o.

In Fig. 171, CB represents half of diagonal EB of the outer square in which the circle is inscribed. By taking a fourth 150 of the base mB and drawing perpendicular mh we cut CB at h in two equal parts, Ch, hB. It will be seen that hB is equal to mn, one-quarter of the diagonal, so if we measure mn on each side of D we get ff· equal to CB, or half the diagonal. By drawing ff, f·f passing through the diagonals we get the four points o o o o through which to draw the smaller square. Without referring to geometry we can see at a glance by Fig. 172, where we have simply turned the square o o o o on its centre so that its angles touch the sides of the outer square, that it is exactly half of square ABEF, since each quarter of it, such as EoCo, is bisected by its diagonal oo.

In Fig. 171, CB represents half of the diagonal EB of the outer square that contains the inscribed circle. By taking a fourth 150 of the base mB and drawing a perpendicular mh, we intersect CB at h in two equal parts, Ch and hB. It will be evident that hB equals mn, one-quarter of the diagonal. So if we measure mn on each side of D, we get ff· equal to CB, or half of the diagonal. By drawing ff, f·f passing through the diagonals allows us to find the four points o o o o for constructing the smaller square. Without needing to refer to geometry, we can quickly see in Fig. 172 that we have simply rotated the square o o o o around its center so that its corners touch the sides of the outer square. This shows that it is exactly half of square ABEF, since each quarter of it, like EoCo, is divided by its diagonal oo.

figure figure
Fig. 172. Fig. 173.
151
XCII
How to Draw a Circle in Angular Perspective

Let ABCD be the oblique square. Produce VA till it cuts the base line at G.

Let ABCD be the slanted square. Extend VA until it intersects the base line at G.

Fig. 174.

Fig. 174.

Take mD, the fourth of the base. Find mn as in Fig. 171, measure it on each side of E, and so obtain Ef and E, and proceed to draw fV, EV, V and the diagonals, whose intersections with these lines will give us the eight points through which to draw the circle. In fact the process is the same as in parallel perspective, only instead of making our divisions on the actual base AD of the square, we make them on GD, the base line.

Take mD, the fourth of the base. Find mn as shown in Fig. 171, measure it on each side of E, and then obtain Ef and E. Next, draw fV, EV, V, and the diagonals, whose intersections with these lines will give us the eight points through which to draw the circle. In fact, the process is the same as in parallel perspective; we just make our divisions on the base line GD instead of on the actual base AD of the square.

To obtain the central line hh passing through O, we can make use of diagonals of the half squares; that is, if the other vanishing point is inaccessible, as in this case.

To get the central line hh that goes through O, we can use the diagonals of the half squares; that is, if the other vanishing point is out of reach, like in this situation.

152
XCIII
How to Draw a Circle in Perspective more Correctly, by Using Sixteen Guiding Points

First draw square ABCD. From O, the middle of the base, draw semicircle AKB, and divide it into eight equal parts. From each division raise perpendiculars to the base, such as 2 O, 3 O, 5 O, &c., and from divisions O, O, O draw lines to point of sight, and where these lines cut the diagonals AC, DB, draw horizontals parallel to base AB. Then through the points thus obtained draw the circle as shown in this figure, which also shows us how the circumference of a circle in perspective may be divided into any number of equal parts.

First, draw square ABCD. From O, the center of the base, draw a semicircle AKB48 and divide it into eight equal parts. From each division, draw perpendicular lines to the base, such as 2 O, 3 O, 5 O, etc. Then, from divisions O, O, O, draw lines to the point of sight. Where these lines intersect the diagonals AC and DB, draw horizontals parallel to the base AB. Finally, through the points obtained, draw the circle as shown in this figure, which also illustrates how the circumference of a circle in perspective can be divided into any number of equal parts.

Fig. 175.

Fig. 175.

153
XCIV
How to Divide a Perspective Circle into any Number of Equal Parts

This is simply a repetition of the previous figure as far as its construction is concerned, only in this case we have divided the semicircle into twelve parts and the perspective into twenty-four.

This is just a repeat of the previous figure in terms of construction; the only difference is that we’ve divided the semicircle into twelve parts and the perspective into twenty-four.

figure figure
Fig. 176. Fig. 177.

154 We have raised perpendiculars from the divisions on the semicircle, and proceeded as before to draw lines to the point of sight, and have thus by their intersections with the circumference already drawn in perspective divided it into the required number of equal parts, to which from the centre we have drawn the radii. This will show us how to draw traceries in Gothic windows, columns in a circle, cart-wheels, &c.

154 We have drawn perpendicular lines from the divisions on the semicircle and continued as before to connect lines to the viewpoint. By doing this and using their intersections with the already drawn circumference in perspective, we have divided it into the necessary number of equal sections, from which we have drawn the radii from the center. This will guide us in drawing patterns for Gothic windows, circular columns, cartwheels, etc.

The geometrical figure (177) will explain the construction of the perspective one by showing how the divisions are obtained on the line AB, which represents base of square, from the divisions on the semicircle AKB.

The geometric figure (177) will illustrate how to create the perspective version by demonstrating how the divisions are made on the line AB, which represents the base of the square, based on the divisions of the semicircle AKB.

XCV
How to Draw Concentric Circles

First draw a square with its diagonals (Fig. 178), and from its centre O inscribe a circle; in this circle inscribe a square, and in this again inscribe a second circle, and so on. Through their intersections with the diagonals draw lines to base, and 155 number them 1, 2, 3, 4, &c.; transfer these measurements to the base of the perspective square (Fig. 179), and proceed to construct the circles as before, drawing lines from each point on the base to the point of sight, and drawing the curves through the inter-sections of these lines with the diagonals.

First, draw a square with its diagonals (Fig. 178), and from its center O, inscribe a circle; within this circle, inscribe a square, and inside that square, inscribe a second circle, and continue this process. Through their intersections with the diagonals, draw lines down to the base, and 155 number them 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.; transfer these measurements to the base of the perspective square (Fig. 179), and proceed to construct the circles as before by drawing lines from each point on the base to the point of sight and sketching the curves through the intersections of these lines with the diagonals.

figure figure
Fig. 178. Fig. 179.

Should it be required to make the circles at equal distances, as for steps for instance, then the geometrical plan should be made accordingly.

Should it be necessary to position the circles at equal distances, like for steps for example, then the geometric plan should be created accordingly.

Or we may adopt the method shown at Fig. 180, by taking quarter base of both outer and inner square, and finding the measurement mn on each side of C, &c.

Or we might use the approach shown in Fig. 180, by taking a quarter base of both the outer and inner squares, and measuring mn on each side of C, etc.

Fig. 180.

Fig. 180.

156
XCVI
The Angle of the Diameter of the Circle in Angular and Parallel Perspective

The circle, whether in angular or parallel perspective, is always an ellipse. In angular perspective the angle of the circle's diameter varies in accordance with the angle of the square in which it is placed, as in Fig. 181, cc is the diameter of the circle and ee the diameter of the ellipse. In parallel perspective the diameter of the circle always remains horizontal, although the long diameter of the ellipse varies in inclination according to the distance it is from the point of sight, as shown in Fig. 182, in which the third circle is much elongated and distorted, owing to its being outside the angle of vision.

The circle, whether viewed from an angular or parallel perspective, is always perceived as an ellipse. In angular perspective, the angle of the circle's diameter changes based on the angle of the square it’s in, as shown in Fig. 181, where cc is the circle's diameter and ee is the ellipse's diameter. In parallel perspective, the circle's diameter stays horizontal, but the long diameter of the ellipse shifts in angle depending on how far it is from the viewpoint, as illustrated in Fig. 182, where the third circle appears much stretched and distorted because it's outside the angle of vision.

Fig. 181.

Fig. 181.

Fig. 182.

Fig. 182.

157
XCVII
How to Correct Disproportion in the Width of Columns

The disproportion in the width of columns in Fig. 183 arises from the point of distance being too near the point of sight, or, in other words, taking too wide an angle of vision. It will be seen that column 3 is much wider than column 1.

The uneven width of the columns in Fig. 183 comes from the distance being too close to the viewpoint, or in simpler terms, having too wide of a viewing angle. You'll notice that column 3 is significantly wider than column 1.

Fig. 183.

Fig. 183.

158 In our second figure (184) is shown how this defect is remedied, by doubling the distance, or by counting the same distance as half, which is easily effected by drawing the diagonal from O to ½-D, instead of from A, as in the other figure, O being at half base. Here the squares lie much more level, and the columns are nearly the same width, showing the advantage of a long distance.

158 In our second figure (184), we demonstrate how to fix this issue by either doubling the distance or treating the same distance as half. This can be easily achieved by drawing a diagonal from O to ½-D, instead of from A like in the other figure, with O positioned at half the base. Here, the squares are much more aligned, and the columns are almost the same width, highlighting the benefits of a greater distance.

Fig. 184.

Fig. 184.

XCVIII
How to Draw a Circle over a Circle or a Cylinder
figure
Fig. 185.

First construct square and circle ABE, then draw square CDF with its diagonals. Then find the various points O, and from these raise perpendiculars to meet the diagonals of the upper square at points P, which, with the other points will be sufficient guides to draw the circle required. This can be applied to towers, columns, &c. The size of the circles can be varied so that the upper portion of a cylinder or column shall be smaller than the lower.

First, create a square and a circle ABE, then draw square CDF with its diagonals. Next, locate the various points O, and from these, draw perpendiculars to meet the diagonals of the upper square at points P. These points, along with the others, will provide enough guidance to draw the required circle. This method can be used for towers, columns, etc. The sizes of the circles can be adjusted so that the upper part of a cylinder or column is smaller than the lower part.

159
XCIX
To Draw a Circle Below a Given Circle
figure
Fig. 186.

Construct the upper square and circle as before, then by means of the vanishing scale POV, which should be made the depth required, drop perpendiculars from the various points marked O, obtained by the diagonals, making them the right depth by referring them to the vanishing scale, as shown in this figure. This can be used for drawing garden fountains, basins, and various architectural objects.

Construct the upper square and circle as before, then using the vanishing scale Point of view, which should be set to the required depth, drop perpendicular lines from the points marked O, which are obtained by the diagonals. Ensure they are at the correct depth by referring to the vanishing scale, as illustrated in this figure. This technique can be used for drawing garden fountains, basins, and various architectural elements.

160
C
Application of Previous Problem

That is, to draw a circle above a circle. In Fig. 187 can be seen how by means of the vanishing scale at the side we obtain the height of the verticals 1, 2, 3, 4, &c., which determine the direction of the upper circle; and in this second figure, how we resort to the same means to draw circular steps.

That is, to draw a circle on top of another circle. In Fig. 187, you can see how we use the vanishing scale on the side to determine the height of the verticals 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., which establish the direction of the upper circle; and in this second figure, how we use the same method to draw circular steps.

Fig. 187.

Fig. 187.

Fig. 188.

Fig. 188.

161
CI
Doric Columns

It is as well for the art student to study the different orders of architecture, whether architect or not, as he frequently has to introduce them into his pictures, and at least must know their proportions, and how columns diminish from base to capital, as shown in this illustration.

It’s important for art students to study the various styles of architecture, whether they’re architects or not, since they often need to incorporate them into their artwork. At the very least, they should understand their proportions and how columns taper from base to capital, as illustrated here.

Fig. 189.

Fig. 189.

162
CII
To Draw Semicircles Standing upon a Circle at any Angle

Given the circle ACBH, on diagonal AB draw semicircle AKB, and on the same line AB draw rectangle AEFB, its height being determined by radius OK of semicircle. From centre O draw OF to corner of rectangle. Through , where that line intersects the semicircle, draw mn parallel to AB. This will give intersection O· on the vertical OK, through which all such horizontals as m·n·, level with mn, must pass. Now take any other diameter, such as GH, and thereon raise rectangle GghH, the same height as the other. The manner of doing this is to produce diameter GH to the horizon till it finds its vanishing point at V. From V through 163 K draw hg, and through O· draw n·m·. From O draw the two diagonals og and oh, intersecting m·n· at O, O, and thus we have the five points GOKOH through which to draw the required semicircle.

Given the circle ACBH, draw a semicircle AKB on diagonal AB, and on the same line AB, draw a rectangle AEFB, with its height determined by the radius OK of the semicircle. From the center O, draw OF to the corner of the rectangle. Through , where that line intersects the semicircle, draw mn parallel to AB. This will create the intersection O· on the vertical OK, through which all such horizontals like m·n·, level with mn, must pass. Now take any other diameter, such as GH, and use it to raise rectangle GghH, at the same height as the first rectangle. To do this, extend diameter GH to the horizon until it reaches its vanishing point at V. From V through 163 K, draw hg, and through O· draw n·m·. From O, draw the two diagonals og and oh, intersecting m·n· at O, O, and thus we have the five points GOKOH through which to draw the required semicircle.

Fig. 190.

Fig. 190.

CIII
A Dome Standing on a Cylinder

This figure is a combination of the two preceding it. A cylinder is first raised on the circle, and on the top of that we draw semicircles from the different divisions on the circumference of the 164 upper circle. This, however, only represents a small half-globular object. To draw the dome of a cathedral, or other building high above us, is another matter. From outside, where we can get to a distance, it is not difficult, but from within it will tax all our knowledge of perspective to give it effect.

This figure combines the two before it. A cylinder is first placed on the circle, and on top of that, we draw semicircles from the different divisions on the circumference of the 164 upper circle. However, this only depicts a small half-globular object. Drawing the dome of a cathedral, or any other tall building above us, is a different challenge. From the outside, where we can view it from a distance, it's not too difficult, but doing it from the inside will require all our knowledge of perspective to achieve the right effect.

We shall go more into this subject when we come to archways and vaulted roofs, &c.

We will discuss this topic further when we get to archways and vaulted roofs, etc.

Fig. 191.

Fig. 191.

CIV
Section of a Dome or Niche
figure
Fig. 192.

First draw outline of the niche GFDBA (Fig. 193), then at its base draw square and circle GOA, S being the point of sight, and divide the circumference of the circle into the required number of parts. Then draw semicircle FOB, and over that another semicircle EOC. The manner of drawing them is shown in Fig. 192. From the divisions on the circle GOA raise verticals to semicircle FOB, which will divide it in the same way. Divide the smaller semicircle EOC into the same number of parts as the others, 165 which divisions will serve as guiding points in drawing the curves of the dome that are drawn towards D, but the shading must assist greatly in giving the effect of the recess.

First, outline the niche GFDBA (Fig. 193), then at its base, draw a square and a circle GOA, with S as the point of sight, and divide the circumference of the circle into the required number of parts. Next, draw semicircle Free on Board, and above that, another semicircle EOC. The method of drawing them is illustrated in Fig. 192. From the divisions on the circle GOA, raise vertical lines to semicircle Free on Board, which will divide it in the same way. Divide the smaller semicircle EOC into the same number of parts as the others, 165 which divisions will serve as guiding points for drawing the curves of the dome that extend towards D, but the shading must significantly enhance the effect of the recess.

Fig. 193.

Fig. 193.

166 In Fig. 192 will be seen how to draw semicircles in perspective. We first draw the half squares by drawing from centres O of their diameters diagonals to distance-point, as OD, which cuts the vanishing line BS at m, and gives us the depth of the square, and in this we draw the semicircle in the usual way.

166 In Fig. 192, you can see how to draw semicircles in perspective. First, we create half squares by drawing diagonals from the centers O of their diameters to the vanishing point, like OD, which intersects the vanishing line BS at m. This gives us the depth of the square, and within this, we draw the semicircle as usual.

167
CV
A Dome
figure
Fig. 194. A Dome.

First draw a section of the dome ACEDB (Fig. 194) the shape required. Draw AB at its base and CD at some distance above it. Keeping these as central lines, form squares thereon by drawing SA, SB, SC, SD, &c., from point of sight, and determining their lengths by diagonals fh, f·h· from point of distance, passing through O. Having formed the two squares, draw perspective circles in each, and divide their circumferences into twelve or whatever number of parts are needed. To complete the figure draw from each division in the lower circle curves passing through the corresponding divisions in the upper one, to the apex. But as these are freehand lines, it requires some taste and knowledge to draw them properly, and of course in a large drawing several more squares and circles might be added to aid the draughtsman. The interior of the dome can be drawn in the same way.

First, draw a section of the dome ACEDB (Fig. 194) in the shape you need. Draw AB at its base and CDs some distance above it. Using these as central lines, create squares by drawing SA, SB, SC, SD, etc., from the point of sight, and determine their lengths using diagonals fh, f·h· from the point of distance, passing through O. Once you have formed the two squares, draw perspective circles within each and divide their circumferences into twelve, or however many parts you need. To finish the figure, draw curves from each division in the lower circle that pass through the corresponding divisions in the upper circle, reaching the apex. However, since these are freehand lines, it takes some skill and understanding to draw them correctly, and in a larger drawing, you could add several more squares and circles to help the draftsman. The inside of the dome can be drawn the same way.

169
CVI
How to Draw Columns Standing in a Circle

In Fig. 195 are sixteen cylinders or columns standing in a circle. First draw the circle on the ground, then divide it into sixteen equal parts, and let each division be the centre of the circle on which to raise the column. The question is how to make each one the right width in accordance with its position, for it is evident that a near column must appear wider than the opposite one. On the right of the figure is the vertical scale A, which gives the heights of the columns, and at its foot is a horizontal scale, or a scale of widths B. Now, according to the line on which the column stands, we find its apparent width marked on the scale. Thus take the small square and circle at 15, without its column, or the broken column at 16; and note that on each side of its centre O I have measured oa, ob, equal to spaces marked 3 on the same horizontal in the scale B. Through these points a and b I have drawn lines towards point of sight S. Through their intersections with diagonal e, which is directed to point of distance, draw the farther and nearer sides of the square in which to describe the circle and the cylinder or column thereon. I have made all the squares thus obtained in parallel perspective, but they do not represent the bases of columns arranged in circles, which should converge towards the centre, and I believe in some cases are modified in form to suit that design.

In Fig. 195, there are sixteen cylinders or columns arranged in a circle. First, draw the circle on the ground, then divide it into sixteen equal parts, making each division the center point for raising the column. The challenge is to ensure each column is the correct width based on its position because it's clear that a column closer to you will look wider than one directly across from it. On the right side of the figure is the vertical scale A, which shows the heights of the columns, and at the bottom is a horizontal scale, or a scale of widths B. According to the line where the column stands, we find its apparent width marked on the scale. For example, take the small square and circle at 15, excluding its column, or the broken column at 16; note that on each side of its center O, I have measured oa and ob, equal to the intervals marked 3 on the same horizontal line in scale B. Through these points a and b, I have drawn lines towards the point of sight S. Through their intersections with diagonal e, which is directed towards the point of distance, draw the farther and nearer sides of the square to define the circle and the cylinder or column on it. I've created all the squares in parallel perspective, but they don't accurately represent the bases of columns arranged in circles, which should converge toward the center. I believe, in some instances, their shape is adjusted to fit that design.

[168] figure

[168] figure

Fig. 195.

Fig. 195.

170
CVII
Columns and Capitals

This figure shows the application of the square and diagonal in drawing and placing columns in angular perspective.

This figure shows how to use the square and diagonal to draw and position columns in angular perspective.

Fig. 196.

Fig. 196.

CVIII
Method of Perspective Employed by Architects

The architects first draw a plan and elevation of the building to be put into perspective. Having placed the plan at the required angle to the picture plane, they fix upon the point of sight, and the distance from which the drawing is to be viewed. They then draw a line SP at right angles to the picture plane VV·, which represents that distance so that P is the station-point. The eye is generally considered to be the station-point, but when lines are drawn to that point from the ground-plan, the station-point 171 is placed on the ground, and is in fact the trace or projection exactly under the point at which the eye is placed. From this station-point P, draw lines PV and PV· parallel to the two sides of the plan ba and ad (which will be at right angles to each other), and produce them to the horizon, which they will touch at points V and . These points thus obtained will be the two vanishing points.

The architects start by creating a plan and elevation of the building to put it into perspective. After positioning the plan at the required angle to the picture plane, they decide on the viewpoint and the distance from which the drawing will be seen. They then draw a line SP at a right angle to the picture plane VV·, representing that distance, with P being the station point. The eye is typically thought of as the station point, but when lines are drawn to that point from the ground plan, the station point 171 is placed on the ground and is actually the trace or projection directly underneath where the eye is positioned. From this station point P, draw lines PV and PV parallel to the two sides of the plan ba and ad (which will be perpendicular to each other), and extend them to the horizon, where they will intersect at points V and V.. These points will be the two vanishing points.

The next operation is to draw lines from the principal points of the plan to the station-point P, such as bP, cP, dP, &c., and where these lines intersect the picture plane (VV· here represents it as well as the horizon), drop perpendiculars B, aA, D, &c., to meet the vanishing lines AV, AV·, which will determine the points A, B, C, D, 1, 2, 3, &c., and also the perspective lengths of the sides of the figure AB, AD, and the divisions B, 1, 2, &c. Taking the height of the figure AE from the elevation, we measure it on Aa; as in this instance A touches the ground line, it may be used as a line of heights.

The next step is to draw lines from the main points of the plan to the station point P, such as bP, cP, dP, and so on. Where these lines cross the picture plane (VV· represents it, along with the horizon), drop perpendiculars B, aA, D, etc., to meet the vanishing lines AV, AV, which will determine the points A, B, C, D, 1, 2, 3, etc., and also the perspective lengths of the sides of the figure AB, AD, and the divisions B, 1, 2, etc. Taking the height of the figure AE from the elevation, we measure it on Aa; since in this case A touches the ground line, it can be used as a line of heights.

Fig. 197. A method of angular Perspective employed by architects.
[To face p. 171]

Fig. 197. A technique for angular perspective used by architects.
[To face p. 171]

I have here placed the perspective drawing under the ground plan to show the relation between the two, and how the perspective is worked out, but the general practice is to find the required measurements as here shown, to mark them on a straight edge of card or paper, and transfer them to the paper on which the drawing is to be made.

I have placed the perspective drawing below the ground plan to illustrate the connection between the two and how the perspective is created. The usual method is to determine the needed measurements as shown here, mark them on a straight edge of card or paper, and then transfer them to the paper where the drawing will be made.

This of course is the simplest form of a plan and elevation. It is easy to see, however, that we could set out an elaborate building in the same way as this figure, but in that case we should not place the drawing underneath the ground-plan, but transfer the measurements to another sheet of paper as mentioned above.

This is obviously the simplest version of a plan and elevation. However, it’s clear that we could layout a more complex building in the same way as this figure. In that case, we wouldn't put the drawing under the ground plan, but rather transfer the measurements to another sheet of paper as mentioned above.

172
CIX
The Octagon
figure
Fig. 198.
figure
Fig. 199.

To draw the geometrical figure of an octagon contained in a square, take half of the diagonal of that square as radius, and from each corner describe a quarter circle. At the eight points where they touch the sides of the square, draw the eight sides of the octagon.

To create a geometric figure of an octagon inside a square, take half of the square's diagonal as the radius and, from each corner, draw a quarter circle. At the eight points where these arcs touch the sides of the square, draw the eight sides of the octagon.

To put this into perspective take the base of the square AB and thereon form the perspective square ABCD. From either extremity of that base (say B) drop perpendicular BF, draw diagonal AF, and then from B with radius BO, half that diagonal, describe arc EOE. This will give us the measurement AE. Make GB equal to AE. Then draw lines from G and E towards S, and by means of the diagonals find the transverse lines KK, hh, which will give us the eight points through which to draw the octagon.

To put this into perspective, take the base of the square AB and create the perspective square ABCD on it. From either end of that base (let's say B), drop a perpendicular BF, draw the diagonal AF, and then from B, using radius BO—which is half of that diagonal—draw the arc Equal Opportunity Employer. This will give us the measurement AE. Make GB equal to AE. Then, draw lines from G and E towards S, and using the diagonals, find the transverse lines KK, hh, which will provide us with the eight points needed to draw the octagon.

173
CX
How to Draw the Octagon in Angular Perspective

Form square ABCD (new method), produce sides BC and AD to the horizon at V, and produce VA to on base. Drop perpendicular from B to F the same length as B, and proceed as in the previous figure to find the eight points on the oblique square through which to draw the octagon.

Form square ABCD (new method), extend sides BC and AD to the horizon at V, and extend VA to on the base. Drop a vertical line from B to F the same length as B, and proceed as in the previous figure to locate the eight points on the angled square to draw the octagon.

Fig. 200.

Fig. 200.

It will be seen that this operation is very much the same as in parallel perspective, only we make our measurements on the base line B as we cannot measure the vanishing line BA otherwise.

It can be observed that this operation is quite similar to parallel perspective; the only difference is that we take our measurements from the baseline B since we cannot measure the vanishing line BA in any other way.

174
CXI
How to Draw an Octagonal Figure in Angular Perspective

In this figure in angular perspective we do precisely the same thing as in the previous problem, taking our measurements on the base line EB instead of on the vanishing line BA. If we wish to raise a figure on this octagon the height of EG we form the vanishing scale EGO, and from the eight points on the ground draw horizontals to EO and thus find all the points that give us the perspective height of each angle of the octagonal figure.

In this figure using angular perspective, we do exactly the same as in the previous problem, taking our measurements along the base line EB instead of the vanishing line BA. If we want to raise a figure on this octagon to the height of EG, we create the vanishing scale Ego, and from the eight points on the ground, we draw horizontal lines to EO, allowing us to find all the points that give us the perspective height of each angle of the octagonal figure.

Fig. 201.

Fig. 201.

CXII
How to Draw Concentric Octagons, with Illustration of a Well

The geometrical figure 202 A shows how by means of diagonals AC and BD and the radii 1 2 3, &c., we can obtain smaller octagons inside the larger ones. Note how these are carried out in the second figure (202 B), and their application to this drawing of an octagonal well on an octagonal base.

The geometric figure 202 A illustrates how we can create smaller octagons within larger ones using the diagonals AC and BD and the radii 1 2 3, etc. Pay attention to how this is demonstrated in the second figure (202 B) and its application to this drawing of an octagonal well on an octagonal base.

[175] figure figure
Fig. 202 A. Fig. 202 B.

Fig. 203.

Fig. 203.

176
CXIII
A Pavement Composed of Octagons and Small Squares

To draw a pavement with octagonal tiles we will begin with an octagon contained in a square abcd. Produce diagonal ac to V. This will be the vanishing point for the sides of the small squares directed towards it. The other sides are directed to an inaccessible point out of the picture, but their directions are determined by the lines drawn from divisions on base to V2 (see back, Fig. 133).

To create a pavement with octagonal tiles, we'll start with an octagon inside a square abcd. Draw the diagonal ac to V. This will serve as the vanishing point for the sides of the small squares pointing toward it. The other sides point to a unreachable point outside the picture, but their directions are determined by the lines drawn from divisions on the base to V2 (see back, Fig. 133).

Fig. 204.

Fig. 204.

I have drawn the lower figure to show how the squares which contain the octagons are obtained by means of the diagonals, 177 BD, AC, and the central line OV2. Given the square ABCD. From D draw diagonal to G, then from C through centre o draw CE, and so on all the way up the floor until sufficient are obtained. It is easy to see how other squares on each side of these can be produced.

I drew the lower figure to demonstrate how the squares that contain the octagons are created using the diagonals, 177 BD, AC, and the central line OV2. Given the square ABCD, draw a diagonal from D to G, then from C, through the center o, draw CE, and continue this process all the way up the floor until you've created enough. It's clear how additional squares on each side of these can be produced.

Fig. 205.

Fig. 205.

CXIV
The Hexagon

The hexagon is a six-sided figure which, if inscribed in a circle, will have each of its sides equal to the radius of that circle (Fig. 206). If inscribed in a rectangle ABCD, that rectangle will be equal in length to two sides of the hexagon or two radii of the circle, as EF, and its width will be twice the height of an equilateral triangle mon.

The hexagon is a six-sided shape that, if drawn inside a circle, will have each of its sides equal to the radius of that circle (Fig. 206). If drawn inside a rectangle ABCD, that rectangle will have a length equal to two sides of the hexagon or two radii of the circle, like EF, and its width will be twice the height of an equilateral triangle mon.

figure figure
Fig. 206. Fig. 207.

To put the hexagon into perspective, draw base of quadrilateral AD, divide it into four equal parts, and from each division draw lines to point of sight. From h drop perpendicular ho, and form equilateral triangle mno. Take the height ho and measure it twice along the base from A to 2. From 2 draw line 178 to point of distance, or from 1 to ½ distance, and so find length of side AB equal to A2. Draw BC, and EF through centre , and thus we have the six points through which to draw the hexagon.

To visualize the hexagon, start by drawing the base of quadrilateral AD and divide it into four equal sections. From each section, draw lines to the point of view. From h, drop a perpendicular line ho and create an equilateral triangle mno. Measure the height ho and mark it twice along the base from A to 2. From point 2, draw a line to the point of distance, or from point 1 to half the distance, to find the length of side AB, which is equal to A2. Draw BC and EF through the center , and now we have the six points needed to construct the hexagon.

CXV
A Pavement Composed of Hexagonal Tiles

In drawing pavements, except in the cases of square tiles, it is necessary to make a plan of the required design, as in this figure composed of hexagons. First set out the hexagon as at A, then draw parallels 1 1, 2 2, &c., to mark the horizontal ends of the tiles and the intermediate lines oo. Divide the base into the required number of parts, each equal to one side of the hexagon, as 1, 2, 3, 4, &c.; from these draw perpendiculars as shown in the figure, and also the diagonals passing through their intersections. Then mark with a strong line the outlines of the hexagonals, shading some of them; but the figure explains itself.

In designing pavements, except for square tiles, you need to create a plan for the desired design, like the one shown here with hexagons. First, lay out the hexagon as seen at A, then draw parallel lines 1 1, 2 2, etc., to indicate the horizontal edges of the tiles and the intermediate lines oo. Divide the base into the required number of segments, each equal to one side of the hexagon, like 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.; from these points, draw perpendicular lines as illustrated in the figure, along with the diagonals that pass through their intersections. Finally, outline the hexagons with a bold line, shading some of them; the figure speaks for itself.

Fig. 208.

Fig. 208.

It is easy to put all these parallels, perpendiculars, and diagonals into perspective, and then to draw the hexagons.

It’s easy to see all these parallels, perpendiculars, and diagonals clearly, and then to draw the hexagons.

First draw the hexagon on AD as in the previous figure, dividing 179 AD into four, &c., set off right and left spaces equal to these fourths, and from each division draw lines to point of sight. Produce sides me, nf till they touch the horizon in points V, ; these will be the two vanishing points for all the sides of the tiles that are receding from us. From each division on base draw lines to each of these vanishing points, then draw parallels through their intersections as shown on the figure. Having all these guiding lines it will not be difficult to draw as many hexagons as you please.

First, draw the hexagon on AD as shown in the previous figure, dividing 179 AD into four. Set off equal spaces on the right and left that match these fourths, and from each division, draw lines to the point of sight. Extend the sides me and nf until they touch the horizon at points V and . These will be the two vanishing points for all the sides of the tiles that are further away from us. From each division on the base, draw lines to each of these vanishing points, then draw parallels through their intersections as shown in the figure. With all these guiding lines, it will be easy to draw as many hexagons as you want.

[180] figure

[180] figure

Fig. 209.

Fig. 209.

Note that the vanishing points should be at equal distances from S, also that the parallelogram in which each tile is contained is oblong, and not square, as already pointed out.

Note that the vanishing points should be at equal distances from S, and also that the parallelogram containing each tile is oblong, not square, as mentioned earlier.

We have also made use of the triangle omn to ascertain the length and width of that oblong. Another thing to note is that we have made use of the half distance, which enables us to make our pavement look flat without spreading our lines outside the picture.

We have also used the triangle omn to determine the length and width of that rectangle. Another point to mention is that we have utilized the half distance, which allows us to make our pavement appear flat without extending our lines beyond the picture.

181
CXVI
A Pavement of Hexagonal Tiles in Angular Perspective

This is more difficult than the previous figure, as we only make use of one vanishing point; but it shows how much can be done by diagonals, as nearly all this pavement is drawn by their aid. First make a geometrical plan A at the angle required. Then draw its perspective K. Divide line 4b into four equal parts, and continue these measurements all along the base: from each division draw lines to V, and draw the hexagon K. Having this one to start with we produce its sides right and left, but first to the left to find point G, the vanishing point of the 182 diagonals. Those to the right, if produced far enough, would meet at a distant vanishing point not in the picture. But the student should study this figure for himself, and refer back to Figs. 204 and 205.

This is harder than the previous example because we only use one vanishing point; however, it demonstrates how much can be achieved with diagonals since almost all of this pavement is created with their help. First, make a geometrical plan A at the required angle. Then draw its perspective K. Divide line 4b into four equal sections, and extend these measurements all along the base: from each division, draw lines to V, and draw the hexagon K. After getting this one set up, extend its sides to the right and left, but first extend to the left to find point G, the vanishing point of the diagonals. The ones on the right, if extended far enough, would meet at a far-off vanishing point that isn’t shown in the image. But the student should examine this figure on their own and reference Figs. 204 and 205.

Fig. 210.

Fig. 210.

CXVII
Further Illustration of the Hexagon

To draw the hexagon in perspective we must first find the rectangle in which it is inscribed, according to the view we take of it. That at A we have already drawn. We will now work out that at B. Divide the base AD into four equal parts and transfer those measurements to the perspective figure C, as at AD, measuring other equal spaces along the base. To find the depth An of the rectangle, make DK equal to base of square. Draw KO to distance-point, cutting DO at O, and thus find line LO. Draw diagonal Dn, and through its intersections with the 183 lines 1, 2, 3, 4 draw lines parallel to the base, and we shall thus have the framework, as it were, by which to draw the pavement.

To draw the hexagon in perspective, we first need to find the rectangle that fits inside it based on our viewpoint. We've already drawn the one at A. Now, let's work on the one at B. Divide the base AD into four equal parts and transfer those measurements to the perspective figure C, just like on AD, measuring equal spaces along the base. To find the depth An of the rectangle, make DK equal to the base of the square. Draw KO to the distance-point, intersecting Do at O, which gives us the line LO. Draw diagonal Dn, and through its intersections with lines 1, 2, 3, 4, draw lines parallel to the base, thus creating the framework to draw the pavement.

figure figure
Fig. 211 A. Fig. 211 B.

Fig. 212.

Fig. 212.

CXVIII
Another View of the Hexagon in Angular Perspective
figure
Fig. 213.

Given the rectangle ABCD in angular perspective, produce side DA to E on base line. Divide EB into four equal parts, and from each division draw lines to vanishing point, then by means of diagonals, &c., draw the hexagon.

Given the rectangle ABCD in angular perspective, extend side DA to E on the baseline. Divide EB into four equal sections, and from each division, draw lines to the vanishing point. Then, using diagonals, etc., draw the hexagon.

184 In Fig. 214 we have first drawn a geometrical plan, G, for the sake of clearness, but the one above shows that this is not necessary.

184 In Fig. 214, we've initially created a geometric plan, G, for clarity, but the one above illustrates that this isn't needed.

Fig. 214.

Fig. 214.

To raise the hexagonal figure K we have made use of the vanishing scale O and the vanishing point V. Another method could be used by drawing two hexagons one over the other at the required height.

To lift the hexagonal shape K, we've utilized the vanishing scale O and the vanishing point V. Another approach would be to draw two hexagons stacked on top of each other at the desired height.

185
CXIX
Application of the Hexagon to Drawing a Kiosk

This figure is built up from the hexagon standing on a rectangular base, from which we have raised verticals, &c. Note how the jutting portions of the roof are drawn from . But the figure explains itself, so there is no necessity to repeat descriptions already given in the foregoing problems.

This figure is created from the hexagon resting on a rectangular base, from which we have drawn vertical lines, etc. Notice how the projecting parts of the roof extend from . However, the figure is self-explanatory, so there’s no need to restate descriptions already provided in the previous problems.

Fig. 215.

Fig. 215.

186
CXX
The Pentagon
figure
Fig. 216.

The pentagon is a figure with five equal sides, and if inscribed in a circle will touch its circumference at five equidistant points. With any convenient radius describe circle. From half this radius, marked 1, draw a line to apex, marked 2. Again, with 1 as centre and 1 2 as radius, describe arc 2 3. Now with 2 as centre and 2 3 as radius describe arc 3 4, which will cut the circumference at point 4. Then line 2 4 will be one of the sides of the pentagon, which we can measure round the circle and so produce the required figure.

The pentagon is a shape with five equal sides, and when it’s drawn inside a circle, it will touch the edge of the circle at five evenly spaced points. To begin, use any convenient radius to draw a circle. From half of this radius, marked as 1, draw a line to the top point, marked as 2. Then, with 1 as the center and the distance from 1 to 2 as the radius, draw an arc reaching point 3. Next, with 2 as the center and the distance from 2 to 3 as the radius, draw another arc to find point 4 on the circle. The line from 2 to 4 will be one side of the pentagon. We can then measure around the circle to create the complete shape.

To put this pentagon into parallel perspective inscribe the circle in which it is drawn in a square, and from its five angles 4, 2, 4, &c., drop perpendiculars to base and number them as in the figure. Then draw the perspective square (Fig. 217) and transfer these measurements to its base. From these draw lines to point of sight, then by their aid and the two diagonals proceed to construct the pentagon in the same way that we did the triangles and other figures. Should it be required to place this 187 pentagon in the opposite position, then we can transfer our measurements to the far side of the square, as in Fig. 218.

To put this pentagon into parallel perspective, draw a circle around it and inscribe it in a square. From its five angles, drop perpendicular lines to the base and label them as shown in the figure. Next, draw the perspective square (Fig. 217) and transfer these measurements to its base. From these points, draw lines to the point of sight, and then use these along with the two diagonals to construct the pentagon, just like we did with the triangles and other shapes. If you need to place this pentagon in the opposite position, you can transfer your measurements to the other side of the square, as shown in Fig. 218. 187

figure figure
Fig. 217. Fig. 218.

188 Or if we wish to put it into angular perspective we adopt the same method as with the hexagon, as shown at Fig. 219.

188 Alternatively, if we want to view it from an angular perspective, we use the same approach as with the hexagon, as illustrated in Fig. 219.

figure figure
Fig. 219. Fig. 220.

Another way of drawing a pentagon (Fig. 220) is to draw an isosceles triangle with an angle of 36° at its apex, and from centre of each side of the triangle draw perpendiculars to meet at o, which will be the centre of the circle in which it is inscribed. From this centre and with radius OA describe circle A 3 2, &c. Take base of triangle 1 2, measure it round the circle, and so find the five points through which to draw the pentagon. The angles at 1 2 will each be 72°, double that at A, which is 36°.

Another way to draw a pentagon (Fig. 220) is to start with an isosceles triangle that has a 36° angle at its apex. From the center of each side of the triangle, draw perpendicular lines to meet at o, which will be the center of the circle where the pentagon is inscribed. From this center, use radius OA to draw circle A 3 2, etc. Take the base of the triangle 1 2, measure it around the circle, and then identify the five points to draw the pentagon. The angles at 1 2 will each be 72°, which is double the angle at A, which is 36°.

189
CXXI
The Pyramid

Nothing can be more simple than to put a pyramid into perspective. Given the base (abc), raise from its centre a perpendicular (OP) of the required height, then draw lines from the corners of that base to a point P on the vertical line, and the thing is done. These pyramids can be used in drawing roofs, steeples, &c. The cone is drawn in the same way, so also is any other figure, whether octagonal, hexangular, triangular, &c.

Nothing is simpler than putting a pyramid into perspective. Start by taking the base (abc) and draw a perpendicular line (OP) from its center to the required height. Then connect the corners of that base to a point P on the vertical line, and you're done. These pyramids can be used for drawing roofs, steeples, etc. The cone is drawn in the same way, as well as any other shape, whether it’s octagonal, hexagonal, triangular, etc.

figure
Fig. 221. Fig. 222. Fig. 223.
191
CXXII
The Great Pyramid

This enormous structure stands on a square base of over thirteen acres, each side of which measures, or did measure, 764 feet. Its original height was 480 feet, each side being an equilateral triangle. Let us see how we can draw this gigantic mass on our little sheet of paper.

This massive building sits on a square base covering more than thirteen acres, with each side measuring 764 feet. It originally stood at 480 feet tall, with each side forming an equilateral triangle. Let's figure out how we can sketch this giant shape on our small sheet of paper.

In the first place, to take it all in at one view we must put it very far back, and in the second the horizon must be so low down that we cannot draw the square base of thirteen acres on the perspective plane, that is on the ground, so we must draw it in the air, and also to a very small scale.

In the beginning, to see everything at once, we have to push it way back, and also, the horizon needs to be so low that we can’t draw the square base of thirteen acres on the perspective plane, meaning on the ground. Instead, we have to draw it in the air, and on a very small scale.

[190] figure

[190] figure

Fig. 224.

Fig. 224.

Divide the base AB into ten equal parts, and suppose each of these parts to measure 10 feet, S, the point of sight, is placed on the left of the picture near the side, in order that we may get a long line of distance, S ½ D; but even this line is only half the distance we require. Let us therefore take the 16th distance, as shown in our previous illustration of the lighthouse (Fig. 92), which enables us to measure sixteen times the length of base AB, or 1,600 feet. The base ef of the pyramid is 1,600 feet from the base line of the picture, and is, according to our 10-foot scale, 764 feet long.

Divide the base AB into ten equal parts, and assume each of these parts measures 10 feet. Place point S, the point of sight, on the left side of the picture near the edge to get a long line of distance, S ½ D; but even this line is only half the distance we need. So, let's take the 16th distance, as shown in our previous illustration of the lighthouse (Fig. 92), which allows us to measure sixteen times the length of the base AB, or 1,600 feet. The base ef of the pyramid is 1,600 feet from the baseline of the picture, and according to our 10-foot scale, it measures 764 feet long.

The next thing to consider is the height of the pyramid. We make a scale to the right of the picture measuring 50 feet from B to 50 at point where BP intersects base of pyramid, raise perpendicular CG and thereon measure 480 feet. As we cannot obtain a palpable square on the ground, let us draw one 480 feet above the ground. From e and f raise verticals eM and fN, making them equal to perpendicular G, and draw line MN, which will be the same length as base, or 764 feet. On this line form square MNK parallel to the perspective plane, find its centre by means of diagonals, and will be the central height of the pyramid and exactly over the centre of the base. From this point draw sloping lines f, e, O·y, &c., and the figure is complete.

The next thing to consider is the height of the pyramid. We create a scale to the right of the picture measuring 50 feet from B to 50 at the point where BP meets the base of the pyramid. We then raise a perpendicular CG and measure 480 feet from there. Since we can't get a solid square on the ground, let's draw one 480 feet above the ground. From e and f, we raise verticals eM and fN, making them equal to the perpendicular G, and draw line MN, which will be the same length as the base, or 764 feet. On this line, we form square MNK parallel to the perspective plane, find its center using diagonals, and will be the central height of the pyramid, right above the center of the base. From this point , draw sloping lines f, e, O·y, etc., and the figure is complete.

192 Note the way in which we find the measurements on base of pyramid and on line MN. By drawing AS and BS to point of sight we find Te, which measures 100 feet at a distance of 1,600 feet. We mark off seven of these lengths, and an additional 64 feet by the scale, and so obtain the required length. The position of the third corner of the base is found by dropping a perpendicular from K, till it meets the line eS.

192 Take note of how we determine the measurements at the base of the pyramid and along the line MN. By drawing AS and BS to the point of sight, we find Te, which measures 100 feet at a distance of 1,600 feet. We mark off seven of these lengths, plus an additional 64 feet using the scale, to get the required length. The location of the third corner of the base is identified by dropping a perpendicular from K until it meets the line eS.

Another thing to note is that the side of the pyramid that faces us, although an equilateral triangle, does not appear so, as its top angle is 382 feet farther off than its base owing to its leaning position.

Another thing to note is that the side of the pyramid that faces us, although an equilateral triangle, doesn't look that way because its top angle is 382 feet further away than its base due to its leaning position.

193
CXXIII
The Pyramid in Angular Perspective

In order to show the working of this proposition I have taken a much higher horizon, which immediately detracts from the impression of the bigness of the pyramid.

To demonstrate how this idea works, I've selected a much higher viewpoint, which instantly reduces the sense of the pyramid's size.

Fig. 225.

Fig. 225.

We proceed to make our ground-plan abcd high above the horizon instead of below it, drawing first the parallel square and then the oblique one. From all the principal points drop perpendiculars to the ground and thus find the points through which to draw the base of the pyramid. Find centres OO· and decide upon the height OP. Draw the sloping lines from P to the corners of the base, and the figure is complete.

We start by creating our ground plan abcd high above the horizon instead of below it, first drawing the parallel square and then the slanted one. From all the main points, drop straight lines to the ground to locate the points for drawing the base of the pyramid. Identify the centers OO· and determine the height OP. Draw the sloping lines from P to the corners of the base, and the figure is complete.

CXXIV
To Divide the Sides of the Pyramid Horizontally

Having raised the pyramid on a given oblique square, divide the vertical line OP into the required number of parts. From 194 A through C draw AG to horizon, which gives us G, the vanishing point of all the diagonals of squares parallel to and at the same angle as ABCD. From G draw lines through the divisions 2, 3, &c., on OP cutting the lines PA and PC, thus dividing them into the required parts. Through the points thus found draw from V all those sides of the squares that have V for their vanishing point, as ab, cd, &c. Then join bd, ac, and the rest, and thus make the horizontal divisions required.

Having raised the pyramid on a given oblique square, divide the vertical line OP into the required number of parts. From 194 draw AG from A through C to the horizon, which gives us G, the vanishing point of all the diagonals of squares that are parallel to and at the same angle as ABCD. From G, draw lines through sections 2, 3, etc., on OP, intersecting the lines PA and Personal Computer, thus dividing them into the required parts. Draw all the sides of the squares that have V as their vanishing point from V, such as ab, cd, etc. Then connect bd, ac, and the others, creating the necessary horizontal divisions.

figure figure
Fig. 226. Fig. 227.

The same method will apply to drawing steps, square blocks, &c., as shown in Fig. 227, which is at the same angle as the above.

The same method will be used for drawing steps, square blocks, etc., as shown in Fig. 227, which is at the same angle as the one above.

195
CXXV
Of Roofs

The pyramidal roof (Fig. 228) is so simple that it explains itself. The chief thing to be noted is the way in which the diagonals are produced beyond the square of the walls, to give the width of the eaves, according to their position.

The pyramidal roof (Fig. 228) is so straightforward that it speaks for itself. The main thing to notice is how the diagonals extend beyond the square of the walls to determine the width of the eaves, depending on their placement.

figure figure
Fig. 228. Fig. 229.

Another form of the pyramidal roof is here given (Fig. 229). First draw the cube edcba at the required height, and on the side facing us, adcb, draw triangle K, which represents the end of a gable roof. Then draw similar triangles on the other sides of the cube (see Fig. 159, LXXXIV). Join the opposite triangles 196 at the apex, and thus form two gable roofs crossing each other at right angles. From o, centre of base of cube, raise vertical OP, and then from P draw sloping lines to each corner of base a, b, &c., and by means of central lines drawn from P to half base, find the points where the gable roofs intersect the central spire or pyramid. Any other proportions can be obtained by adding to or altering the cube.

Another version of the pyramidal roof is shown here (Fig. 229). First, draw the cube edcba at the desired height, and on the side facing us, adcb, draw triangle K, which represents the end of a gable roof. Then, draw similar triangles on the other sides of the cube (see Fig. 159, LXXXIV). Connect the opposite triangles at the top to create two gable roofs that cross each other at right angles. From o, the center of the base of the cube, draw a vertical line OP, and then from P, draw sloping lines to each corner of the base a, b, and c, and by using central lines drawn from P to the midpoint of the base, determine the points where the gable roofs intersect the central spire or pyramid. You can achieve different proportions by adding to or modifying the cube.

Fig. 230.

Fig. 230.

To draw a sloping or hip-roof which falls back at each end we must first draw its base, CBDA (Fig. 230). Having found the centre O and central line SP, and how far the roof is to fall back at each end, namely the distance Pm, draw horizontal line RB through m. Then from B through O draw diagonal BA, and from 197 A draw horizontal AD, which gives us point n. From these two points m and n raise perpendiculars the height required for the roof, and from these draw sloping lines to the corners of the base. Join ef, that is, draw the top line of the roof, which completes it. Fig. 231 shows a plan or bird's-eye view of the roof and the diagonal AB passing through centre O. But there are so many varieties of roofs they would take almost a book to themselves to illustrate them, especially the cottages and farm-buildings, barns, &c., besides churches, old mansions, and others. There is also such irregularity about some of them that perspective rules, beyond those few here given, are of very little use. So that the best thing for an artist to do is to sketch them from the real whenever he has an opportunity.

To create a sloping or hip roof that angles back at each end, we first need to draw its base, CBDA (Fig. 230). After identifying the center O and the central line SP, and determining how far the roof will slope back at each end, which is the distance Pm, draw a horizontal line RB through m. Then, from B through O, draw the diagonal BA, and from A, draw a horizontal line AD, giving us point n. From these two points, m and n, raise perpendicular lines to the required height for the roof, and then draw sloping lines to the corners of the base. Connect ef to create the top line of the roof, which completes the structure. Fig. 231 shows a plan or bird's-eye view of the roof along with the diagonal AB passing through center O. There are so many types of roofs that they could easily fill a book, especially those of cottages, farm buildings, barns, etc., in addition to churches and old mansions. Some roofs have such irregular shapes that perspective rules, beyond the few outlined here, are not very helpful. Therefore, the best approach for an artist is to sketch roofs from real life whenever possible.

Fig. 231.

Fig. 231.

CXXVI
Of Arches, Arcades, Bridges, &c.

199 For an arcade or cloister (Fig. 232) first set up the outer frame ABCD according to the proportions required. For round arches the height may be twice that of the base, varying to one and a half. In Gothic arches the height may be about three times the width, all of which proportions are chosen to suit the different purposes and effects required. Divide the base AB into the desired number of parts, 8, 10, 12, &c., each part representing 1 foot. (In this case the base is 10 feet and the horizon 5 feet.) Set out floor by means of ¼ distance. Divide it into squares of 1 foot, so that there will be 8 feet between each column or pilaster, supposing we make them to stand on a square foot. Draw the first archway EKF facing us, and its inner semicircle gh, with also its thickness or depth of 1 foot. Draw the span of the archway EF, then central line PO to point of sight. Proceed to raise as many other arches as required at the given distances. The intersections of the central line with the chords mn, &c., will give the centres from which to describe the semicircles.

199 To create an arcade or cloister (Fig. 232), first set up the outer frame ABCD according to the necessary proportions. For round arches, the height can be twice that of the base, with a variation down to one and a half. For Gothic arches, the height can be about three times the width, depending on the specific purposes and effects desired. Divide the base AB into the desired number of parts, such as 8, 10, or 12, with each part representing 1 foot. (In this case, the base is 10 feet, and the horizon is 5 feet.) Lay out the floor using ¼ distance. Break it into squares of 1 foot, ensuring there will be 8 feet between each column or pilaster, assuming they are positioned on a square foot. Draw the first archway EKF facing us, and its inner semicircle gh, along with its thickness or depth of 1 foot. Draw the span of the archway EF, then the central line PO to the point of sight. Proceed to raise as many other arches as needed at the specified distances. The intersections of the central line with the chords mn, etc., will provide the centers from which to draw the semicircles.

[198] figure

[198] figure

Fig. 232.

Fig. 232.

200
CXXVII
Outline of an Arcade with Semicircular Arches

This is to show the method of drawing a long passage, corridor, or cloister with arches and columns at equal distances, and is worked in the same way as the previous figure, using ¼ distance and ¼ base. The floor consists of five squares; the semicircles of the arches are described from the numbered points on the central line OS, where it intersects the chords of the arches.

This shows how to draw a long passage, corridor, or cloister with arches and columns spaced evenly apart, using the same method as the previous figure, utilizing ¼ distance and ¼ base. The floor is made up of five squares; the semicircles of the arches are drawn from the numbered points on the central line OS, where it intersects the chords of the arches.

Fig. 233.

Fig. 233.

201
CXXVIII
Semicircular Arches on a Retreating Plane

First draw perspective square abcd. Let ae· be the height of the figure. Draw ae·f·b and proceed with the rest of the outline. To draw the arches begin with the one facing us, EF enclosed in the quadrangle Ee·f·F. With centre O describe the semicircle and across it draw the diagonals F, E, and through nn, where these lines intersect the semicircle, draw horizontal KK and also KS to point of sight. It will be seen that the half-squares at the side are the same size in perspective as the one facing us, and we carry out in them much the same operation; that is, we draw the diagonals, find the point O, and the points nn, &c., through which to draw our arches. See perspective of the circle (Fig. 165).

First, draw a perspective square abcd. Let ae· represent the height of the figure. Draw ae·f·b and continue with the rest of the outline. To draw the arches, start with the one facing us, EF, which is enclosed in the quadrangle Ee·f·F. Using the center O, draw the semicircle and across it, sketch the diagonals F, E, and through nn, where these lines intersect the semicircle, draw horizontal lines KK and KS to the point of sight. You will notice that the half-squares on the sides are the same size in perspective as the one in front of us, and we perform almost the same operation in them; that is, we draw the diagonals, find the point O, and the points nn, etc., through which to draw our arches. See perspective of the circle (Fig. 165).

Fig. 234.

Fig. 234.

If more points are required an additional diagonal from O to 202 K may be used, as shown in the figure, which perhaps explains itself. The method is very old and very simple, and of course can be applied to any kind of arch, pointed or stunted, as in this drawing of a pointed arch (Fig. 235).

If more points are needed, you can add another diagonal from O to 202 K, as shown in the figure, which likely makes sense on its own. This method is quite old and straightforward and can easily be applied to any type of arch, whether pointed or stubby, as illustrated in this drawing of a pointed arch (Fig. 235).

Fig. 235.

Fig. 235.

CXXIX
An Arcade in Angular Perspective

First draw the perspective square ABCD at the angle required, by new method. Produce sides AD and BC to V. Draw diagonal BD and produce to point G, from whence we draw the other diagonals to cfh. Make spaces 1, 2, 3, &c., on base line equal to B 1 to obtain sides of squares. Raise vertical BM the height required. Produce DA to O on base line, and from O raise vertical OP equal to BM. This line enables us to dispense with the long vanishing point to the left; its working has been explained at Fig. 131. From P draw PRV to vanishing point V, which will intersect vertical AR at R. Join MR, and this line, if produced, would meet the horizon at the other vanishing point. 203 In like manner make O2 equal to B2·. From 2 draw line to V, and at 2, its intersection with AR, draw line 2 2, which will also meet the horizon at the other vanishing point. By means of the quarter-circle A we can obtain the points through which to draw the semicircular arches in the same way as in the previous figure.

First, draw the perspective square ABCD at the required angle using the new method. Extend sides AD and BC to V. Draw diagonal BD and extend it to point G, from which we draw the other diagonals to cfh. Create spaces 1, 2, 3, etc., on the base line that are equal to B 1 to get the sides of squares. Raise vertical BM to the required height. Extend DA to O on the base line, and from O, raise vertical OP equal to BM. This line allows us to avoid the long vanishing point to the left; its operation is explained in Fig. 131. From P, draw PRV to the vanishing point V, which will intersect vertical AR at R. Connect MR, and this line, if extended, would meet the horizon at the other vanishing point. 203 In the same way, set O2 equal to B2. From 2, draw a line to V, and at 2, where it intersects with AR, draw line 2 2, which will also meet the horizon at the other vanishing point. Using the quarter-circle A, we can determine the points through which to draw the semicircular arches, just like in the previous figure.

Fig. 236.

Fig. 236.

CXXX
A Vaulted Ceiling

From the square ceiling ABCD we have, as it were, suspended two arches from the two diagonals DB, AC, which spring from the four corners of the square EFGH, just underneath it. The curves of these arches, which are not semicircular but elongated, are obtained by means of the vanishing scales mS, nS. Take any two convenient points P, R, on each side of the semicircle, and 204 raise verticals Pm, Rn to AB, and on these verticals form the scales. Where mS and nS cut the diagonal AC drop perpendiculars to meet the lower line of the scale at points 1, 2. On the other side, using the other scales, we have dropped perpendiculars in the same way from the diagonal to 3, 4. These points, together 205 with EOG, enable us to trace the curve E 1 2 O 3 4 G. We draw the arch under the other diagonal in precisely the same way.

From the square ceiling ABCD, we have, in a sense, hung two arches from the two diagonals DB and AC, which extend from the four corners of the square EFGH just below it. The shapes of these arches, which are not semicircular but stretched out, are created using the vanishing scales mS and nS. Select any two convenient points P and R on each side of the semicircle, and 204 raise vertical lines Pm and Rn to AB, and form the scales on these verticals. Where mS and nS intersect the diagonal AC, drop perpendicular lines to connect with the lower line of the scale at points 1 and 2. On the other side, using the other scales, we have also dropped perpendiculars in the same manner from the diagonal to points 3 and 4. These points, together with EOG, allow us to draw the curve E 1 2 O 3 4 G. We draw the arch under the other diagonal in exactly the same way.

figure figure
Fig. 237. Fig. 238.

The reason for thus proceeding is that the cross arches, although elongated, hang from their diagonals just as the semicircular arch EKF hangs from AB, and the lines mn, touching the circle at PR, are represented by 1, 2, hanging from the diagonal AC.

The reason for proceeding this way is that the cross arches, even though they are stretched out, hang from their diagonals just like the semicircular arch EKF hangs from AB, and the lines mn, which touch the circle at PR, are represented by 1, 2, hanging from the diagonal AC.

206 Figure 238, which is practically the same as the preceding only differently shaded, is drawn in the following manner. Draw arch EGF facing us, and proceed with the rest of the corridor, but first finding the flat ceiling above the square on the ground ABcd. Draw diagonals ac, bd, and the curves pending from them. But we no longer see the clear arch as in the other drawing, for the spaces between the curves are filled in and arched across.

206 Figure 238, which is almost the same as the previous one but shaded differently, is created in the following way. Start by drawing arch EGF facing us, and continue with the rest of the corridor. First, determine the flat ceiling above the square on the ground ABcd. Then, draw the diagonals ac, bd, and the curves extending from them. However, we no longer see the clear arch as in the other drawing, because the spaces between the curves are filled in and arched over.

CXXXI
A Cloister, from a Photograph

This drawing of a cloister from a photograph shows the correctness of our perspective, and the manner of applying it to practical work.

This drawing of a cloister from a photograph shows how accurate our perspective is and how it can be applied to real-world projects.

Fig. 239.

Fig. 239.

207
CXXXII
The Low or Elliptical Arch

Let AB be the span of the arch and Oh its height. From centre O, with OA, or half the span, for radius, describe outer semicircle. From same centre and oh for radius describe the inner semicircle. Divide outer circle into a convenient number of parts, 1, 2, 3, &c., to which draw radii from centre O. From each division drop perpendiculars. Where the radii intersect the inner circle, as at gkmo, draw horizontals op, mn, kj, &c., and 208 through their intersections with the perpendiculars f, j, n, p, draw the curve of the flattened arch. Transfer this to the lower figure, and proceed to draw the tunnel. Note how the vanishing scale is formed on either side by horizontals ba, fe, &c., which enable us to make the distant arches similar to the near ones.

Let AB be the span of the arch and Oh its height. From the center O, use OA, or half the span, as the radius to draw the outer semicircle. From the same center, use oh as the radius to draw the inner semicircle. Divide the outer circle into a convenient number of parts, 1, 2, 3, etc., and draw radii from the center O to each division. Drop perpendiculars from each division. Where the radii intersect the inner circle, as at gkmo, draw horizontal lines op, mn, kj, etc., and through their intersections with the perpendiculars f, j, n, p, sketch the curve of the flattened arch. Transfer this to the lower figure and continue to draw the tunnel. Note how the vanishing scale is created on either side by the horizontals ba, fe, etc., which help us make the distant arches resemble the nearby ones.

Fig. 240.

Fig. 240.

Fig. 241.

Fig. 241.

CXXXIII
Opening or Arched Window in a Vault

First draw the vault AEB. To introduce the window K, the upper part of which follows the form of the vault, we first decide on its width, which is mn, and its height from floor Ba. On line Ba at the side of the arch form scales aa·S, bb·S, &c. Raise the semicircular arch K, shown by a dotted line. The scale at the side will give the lengths aa·, bb·, &c., from different parts of this dotted arch to corresponding points in the curved archway or window required.

First, draw the vault AEB. To add the window K, the upper part of which follows the shape of the vault, we first determine its width, which is mn, and its height from the floor Ba. On line Ba beside the arch, mark the scales aa·S, bb·S, etc. Draw the semicircular arch K, represented by a dotted line. The scale on the side will provide the lengths aa·, bb·, etc., from various points on this dotted arch to the corresponding points in the curved archway or window needed.

Fig. 242.

Fig. 242.

Note that to obtain the width of the window K we have used 209 the diagonals on the floor and width m n on base. This method of measurement is explained at Fig. 144, and is of ready application in a case of this kind.

Note that to get the width of the window K, we used 209 the diagonals on the floor and the width m n at the base. This measurement method is explained in Fig. 144 and is easy to apply in a situation like this.

CXXXIV
Stairs, Steps, &c.

Having decided upon the incline or angle, such as CBA, at which the steps are to be placed, and the height Bm of each step, draw mn to CB, which will give the width. Then measure along base AB this width equal to DB, which will give that for all the other steps. Obtain length BF of steps, and draw EF parallel to CB. These lines will aid in securing the exactness of the figure.

Having chosen the angle, such as CBA, for the placement of the steps, and the height Bm of each step, draw mn to CB, which will determine the width. Next, measure this width along base AB equal to DB, setting the width for all the other steps. Find the length BF of the steps and draw EF parallel to CB. These lines will help ensure the accuracy of the design.

figure figure
Fig. 243. Fig. 244.
210
CXXXV
Steps, Front View

In this figure the height of each step is measured on the vertical line AB (this line is sometimes called the line of heights), and their depth is found by diagonals drawn to the point of distance D. The rest of the figure explains itself.

In this figure, the height of each step is measured on the vertical line AB (this line is sometimes called the line of heights), and their depth is determined by the diagonals drawn to the point of distance D. The rest of the figure is self-explanatory.

Fig. 245.

Fig. 245.

211
CXXXVI
Square Steps

Draw first step ABEF and its two diagonals. Raise vertical AH, and measure thereon the required height of each step, and thus form scale. Let the second step CD be less all round than the first by Ao or Bo. Draw oC till it cuts the diagonal, and proceed to draw the second step, guided by the diagonals and taking its height from the scale as shown. Draw the third step in the same way.

Draw the first step ABEF and its two diagonals. Raise a vertical line AH, and measure the required height for each step to create a scale. The second step CDs should be smaller all around than the first by Ao or Bo. Draw oC until it intersects the diagonal, and then draw the second step, using the diagonals for guidance and taking its height from the scale as shown. Draw the third step in the same manner.

Fig. 246.

Fig. 246.

212
CXXXVII
To Divide an Inclined Plane into Equal Parts—such as a Ladder Placed against a Wall

Divide the vertical EC into the required number of parts, and draw lines from point of sight S through these divisions 1, 2, 3, &c., cutting the line AC at 1, 2, 3, &c. Draw parallels to AB, such as mn, from AC to BD, which will represent the steps of the ladder.

Divide the vertical EC into the required number of parts, and draw lines from the viewpoint S through these divisions 1, 2, 3, etc., cutting the line AC at 1, 2, 3, etc. Draw parallel lines to AB, like mn, from AC to BD, which will represent the steps of the ladder.

Fig. 247.

Fig. 247.

213
CXXXVIII
Steps and the Inclined Plane

In Fig. 248 we treat a flight of steps as if it were an inclined plane. Draw the first and second steps as in Fig. 245. Then through 1, 2, draw 1V, AV to V, the vanishing point on the vertical line SV. These two lines and the corresponding ones at BV will form a kind of vanishing scale, giving the height of each step as we ascend. It is especially useful when we pass the horizontal line and we no longer see the upper surface of the step, the scale on the right showing us how to proceed in that case.

In Fig. 248, we treat a flight of steps as if it were an inclined plane. Draw the first and second steps as shown in Fig. 245. Then, from points 1 and 2, draw 1V and AV to V, the vanishing point on the vertical line SV. These two lines, along with the corresponding ones at BV, will create a kind of vanishing scale that indicates the height of each step as we go up. This is particularly helpful when we pass the horizontal line and can no longer see the top surface of the step, with the scale on the right guiding us on how to continue in that situation.

Fig. 248.

Fig. 248.

214 In Fig. 249 we have an example of steps ascending and descending. First set out the ground-plan, and find its vanishing point S (point of sight). Through S draw vertical BA, and make SA equal to SB. Set out the first step CD. Draw EA, CA, DA, and GA, for the ascending guiding lines. Complete the steps facing us, at central line OO. Then draw guiding line FB for the descending steps (see Rule 8).

214 In Fig. 249 we see an example of steps that go up and down. First, lay out the ground plan and locate its vanishing point S (point of sight). From S, draw the vertical line BA, making SA equal to SB. Outline the first step CD. Now draw EA, CA, DA, and GA as the guiding lines for the ascent. Complete the steps facing us along the central line OO. Then draw the guiding line FB for the descending steps (see Rule 8).

Fig. 249.

Fig. 249.

CXXXIX
Steps in Angular Perspective

First draw the base ABCD (Fig. 251) at the required angle by the new method (Fig. 250). Produce BC to the horizon, and thus find vanishing point V. At this point raise vertical VV·. Construct 215 first step AB, refer its height at B to line of heights hI on left, and thus obtain height of step at A. Draw lines from A and F to . From n draw diagonal through O to G. Raise vertical at O to represent the height of the next step, its height being determined by the scale of heights at the side. From A and F draw lines to , and also similar lines from B, which will serve as guiding lines to determine the height of the steps at either end as we raise them to the required number.

First, draw the base ABCD (Fig. 251) at the required angle using the new method (Fig. 250). Extend BC to the horizon to find the vanishing point V. From this point, draw a vertical line VV·. Construct 215 the first step AB, and refer its height at B to the line of heights hI on the left to determine the height of the step at A. Draw lines from A and F to . From n, draw a diagonal line through O to G. Draw a vertical line at O to represent the height of the next step, which is determined by the scale of heights on the side. From A and F, draw lines to , and also draw similar lines from B, which will act as guides to determine the heights of the steps at both ends as we raise them to the required number.

Fig. 250.

Fig. 250.

Fig. 251.

Fig. 251.

216
CXL
A Step Ladder at an Angle

First draw the ground-plan G at the required angle, using vanishing and measuring points. Find the height hH, and width at top HH·, and draw the sides HA and H·E. Note that AE is wider than HH·, and also that the back legs are not at the same angle as the front ones, and that they overlap them. From E raise vertical EF, and divide into as many parts as you require rounds to the ladder. From these divisions draw lines 1 1, 2 2, &c., towards the other vanishing point (not in the picture), but 217 having obtained their direction from the ground-plan in perspective at line Ee, you may set up a second vertical ef at any point on Ee and divide it into the same number of parts, which will be in proportion to those on EF, and you will obtain the same result by drawing lines from the divisions on EF to those on ef as in drawing them to the vanishing point.

First, create the ground plan G at the desired angle, using vanishing and measuring points. Determine the height hH and the width at the top HH·, and draw the sides HA and H.E.. Note that AE is wider than HH·, and also that the back legs are at a different angle than the front ones and overlap them. From E, raise a vertical line EF and divide it into as many sections as needed for the rounds of the ladder. From these divisions, draw lines 1 1, 2 2, etc., towards the other vanishing point (not shown in the image), but 217 having established their direction from the ground plan in perspective at line Ee, you can erect a second vertical ef at any point on Ee and divide it into the same number of parts, which will be proportional to those on EF. You will achieve the same outcome by drawing lines from the divisions on EF to those on ef as you would by drawing them to the vanishing point.

Fig. 252.

Fig. 252.

CXLI
Square Steps Placed over each Other

This figure shows the other method of drawing steps, which is simple enough if we have sufficient room for our vanishing points.

This figure illustrates the alternative way of drawing steps, which is straightforward enough if we have enough space for our vanishing points.

Fig. 253.

Fig. 253.

The manner of working it is shown at Fig. 124.

The way to do this is shown at Fig. 124.

218
CXLII
Steps and a Double Cross Drawn by Means of Diagonals and one Vanishing Point

Although in this figure we have taken a longer distance-point than in the previous one, we are able to draw it all within the page.

Although in this figure we've used a longer distance point than in the previous one, we can still fit it all on the page.

Fig. 254.

Fig. 254.

Begin by setting out the square base at the angle required. Find point G by means of diagonals, and produce AB to V, &c. Mark height of step Ao, and proceed to draw the steps as already shown. Then by the diagonals and measurements on base draw the second step and the square inside it on which to stand the foot of the cross. To draw the cross, raise verticals from the four corners of its base, and a line K from its centre. Through any 219 point on this central line, if we draw a diagonal from point G we cut the two opposite verticals of the shaft at mn (see Fig. 255), and by means of the vanishing point V we cut the other two verticals at the opposite corners and thus obtain the four points through which to draw the other sides of the square, which go to the distant or inaccessible vanishing point. It will be seen by carefully examining the figure that by this means we are enabled to draw the double cross standing on its steps.

Begin by laying out the square base at the required angle. Locate point G using diagonals, and extend AB to V, etc. Mark the height of step Ao, and proceed to draw the steps as previously shown. Then, using the diagonals and measurements on the base, draw the second step and the square inside it that will serve as the base for the foot of the cross. To draw the cross, raise vertical lines from the four corners of its base, and a line K from its center. Through any point on this central line, if we draw a diagonal from point G, we intersect the two opposite verticals of the shaft at mn (see Fig. 255), and with the vanishing point V, we intersect the other two verticals at the opposite corners, thus determining the four points to draw the other sides of the square, extending to the distant or inaccessible vanishing point. Upon careful examination of the figure, it will be clear that this method allows us to draw the double cross standing on its steps.

Fig. 255.

Fig. 255.

221
CXLIII
A Staircase Leading to a Gallery

In this figure we have made use of the devices already set forth in the foregoing figures of steps, &c., such as the side scale on the left of the figure to ascertain the height of the steps, the double lines drawn to the high vanishing point of the inclined plane, and so on; but the principal use of this diagram is to show on the perspective plane, which as it were runs under the stairs, the trace or projection of the flights of steps, the landings and positions of other objects, which will be found very useful in placing figures in a composition of this kind. It will be seen that these underneath measurements, so to speak, are obtained by the half-distance.

In this figure, we’ve utilized the tools already described in the previous figures of steps, etc., like the side scale on the left of the figure to measure the height of the steps, the double lines leading to the high vanishing point of the inclined plane, and so on. However, the main purpose of this diagram is to illustrate on the perspective plane, which seems to run beneath the stairs, the trace or projection of the flights of steps, the landings, and the positions of other objects. This will be very helpful for placing figures in a composition of this kind. You’ll see that these measurements underneath, so to speak, are derived from the half-distance.

[220] figure

[220] figure

Fig. 256.

Fig. 256.

222
CXLIV
Winding Stairs in a Square Shaft

Draw square ABCD in parallel perspective. Divide each side into four, and raise verticals from each division. These verticals will mark the positions of the steps on each wall, four in number. From centre O raise vertical OP, around which the steps are to wind. Let AF be the height of each step. Form scale AB, which will give the height of each step according to its position. Thus at mn we find the height at the centre of the square, so if we transfer this measurement to the central line OP and repeat it upwards, say to fourteen, then we have the height of each step on the line where they all meet. Starting then with the first on the right, draw the rectangle gD1f, the height of AF, then draw to the central line go, f1, and 1 1, and thus complete the first step. On DE, measure heights equal to D 1. Draw 2 2 towards central line, and 2n towards point of sight till it meets the second vertical nK. Then draw n2 to centre, and so complete the second step. From 3 draw 3a to third vertical, from 4 to fourth, and so on, thus obtaining the height of each ascending step on the wall to the right, completing them in the same way as numbers 1 and 2, when we come to the sixth step, the other end of which is against the wall opposite to us. Steps 6, 7, 8, 9 are all on this wall, and are therefore equal in height all along, as they are equally distant. Step 10 is turned towards us, and abuts on the wall to our left; its measurement is taken on the scale AB just underneath it, and on the same line to which it is drawn. Step 11 is just over the centre of base mo, and is therefore parallel to it, and its height is mn. The widths of steps 12 and 13 seem gradually to increase as they come towards us, and as they rise above the horizon we begin to see underneath them. Steps 13, 14, 15, 16 are against the wall on this side of the picture, which we may suppose has been removed to show the working of the drawing, or they might be an open flight as we sometimes see in shops and galleries, although in that case they are generally enclosed in a cylindrical shaft.

Draw square ABCD in parallel perspective. Divide each side into four equal parts and raise vertical lines from each division. These verticals will indicate where the steps are positioned on each wall, totaling four steps. From the center O, draw a vertical line OP, around which the steps will spiral. Let AF represent the height of each step. Create a scale AB, which will provide the height of each step based on its position. Thus, at mn, we find the height at the center of the square. If we transfer this measurement to the central line OP and extend it upwards, say to fourteen, we have the height of each step along the line where they all converge. Starting with the first step on the right, draw the rectangle gD1f, using the height of AF, then connect to the central line go, f1, and 1 1 to complete the first step. On DE, measure heights equal to D 1. Draw 2 2 towards the central line and 2n towards the point of sight until it meets the second vertical nK. Then connect n2 to the center to finish the second step. From 3, draw 3a to the third vertical, and from 4 to the fourth, and continue this way to determine the height of each ascending step on the right wall, completing them just like steps 1 and 2. When we reach the sixth step, its other end will touch the wall opposite us. Steps 6, 7, 8, and 9 are all on this wall and are therefore of equal height since they are spaced the same. Step 10 faces us and connects with the wall on our left; its measurement is taken on the scale AB directly beneath it, along the same line it is drawn. Step 11 sits directly above the center of base mo, making it parallel to it, with a height of mn. The widths of steps 12 and 13 appear to increase gradually as they approach us, and as they rise above the horizon, we start to see underneath them. Steps 13, 14, 15, and 16 are against the wall on this side of the drawing, which we might assume has been removed to reveal the drawing process, or they could represent an open staircase typically found in shops and galleries, although in that case, they are usually enclosed in a cylindrical shaft.

[223] figure

[223] figure

Fig. 257.

Fig. 257.

225
CXLV
Winding Stairs in a Cylindrical Shaft

First draw the circular base CD. Divide the circumference into equal parts, according to the number of steps in a complete round, say twelve. Form scale ASF and the larger scale ASB, on which is shown the perspective measurements of the steps according to their positions; raise verticals such as ef, Gh, &c. From divisions on circumference measure out the central line OP, as in the other figure, and find the heights of the steps 1, 2, 3, 4, &c., by the corresponding numbers in the large scale to the left; then proceed in much the same way as in the previous figure. Note the central column OP cuts off a small portion of the steps at that end.

First, draw the circular base CD. Divide the circumference into equal parts based on the number of steps in a complete round, let's say twelve. Create scale ASF and the larger scale ASB, which shows the perspective measurements of the steps according to their positions; raise vertical lines like ef, Gh, etc. From the divisions on the circumference, measure out the central line OP, as shown in the other figure, and determine the heights of the steps 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., using the corresponding numbers in the large scale on the left; then continue in much the same way as in the previous figure. Note that the central column OP cuts off a small part of the steps at that end.

[224] figure

[224] figure

Fig. 258.

Fig. 258.

226 In ordinary cases only a small portion of a winding staircase is actually seen, as in this sketch.

226 In typical situations, only a small part of a spiral staircase is visible, like in this sketch.

Fig. 259. Sketch of Courtyard in Toledo.

Fig. 259. Sketch of Courtyard in Toledo.

227
CXLVI
Of the Cylindrical Picture or Diorama

Although illusion is by no means the highest form of art, there is no picture painted on a flat surface that gives such a wonderful appearance of truth as that painted on a cylindrical canvas, such as those panoramas of ‘Paris during the Siege’, exhibited some years ago; ‘The Battle of Trafalgar’, only lately shown at Earl's Court; and many others. In these pictures the spectator is in the centre of a cylinder, and although he turns round to look at the scene the point of sight is always in front of him, or nearly so. I believe on the canvas these points are from 12 to 16 feet apart.

Although illusion isn't the ultimate form of art, no painting on a flat surface creates as stunning an illusion of reality as those painted on a cylindrical canvas, like the panoramas of ‘Paris during the Siege’ that were displayed a few years back, or ‘The Battle of Trafalgar’, which was just recently shown at Earl's Court, along with many others. In these paintings, the viewer stands in the center of a cylinder, and even as they turn to take in the scene, their line of sight stays directly in front of them, or nearly so. I believe the points on the canvas are spaced about 12 to 16 feet apart.

Fig. 260.

Fig. 260.

228 The reason of this look of truth may be explained thus. If we place three globes of equal size in a straight line, and trace their apparent widths on to a straight transparent plane, those at the sides, as a and b, will appear much wider than the centre one at c. Whereas, if we trace them on a semicircular glass they will appear very nearly equal and, of the three, the central one c will be rather the largest, as may be seen by this figure.

228 The reason for this appearance of truth can be explained like this. If we line up three spheres of the same size in a straight line and project their apparent widths onto a flat transparent surface, the spheres on the ends, a and b, will look much wider than the one in the center, c. However, if we project them onto a semicircular piece of glass, they will appear nearly equal, and the central one c will actually look a bit larger, as shown in this figure.

We must remember that, in the first case, when we are looking at a globe or a circle, the visual rays form a cone, with a globe at its base. If these three cones are intersected by a straight glass GG, and looked at from point S, the intersection of C will be a circle, as the cone is cut straight across. The other two being intersected at an angle, will each be an ellipse. At the same time, if we look at them from the station point, with one eye only, then the three globes (or tracings of them) will appear equal and perfectly round.

We need to keep in mind that, in the first scenario, when we look at a globe or a circle, the visual rays create a cone, with a globe at the base. If these three cones are crossed by a straight glass GG, and viewed from point S, the intersection of C will form a circle, as the cone is sliced straight across. The other two, being crossed at an angle, will each become an ellipse. Meanwhile, if we view them from the station point with one eye only, the three globes (or their outlines) will seem equal and perfectly round.

Of course the cylindrical canvas is necessary for panoramas; but we have, as a rule, to paint our pictures and wall-decorations on flat surfaces, and therefore must adapt our work to these conditions.

Of course, the cylindrical canvas is essential for panoramas; however, we typically have to paint our pictures and wall decorations on flat surfaces, so we need to adjust our work to fit these conditions.

In all cases the artist must exercise his own judgement both in the arrangement of his design and the execution of the work, for there is perspective even in the touch—a painting to be looked at from a distance requires a bold and broad handling; in small cabinet pictures that we live with in our own rooms we look for the exquisite workmanship of the best masters.

In every situation, the artist must rely on their own judgment regarding both the layout of their design and the execution of the work. There's perspective even in the way they apply paint—a piece meant to be viewed from afar needs bold and broad strokes, while for small cabinet paintings that we have in our own spaces, we seek the fine craftsmanship of the greatest masters.

229

BOOK FOURTH

CXLVII
The Perspective of Cast Shadows

There is a pretty story of two lovers which is sometimes told as the origin of art; at all events, I may tell it here as the origin of sciagraphy. A young shepherd was in love with the daughter of a potter, but it so happened that they had to part, and were passing their last evening together, when the girl, seeing the shadow of her lover's profile cast from a lamp on to some wet plaster or on the wall, took a metal point, perhaps some sort of iron needle, and traced the outline of the face she loved on to the plaster, following carefully the outline of the features, being naturally anxious to make it as like as possible. The old potter, the father of the girl, was so struck with it that he began to ornament his wares by similar devices, which gave them increased value by the novelty and beauty thus imparted to them.

There’s a lovely story about two lovers that’s sometimes shared as the origin of art; at any rate, I’ll tell it here as the origin of shadow art. A young shepherd was in love with a potter’s daughter, but they had to part ways. On their last evening together, the girl noticed her lover’s profile shadow cast by a lamp onto some wet plaster or the wall. She took a metal point, maybe an iron needle, and traced the outline of the face she adored onto the plaster, carefully following the features, eager to make it as accurate as possible. The girl’s father, the old potter, was so impressed that he started decorating his pottery with similar designs, which added value to his goods because of the new beauty they brought.

Here then we have a very good illustration of our present subject and its three elements. First, the light shining on the wall; second, the wall or the plane of projection, or plane of shade; and third, the intervening object, which receives as much light on itself as it deprives the wall of. So that the dark portion thus caused on the plane of shade is the cast shadow of the intervening object.

Here, we have a great example of our current topic and its three parts. First, the light hitting the wall; second, the wall or the surface where the light projects, or the shade surface; and third, the object in between, which gets as much light on itself as it blocks from the wall. Therefore, the dark area created on the shade surface is the shadow cast by the object in between.

We have to consider two sorts of shadows: those cast by a luminary a long way off, such as the sun; and those cast by artificial light, such as a lamp or candle, which is more or less close to the object. In the first case there is no perceptible divergence of rays, and the outlines of the sides of the shadows of regular objects, as cubes, posts, &c., will be parallel. In the second case, the rays diverge according to the nearness of the light, and consequently the lines of the shadows, instead of being parallel, are spread out.

We need to think about two types of shadows: those created by a distant light source, like the sun, and those created by artificial lights, like a lamp or candle, which are closer to the object. In the first case, the rays don’t noticeably spread apart, so the edges of the shadows from regular shapes, like cubes and posts, will be parallel. In the second case, the rays spread out based on how close the light is, so the lines of the shadows, instead of being parallel, fan out.

230
CXLVIII
The Two Kinds of Shadows

In Figs. 261 and 262 is seen the shadow cast by the sun by parallel rays.

In Figs. 261 and 262, you can see the shadow created by the sun using parallel rays.

figure figure
Fig. 261. Fig. 262.

Fig. 263 shows the shadows cast by a candle or lamp, where the rays diverge from the point of light to meet corresponding diverging lines which start from the foot of the luminary on the ground.

Fig. 263 shows the shadows created by a candle or lamp, where the rays spread out from the light source to intersect corresponding diverging lines that begin at the base of the light source on the ground.

Fig. 263.

Fig. 263.

The simple principle of cast shadows is that the rays coming from the point of light or luminary pass over the top of the intervening object which casts the shadow on to the plane of shade to meet the horizontal trace of those rays on that plane, or the 231 lines of light proceed from the point of light, and the lines of the shadow are drawn from the foot or trace of the point of light.

The basic idea of cast shadows is that the rays coming from the light source go over the top of the object in between, which casts the shadow onto the shaded surface, meeting the horizontal line of those rays on that surface, or the 231 lines of light come from the light source, and the lines of the shadow are drawn from the base or point of the light source.

Fig. 264 shows this in profile. Here the sun is on the same plane as the picture, and the shadow is cast sideways.

Fig. 264 shows this from the side. Here the sun is on the same level as the image, and the shadow is cast to the side.

figure figure
Fig. 264. Fig. 265.

Fig. 265 shows the same thing, but the sun being behind the 232 object, casts its shadow forwards. Although the lines of light are parallel, they are subject to the laws of perspective, and are therefore drawn from their respective vanishing points.

Fig. 265 shows the same thing, but with the sun behind the 232 object, casting its shadow forward. Even though the lines of light are parallel, they follow the rules of perspective, so they are drawn from their respective vanishing points.

CXLIX
Shadows Cast by the Sun

Owing to the great distance of the sun, we have to consider the rays of light proceeding from it as parallel, and therefore subject to the same laws as other parallel lines in perspective, as already noted. And for the same reason we have to place the foot of the luminary on the horizon. It is important to remember this, as these two things make the difference between shadows cast by the sun and those cast by artificial light.

Due to the great distance of the sun, we need to treat the light rays coming from it as parallel, which means they follow the same rules as other parallel lines in perspective, as mentioned earlier. For the same reason, we should position the base of the sun on the horizon. It’s important to keep this in mind, as these two factors create the difference between shadows created by the sun and those made by artificial light.

The sun has three principal positions in relation to the picture. In the first case it is supposed to be in the same plane either to the right or to the left, and in that case the shadows will be 233 parallel with the base of the picture. In the second position it is on the other side of it, or facing the spectator, when the shadows of objects will be thrown forwards or towards him. In the third, the sun is in front of the picture, and behind the spectator, so that the shadows are thrown in the opposite direction, or towards the horizon, the objects themselves being in full light.

The sun has three main positions in relation to the picture. In the first case, it's assumed to be either to the right or to the left, and in that case, the shadows will be 233 parallel to the bottom of the picture. In the second position, it's on the other side, or facing the viewer, causing the shadows of objects to be cast forward or towards them. In the third position, the sun is in front of the picture and behind the viewer, so the shadows are cast in the opposite direction, or towards the horizon, with the objects themselves fully illuminated.

CL
The Sun in the Same Plane as the Picture

Besides being in the same plane, the sun in this figure is at an angle of 45° to the horizon, consequently the shadows will be the same length as the figures that cast them are high. Note that the shadow of step No. 1 is cast upon step No. 2, and that of No. 2 on No. 3, the top of each of these becoming a plane of shade.

Besides being on the same plane, the sun in this image is at a 45° angle to the horizon, so the shadows will be the same length as the figures that cast them are tall. Note that the shadow of step No. 1 falls on step No. 2, and that of No. 2 on No. 3, with the top of each of these creating a shaded area.

figure figure
Fig. 266. Fig. 267.

When the shadow of an object such as A, Fig. 268, which would fall upon the plane, is interrupted by another object B, then the 234 outline of the shadow is still drawn on the plane, but being interrupted by the surface B at C, the shadow runs up that plane till it meets the rays 1, 2, which define the shadow on plane B. This is an important point, but is quite explained by the figure.

When the shadow of an object like A, Fig. 268, falls on a surface but gets interrupted by another object B, the outline of the shadow still appears on the surface. However, since it is blocked by the surface B at C, the shadow moves up that surface until it intersects with rays 1 and 2, which define the shadow on the surface B. This is a crucial point, but it’s clearly illustrated in the figure.

Fig. 268.

Fig. 268.

Although we have said that the rays pass over the top of the object casting the shadow, in the case of an archway or similar figure they pass underneath it; but the same principle holds good, that is, we draw lines from the guiding points in the arch, 1, 2, 3, &c., at the same angle of 45° to meet the traces of those rays on the plane of shade, and so get the shadow of the archway, as here shown.

Although we mentioned that the rays travel over the top of the object creating the shadow, in the case of an archway or similar shape, they go beneath it; but the same principle applies, which is that we draw lines from the guiding points in the arch, 1, 2, 3, etc., at the same 45° angle to meet the traces of those rays on the shaded plane, thus obtaining the shadow of the archway, as shown here.

Fig. 269.

Fig. 269.

CLI
The Sun Behind the Picture

We have seen that when the sun's altitude is at an angle of 45° the shadows on the horizontal plane are the same length as the height of the objects that cast them. Here (Fig. 270), the sun still being at 45° altitude, although behind the picture, and consequently throwing the shadow of B forwards, that shadow must be the same length as the height of cube B, which will be seen is the case, for the shadow C is a square in perspective.

We have noticed that when the sun is at an angle of 45°, the shadows on a flat surface are the same length as the height of the objects creating them. Here (Fig. 270), with the sun still at a 45° angle but now behind the image, the shadow of B is cast forward. This shadow must be the same length as the height of cube B, which is evident, as the shadow C appears as a square in perspective.

[235] figure

[235] figure

Fig. 270.

Fig. 270.

236 To find the angle of altitude and the angle of the sun to the picture, we must first find the distance of the spectator from the foot of the luminary.

236 To determine the angle of elevation and the angle of the sun in relation to the image, we first need to figure out the distance from the viewer to the base of the light source.

figure
Fig. 271.

From point of sight S (Fig. 270) drop perpendicular to T, the station-point. From T draw TF at 45° to meet horizon at F. With radius FT make FO equal to it. Then O is the position of the spectator. From F raise vertical FL, and from O draw a line at 45° to meet FL at L, which is the luminary at an altitude of 45°, and at an angle of 45° to the picture.

From the viewpoint S (Fig. 270), drop a perpendicular to T, the station point. From T, draw TF at a 45° angle to meet the horizon at F. With a radius of FT, make FO equal to it. Then, O represents the position of the viewer. From F, raise a vertical FL, and from O, draw a line at a 45° angle to meet FL at L, which is the luminary at an altitude of 45°, and at an angle of 45° to the picture.

Fig. 272 is similar to the foregoing, only the angles of altitude and of the sun to the picture are altered.

Fig. 272 is similar to the previous one, except the angles of elevation and of the sun to the picture have been changed.

[237] figure

[237] figure

Fig. 272.

Fig. 272.

Note.—The sun being at 50° to the picture instead of 45°, is nearer the point of sight; at 90° it would be exactly opposite the spectator, and so on. Again, the elevation being less (40° instead of 45°) the shadow is longer. Owing to the changed position of the sun two sides of the cube throw a shadow. Note also that the outlines of the shadow, 1 2, 2 3, are drawn to the same vanishing points as the cube itself.

Note.—With the sun at 50° to the picture instead of 45°, it's closer to the viewer. At 90°, it would be directly opposite the spectator, and so on. Also, since the elevation is lower (40° instead of 45°), the shadow is longer. Because of the sun's new position, two sides of the cube cast a shadow. Note that the outlines of the shadow, 1 2, 2 3, are drawn to the same vanishing points as the cube itself.

It will not be necessary to mark the angles each time we make a drawing, as it must be seen we can place the luminary in any position that suits our convenience.

It won't be necessary to mark the angles every time we make a drawing, since we can place the light source in whatever position works best for us.

238
CLII
Sun Behind the Picture, Shadows Thrown on a Wall

As here we change the conditions we must also change our procedure. An upright wall now becomes the plane of shade, therefore as the principle of shadows must always remain the same we have to change the relative positions of the luminary and the foot thereof.

As we change the conditions here, we also need to change our approach. An upright wall now serves as the shade, so since the principle of shadows always stays the same, we must adjust the relative positions of the light source and its base.

At S (point of sight) raise vertical SF·, making it equal to fL. becomes the foot of the luminary, whilst the luminary itself still remains at L.

At S (point of sight) raise vertical SF, making it equal to fL. becomes the base of the light source, while the light source itself still stays at L.

Fig. 273.

Fig. 273.

We have but to turn this page half round and look at it from the right, and we shall see that SF· becomes as it were the horizontal line. The luminary L is at the right side of point S instead of the left, and the foot thereof is, as before, the trace of the luminary, as it is just underneath it. We shall also see that by 239 proceeding as in previous figures we obtain the same results on the wall as we did on the horizontal plane. Fig. B being on the horizontal plane is treated as already shown. The steps have their shadows partly on the wall and partly on the horizontal plane, so that the shadows on the wall are outlined from and those on the ground from f. Note shadow of roof A, and how the line drawn from through A is met by the line drawn from the luminary L, at the point P, and how the lower line of the shadow is directed to point of sight S.

We just need to turn this page halfway around and look at it from the right side, and we’ll see that SF becomes the horizontal line. The light source L is now on the right side of point S instead of the left, and its base is, as before, the trace of the light, located directly beneath it. We will also notice that by 239 following the same steps as in the previous figures, we get the same results on the wall as we did on the horizontal plane. Fig. B, which is on the horizontal plane, is treated as shown earlier. The steps cast their shadows partly on the wall and partly on the horizontal plane, such that the shadows on the wall are outlined from and those on the ground from f. Note the shadow of the roof A, and how the line drawn from through A meets the line drawn from the light source L at point P, and how the lower line of the shadow directs towards the point of sight S.

Fig. 274 is a larger drawing of the steps, &c., in further illustration of the above.

Fig. 274 is a larger drawing of the steps, etc., to further illustrate the above.

Fig. 274.

Fig. 274.

240
CLIII
Sun Behind the Picture Throwing Shadow on an Inclined Plane
figure
Fig. 275.

The vanishing point of the shadows on an inclined plane is on a vertical dropped from the luminary to a point (F) on a level with the vanishing point (P) of that inclined plane. Thus P is the vanishing point of the inclined plane K. Draw horizontal PF to meet fL (the line drawn from the luminary to the horizon). Then F will be the vanishing point of the shadows on the inclined plane. To find the shadow of M draw lines from F through the 241 base eg to cd. From luminary L draw lines through ab, also to cd, where they will meet those drawn from F. Draw CD, which determines the length of the shadow egcd.

The vanishing point of the shadows on an inclined surface is on a vertical line dropped from the light source to a point (F) that is level with the vanishing point (P) of that inclined surface. So, P is the vanishing point of the inclined surface K. Draw a horizontal line PF to intersect fL (the line drawn from the light source to the horizon). Then, F will be the vanishing point of the shadows on the inclined surface. To find the shadow of M, draw lines from F through the base eg to cd. From the light source L, draw lines through ab to cd as well, where they will intersect with the lines drawn from F. Draw CD, which determines the length of the shadow egcd.

CLIV
The Sun in Front of the Picture
figure
Fig. 277.

When the sun is in front of the picture we have exactly the opposite effect to that we have just been studying. The shadows, instead of coming towards us, are retreating from us, and the objects throwing them are in full light, consequently we have to reverse our treatment. Let us suppose the sun to be placed 242 above the horizon at , on the right of the picture and behind the spectator (Fig. 276). If we transport the length to the opposite side and draw the vertical downwards from the horizon, as at FL, we can then suppose point L to be exactly opposite the sun, and if we make that the vanishing point for the sun's rays we shall find that we obtain precisely the same result. As in Fig. 277, if we wish to find the length of C, which we may suppose to be the shadow of P, we can either draw a line from A through O to B, or from B through O to A, for the result is the same. And as we cannot make use of a point that is behind us and out of the picture, we have to resort to this very ingenious device.

When the sun is in front of the picture, we get exactly the opposite effect from what we just studied. The shadows, instead of coming towards us, are moving away from us, and the objects casting them are fully lit, so we need to adjust our approach. Let’s imagine the sun is positioned 242 above the horizon at , to the right of the picture and behind the viewer (Fig. 276). If we move the length to the opposite side and draw a vertical line down from the horizon, as shown at FL, we can think of point L as being directly opposite the sun. If we use that as the vanishing point for the sun's rays, we'll find that we achieve exactly the same result. As in Fig. 277, if we want to determine the length of C, which we might consider as the shadow of P, we can either draw a line from A through O to B, or from B through O to A, as the result will be the same. Since we can't use a point that's behind us and outside the picture, we have to use this clever technique.

Fig. 276.

Fig. 276.

In Fig. 276 we draw lines L1, L2, L3 from the luminary to the top of the object to meet those drawn from the foot F, namely F1, F2, F3, in the same way as in the figures we have already drawn.

In Fig. 276, we draw lines L1, L2, L3 from the light source to the top of the object, which intersect those drawn from the base F, specifically F1, F2, F3, just like in the previous figures we've created.

243

Fig. 278 gives further illustration of this problem.

Fig. 278 provides additional insight into this issue.

Fig. 278.

Fig. 278.

244
CLV
The Shadow of an Inclined Plane

The two portions of this inclined plane which cast the shadow are first the side fbd, and second the farther end abcd. The points we have to find are the shadows of a and b. From luminary L draw La, Lb, and from F, the foot, draw Fc, Fd. The intersection of these lines will be at a·b·. If we join fb· and db· we have the shadow of the side fbd, and if we join ca· and a·b· we have the shadow of abcd, which together form that of the figure.

The two sections of this inclined plane that create the shadow are first the side fbd and second the far end abcd. The points we need to find are the shadows of a and b. From the light source L, draw lines La and Lb, and from F, the base, draw Fc and Fd. The intersection of these lines will be at a·b·. If we connect fb· and db·, we get the shadow of the side fbd, and if we connect ca· and a·b·, we obtain the shadow of abcd, which together form the shadow of the figure.

Fig. 279.

Fig. 279.

245
CLVI
Shadow on a Roof or Inclined Plane

To draw the shadow of the figure M on the inclined plane K (or a chimney on a roof). First find the vanishing point P of the inclined plane and draw horizontal PF to meet vertical raised from L, the luminary. Then F will be the vanishing point of the shadow. From L draw L1, L2, L3 to top of figure M, and from the base of M draw 1F, 2F, 3F to F, the vanishing point of the shadow. The intersections of these lines at 1, 2, 3 on K will determine the length and form of the shadow.

To draw the shadow of the figure M on the inclined plane K (or a chimney on a roof), first locate the vanishing point P for the inclined plane and draw a horizontal line PF to intersect with the vertical line coming up from L, the light source. This means F will be the vanishing point for the shadow. From L, draw lines L1, L2, L3 to the top of figure M, and from the base of M, draw 1F, 2F, 3F to F, the vanishing point of the shadow. The points where these lines intersect at 1, 2, 3 on K will define the length and shape of the shadow.

Fig. 280.

Fig. 280.

246
CLVII
To Find the Shadow of a Projection or Balcony on a Wall

To find the shadow of the object K on the wall W, drop verticals OO till they meet the base line B·B· of the wall. Then from the point of sight S draw lines through OO, also drop verticals D, C, to meet these lines in d·c·; draw F and F to foot of luminary. From the points xx where these lines cut the base B raise perpendiculars xa·, xb·. From D, A, and B draw lines to the luminary L. These lines or rays intersecting the verticals raised from xx at a·b· will give the respective points of the shadow.

To find the shadow of object K on wall W, drop vertical lines OO until they meet the baseline B.B. of the wall. Then, from the point of sight S, draw lines through OO and also drop verticals D, C to meet these lines at d·c·; draw F and F to the foot of the light source. From the points xx where these lines hit the base B, raise perpendiculars xa·, xb·. From D, A, and B, draw lines to the light source L. These lines or rays intersecting the verticals raised from xx at a·b· will give the respective points of the shadow.

Fig. 281.

Fig. 281.

The shadow of the eave of a roof can be obtained in the same way. Take any point thereon, mark its trace on the ground, and then proceed as above.

The shadow of a roof's eave can be created in the same way. Take any point on it, mark its trace on the ground, and then continue as described above.

247
CLVIII
Shadow on a Retreating Wall, Sun in Front

Let L be the luminary. Raise vertical LF. F will be the vanishing point of the shadows on the ground. Draw L parallel to FS. Drop S from point of sight; (so found) is the vanishing point of the shadows on the wall. For shadow of roof draw LE and B, giving us e, the shadow of E. Join Be, &c., and so draw shadow of eave of roof.

Let L be the light source. Raise a vertical line LF. F will be the point where the shadows disappear on the ground. Draw L parallel to FS. Drop S from the viewpoint; (as determined) is the point where the shadows disappear on the wall. For the shadow of the roof, draw LE and B, which gives us e, the shadow of E. Connect Be, etc., to create the shadow of the roof’s eave.

248 For shadow of K draw lines from luminary L to meet those from the foot, &c.

248 To find the shadow of K, draw lines from the light source L to intersect with those from the base, etc.

The shadow of D over the door is found in a similar way to that of the roof.

The shadow of D on the door is identified in the same way as that of the roof.

Fig. 282.

Fig. 282.

Figure 283 shows how the shadow of the old man in the preceding drawing is found.

Figure 283 shows how the shadow of the old man in the previous drawing is identified.

Fig. 283.

Fig. 283.

249
CLIX
Shadow of an Arch, Sun in Front

Having drawn the arch, divide it into a certain number of parts, say five. From these divisions drop perpendiculars to base line. From divisions on AB draw lines to F the foot, and from those on the semicircle draw lines to L the luminary. Their intersections will give the points through which to draw the shadow of the arch.

Having drawn the arch, divide it into a certain number of parts, like five. From these divisions, drop perpendiculars to the baseline. From the divisions on AB, draw lines to F, the foot, and from those on the semicircle, draw lines to L, the luminary. Their intersections will give the points through which to draw the shadow of the arch.

Fig. 284.

Fig. 284.

250
CLX
Shadow in a Niche or Recess

In this figure a similar method to that just explained is adopted. Drop perpendiculars from the divisions of the arch 1 2 3 to the base. From the foot of each draw 1S, 2S, 3S to foot of luminary S, and from the top of each, A 1 2 3 B, draw lines to L as before. Where the former intersect the curve on the floor of the niche raise verticals to meet the latter at P 1 2 B, &c. These points will indicate about the position of the shadow; but the niche being semicircular and domed at the top the shadow gradually loses itself in a gradated and somewhat serpentine half-tone.

In this figure, a similar method to the one just explained is used. Drop perpendiculars from the divisions of the arch 1 2 3 to the base. From the foot of each, draw 1S, 2S, 3S to the foot of luminary S, and from the top of each, A 1 2 3 B, draw lines to L as before. Where the former intersect the curve on the floor of the niche, raise verticals to meet the latter at P 1 2 B, &c. These points will indicate the position of the shadow; however, since the niche is semicircular and domed at the top, the shadow gradually fades into a gradated and somewhat serpentine half-tone.

Fig. 285.

Fig. 285.

251
CLXI
Shadow in an Arched Doorway

252 This is so similar to the last figure in many respects that I need not repeat a description of the manner in which it is done. And surely an artist after making a few sketches from the actual thing will hardly require all this machinery to draw a simple shadow.

252 This is so similar to the last figure in many ways that I don't need to describe how it's done again. Surely, an artist who has made a few sketches from the real object won't need all this equipment to draw a simple shadow.

Fig. 286.

Fig. 286.

CLXII
Shadows Produced by Artificial Light

Shadows thrown by artificial light, such as a candle or lamp, are found by drawing lines from the seat of the luminary through the feet of the objects to meet lines representing rays of light drawn from the luminary itself over the tops or the corners of the objects; very much as in the cases of sun-shadows, but with 253 this difference, that whereas the foot of the luminary in this latter case is supposed to be on the horizon an infinite distance away, the foot in the case of a lamp or candle may be on the floor or on a table close to us. First draw the table and chair, &c. (Fig. 287), and let L be the luminary. For objects on the table such as K the foot will be at f on the table. For the shadows on the floor, of the chair and table itself, we must find the foot of the luminary on the floor. Draw So, find trace of the edge of the table, drop vertical oP, draw PS to point of sight, drop vertical from foot of candlestick to meet PS in F. Then F is the foot of the luminary on the floor. From this point draw lines through the feet or traces of objects such as the corners of the table, &c., to meet other lines drawn from the point of light, and so obtain the shadow.

Shadows created by artificial light, like from a candle or lamp, appear by drawing lines from the base of the light source through the feet of the objects to intersect lines that represent light rays coming from the light source itself over the tops or corners of the objects. This is similar to how sun shadows work, but with the difference that while the base of the light source in the sun shadow scenario is imagined to be infinitely far away on the horizon, the base for a lamp or candle is typically on the floor or a table nearby. First, sketch the table and chair, etc. (Fig. 287), and let L represent the light source. For objects on the table like K, the base will be at f on the table. To determine the shadows on the floor of the chair and table, we need to locate the base of the light source on the floor. Draw So, find the edge of the table, drop a vertical line to oP, draw PS to the point of sight, and drop a vertical line from the base of the candlestick to intersect PS at F. Then F is the base of the light source on the floor. From this point, draw lines through the feet or traces of objects like the corners of the table, etc., to meet other lines drawn from the point of light to create the shadow.

Fig. 287.

Fig. 287.

CLXIII
Some Observations on Real Light and Shade

Although the figures we have been drawing show the principles on which sun-shadows are shaped, still there are so many more laws to be considered in the great art of light and shade that it is better to observe them in Nature herself or under the teaching of the real sun. In the study of a kitchen and scullery in an old house in Toledo (Fig. 288) we have an example of the many things to be considered besides the mere shapes of shadows of regular forms. It will be seen that the light is dispersed in all directions, and although there is a good deal of half-shade there are scarcely any cast shadows except on the floor; but the light on the white walls in the outside gallery is so reflected into the cast shadows that they are extremely faint. The luminosity of this part of the sketch is greatly enhanced by the contrast of the dark legs of the bench and the shadows in the roof. The warm glow of all this portion is contrasted by the grey door and its frame.

Although the figures we've drawn illustrate the principles behind how sun-shadows are formed, there are still many more factors to consider in the intricate art of light and shadow. It's best to observe these in Nature itself or under actual sunlight. In the study of a kitchen and scullery in an old house in Toledo (Fig. 288), we see an example of various elements to think about beyond just the shapes of shadows from regular forms. You'll notice that the light spreads in every direction, and while there are a lot of areas in half-shade, there are hardly any cast shadows except on the floor. However, the light reflecting off the white walls in the outdoor gallery makes the cast shadows very faint. The brightness in this part of the sketch is significantly enhanced by the contrast with the dark legs of the bench and the shadows on the ceiling. This warm glow is contrasted by the gray door and its frame.

254

Fig. 288.

Fig. 288.

Note that the door itself is quite luminous, and lighted up by the reflection of the sun from the tiled floor, so that the bars in the upper part throw distinct shadows, besides the mystery of colour thus introduced. The little window to the left, though not admitting much direct sunlight, is evidence of the brilliant glare outside; for the reflected light is very conspicuous on the 255 top and on the shutters on each side; indeed they cast distinct shadows up and down, while some clear daylight from the blue sky is reflected on the window-sill. As to the sink, the table, the wash-tubs, &c., although they seem in strong light and shade they really receive little or no direct light from a single point; but from the strong reflected light re-reflected into them from the wall of the doorway. There are many other things in such effects as this which the artist will observe, and which can only be studied from real light and shade. Such is the character of reflected light, varying according to the angle and intensity of the luminary and a hundred other things. When we come to study light in the open air we get into another region, and have to deal with it accordingly, and yet we shall find that our sciagraphy will be a help to us even in this bewilderment; for it will explain in a manner the innumerable shapes of sun-shadows that we observe out of doors among hills and dales, showing up their forms and structure; its play in the woods and gardens, and its value among buildings, showing all their juttings and abuttings, recesses, doorways, and all the other architectural details. Nor must we forget light's most glorious display of all on the sea and in the clouds and in the sunrises and the sunsets down to the still and lovely moonlight.

Note that the door itself is very bright, illuminated by the reflection of the sun from the tiled floor, so the bars in the upper part cast distinct shadows, along with the intrigue of color introduced. The small window to the left, while not letting in much direct sunlight, shows the brilliant glare outside; the reflected light is very noticeable on the 255 top and on the shutters on each side; indeed, they cast clear shadows up and down, while some daylight from the blue sky is reflected on the windowsill. As for the sink, table, wash tubs, etc., although they seem to be in strong light and shadow, they actually receive little or no direct light from a single source; instead, they are illuminated by the strong reflected light bouncing off the wall of the doorway. There are many other things in these effects that the artist will notice, which can only be understood through real light and shadow. This is the nature of reflected light, which varies depending on the angle and intensity of the light source and countless other factors. When we start to study light in open air, we enter a different realm and have to approach it differently; yet, we will find our studies of light and shadow will assist us, even in this confusion. This will help us understand the countless shapes of sun shadows we see outdoors among hills and valleys, highlighting their forms and structures; how light plays in the woods and gardens, and its importance among buildings, revealing all their projections, recesses, doorways, and other architectural details. And we must not overlook light’s most magnificent displays on the sea, in the clouds, and during sunrises and sunsets, all the way to the calm and beautiful moonlight.

These sun-shadows are useful in showing us the principle of light and shade, and so also are the shadows cast by artificial light; but they are only the beginning of that beautiful study, that exquisite art of tone or chiaro-oscuro, which is infinite in its variety, is full of the deepest mystery, and is the true poetry of art. For this the student must go to Nature herself, must study her in all her moods from early dawn to sunset, in the twilight and when night sets in. No mathematical rules can help him, but only the thoughtful contemplation, the silent watching, and the mental notes that he can make and commit to memory, combining them with the sentiments to which they in turn give rise. The plein air, or broad daylight effects, are but one item of the great range of this ever-changing and deepening mystery—from the hard reality to the soft blending of evening when form almost disappears, even to the merging of the whole landscape, nay, the whole world, into a dream—which is felt 256 rather than seen, but possesses a charm that almost defies the pencil of the painter, and can only be expressed by the deep and sweet notes of the poet and the musician. For love and reverence are necessary to appreciate and to present it.

These sun shadows help illustrate the concept of light and shade, and the shadows created by artificial light do the same; however, they are just the starting point of that beautiful study, that exquisite art of tone or chiaro-oscuro, which offers endless variety, is filled with deep mystery, and represents the true poetry of art. For this, the student must turn to Nature herself, observing her in all her moods from early dawn to sunset, in twilight, and as night falls. No mathematical formulas can assist him, but only thoughtful contemplation, quiet observation, and mental notes that he can make and remember, blending them with the feelings they evoke. The plein air, or effects of bright daylight, are just one part of the vast range of this ever-changing and deepening mystery—from the sharpness of reality to the gentle blending of evening when forms nearly vanish, even to the merging of the entire landscape, and indeed, the entire world, into a dream—which is felt 256 rather than seen, yet possesses a charm that nearly eludes the painter's pencil, only to be expressed through the deep and sweet notes of the poet and the musician. For love and reverence are essential to appreciate and convey it.

There is also much to learn about artificial light. For here, again, the study is endless: from the glare of a hundred lights—electric and otherwise—to the single lamp or candle. Indeed a whole volume could be filled with illustrations of its effects. To those who aim at producing intense brilliancy, refusing to acknowledge any limitations to their capacity, a hundred or a thousand lights commend themselves; and even though wild splashes of paint may sometimes be the result, still the effort is praiseworthy. But those who prefer the mysterious lighting of a Rembrandt will find, if they sit contemplating in a room lit with one lamp only, that an endless depth of mystery surrounds them, full of dark recesses peopled by fancy and sweet thought, whilst the most beautiful gradations soften the forms without distorting them; and at the same time he can detect the laws of this science of light and shade a thousand times repeated and endless in its variety.

There’s a lot to learn about artificial light. Once again, the study is limitless: from the bright glare of a hundred lights—electric and otherwise—to a single lamp or candle. In fact, an entire book could be filled with examples of its effects. For those who strive for intense brightness and refuse to recognize any limits to their abilities, a hundred or a thousand lights can be appealing; and even if this leads to chaotic splashes of paint sometimes, the effort is commendable. However, those who enjoy the mysterious lighting of a Rembrandt will notice, if they sit quietly in a room lit by just one lamp, that they are surrounded by a depth of mystery filled with dark corners inhabited by imagination and sweet thoughts, while the most beautiful gradients soften the shapes without distorting them; and at the same time, they can see the principles of this science of light and shadow repeated infinitely and in endless variety.

Note.Fig. 288 must be looked upon as a rough sketch which only gives the general effect of the original drawing; to render all the delicate tints, tones and reflections described in the text would require a highly-finished reproduction in half-tone or in colour.

Note.Fig. 288 should be seen as a basic outline that only captures the overall feel of the original drawing; to depict all the subtle shades, tones, and reflections mentioned in the text would need a detailed reproduction in half-tone or color.

As many of the figures in this book had to be re-drawn, not a light task, I must here thank Miss Margaret L. Williams, one of our Academy students, for kindly coming to my assistance and volunteering her careful co-operation.

As many of the figures in this book had to be redrawn, which was no small task, I want to thank Miss Margaret L. Williams, one of our Academy students, for generously helping me and offering her careful support.

257
CLXIV
Reflection

Reflections in still water can best be illustrated by placing some simple object, such as a cube, on a looking-glass laid horizontally on a table, or by studying plants, stones, banks, trees, &c., reflected in some quiet pond. It will then be seen that the reflection is the counterpart of the object reversed, and having the same vanishing points as the object itself.

Reflections in calm water can easily be shown by putting a simple object, like a cube, on a mirror laid flat on a table, or by observing plants, rocks, banks, trees, etc., reflected in a peaceful pond. It becomes clear that the reflection is a reversed version of the object and has the same vanishing points as the object itself.

Fig. 289.

Fig. 289.

Let us suppose R (Fig. 289) to be standing on the water or reflecting plane. To find its reflection make square [R] equal to the original square R. Complete the reversed cube by drawing its other sides, &c. It is evident that this lower cube is the reflection of the one above it, although it differs in one respect, for whereas in figure R the top of the cube is seen, in its reflection [R] it is hidden, &c. In figure A of a semicircular arch we see the 258 underneath portion of the arch reflected in the water, but we do not see it in the actual object. However, these things are obvious. Note that the reflected line must be equal in length to the actual one, or the reflection of a square would not be a square, nor that of a semicircle a semicircle. The apparent lengthening of reflections in water is owing to the surface being broken by wavelets, which, leaping up near to us, catch some of the image of the tree, or whatever it is, that it is reflected.

Let’s assume R (Fig. 289) is sitting on the water or a reflective surface. To find its reflection, make a square [R] that matches the original square R. Complete the upside-down cube by drawing its other sides, etc. It’s clear that this lower cube is the reflection of the one above it, although there’s one difference: while in figure R the top of the cube is visible, in its reflection [R] it is hidden, etc. In figure A of a semicircular arch, we see the 258 bottom part of the arch reflected in the water, but we don’t see it in the actual object. However, these points are clear. Note that the reflected line must be the same length as the actual one, or the reflection of a square wouldn’t be a square, nor would that of a semicircle be a semicircle. The apparent stretching of reflections in water happens because the surface is disturbed by small waves, which, jumping up near us, capture part of the image of the tree or whatever is being reflected.

figure
Fig. 290.

In this view of an arch (Fig. 290) note that the reflection is obtained by dropping perpendiculars from certain points on the arch, 1, 0, 2, &c., to the surface of the reflecting plane, and then measuring the same lengths downwards to corresponding points, 1, 0, 2, &c., in the reflection.

In this view of an arch (Fig. 290), notice that the reflection is created by dropping perpendiculars from specific points on the arch, 1, 0, 2, etc., to the surface of the reflecting plane, and then measuring the same lengths downward to the matching points, 1, 0, 2, etc., in the reflection.

259
CLXV
Angles of Reflection

In Fig. 291 we take a side view of the reflected object in order to show that at whatever angle the visual ray strikes the reflecting surface it is reflected from it at the same angle.

In Fig. 291, we take a side view of the reflected object to demonstrate that no matter what angle the visual ray hits the reflecting surface, it reflects off at the same angle.

Fig. 291.

Fig. 291.

We have seen that the reflected line must be equal to the original line, therefore mB must equal Ma. They are also at right angles to MN, the plane of reflection. We will now draw the visual ray passing from E, the eye, to B, which is the reflection of A; and just underneath it passes through MN at O, which is the point where the visual ray strikes the reflecting surface. Draw OA. This line represents the ray reflected from it. We have now two triangles, OAm and OmB, which are right-angled triangles and equal, therefore angle a equals angle b. But angle b equals angle c. Therefore angle EcM equals angle Aam, and the angle at which the ray strikes the reflecting plane is equal to the angle at which it is reflected from it.

We’ve established that the reflected line must match the original line, so mB must equal Ma. They are also perpendicular to MN, the reflecting plane. Now, let’s draw the visual ray moving from E, the observer's eye, to B, which is the reflection of A; just below, it intersects MN at O, the point where the visual ray hits the reflecting surface. Draw OA. This line represents the ray reflected from it. We now have two triangles, OAm and OmB, which are right-angled and congruent, so angle a equals angle b. But angle b is equal to angle c. Therefore, angle EcM equals angle Aam, and the angle at which the ray hits the reflecting plane equals the angle at which it is reflected.

260
CLXVI
Reflections of Objects at Different Distances

In this sketch the four posts and other objects are represented standing on a plane level or almost level with the water, in order to show the working of our problem more clearly. It will be seen that the post A is on the brink of the reflecting plane, and therefore is entirely reflected; B and C being farther back are only partially seen, whereas the reflection of D is not seen at all. I have made all the posts the same height, but with regard to the houses, where the length of the vertical lines varies, we obtain their reflections by measuring from the points oo upwards and downwards as in the previous figure.

In this diagram, the four posts and other objects are shown standing on a flat or nearly flat surface with the water, so we can understand our issue more clearly. You'll notice that post A is right at the edge of the reflecting surface, so it's completely reflected; B and C are further back, so we only see part of them, while the reflection of D isn’t visible at all. I’ve kept all the posts the same height, but for the houses, where the height of the vertical lines varies, we find their reflections by measuring from points oo both up and down, as shown in the earlier figure.

Fig. 292.

Fig. 292.

Of course these reflections vary according to the position they are viewed from; the lower we are down, the more do we see of the reflections of distant objects, and vice versa. When the figures are on a higher plane than the water, that is, above the plane of reflection, we have to find their perspective position, 261 and drop a perpendicular AO (Fig. 293) till it comes in contact with the plane of reflection, which we suppose to run under the ground, then measure the same length downwards, as in this figure of a girl on the top of the steps. Point o marks the point of contact with the plane, and by measuring downwards to we get the length of her reflection, or as much as is seen of it. Note the reflection of the steps and the sloping bank, and the application of the inclined plane ascending and descending.

Of course, these reflections change depending on our viewpoint; the lower we are, the more we see reflections of distant objects, and the opposite is true as well. When the figures are positioned above the water, meaning above the reflection plane, we need to determine their perspective position, 261 and drop a perpendicular line AO (Fig. 293) until it touches the reflection plane, which we imagine runs beneath the ground. Then, we measure the same length downward, just like in the figure of a girl at the top of the steps. Point o indicates the point of contact with the plane, and by measuring downward to we find the length of her reflection, or what is visible of it. Notice the reflection of the steps and the sloping bank, as well as the application of the inclined plane going both up and down.

Fig. 293.

Fig. 293.

262
CLXVII
Reflection in a Looking-glass
figure
Fig. 294.

I had noticed that some of the figures in Titian’s pictures were only half life-size, and yet they looked natural; and one day, thinking I would trace myself in an upright mirror, I stood at arm’s length from it and with a brush and Chinese white, I made a rough outline of my face and figure, and when I measured it I found that my drawing was exactly half as long and half as wide as nature. I went closer to the glass, but the same outline fitted me. Then I retreated several paces, and still the same outline surrounded me. Although a little surprising at first, the reason is obvious. The image in the glass retreats or advances exactly in the same measure as the spectator.

I noticed that some of the figures in Titian’s paintings were only half life-size, yet they looked natural. One day, I decided to trace my reflection in an upright mirror. I stood at arm’s length and used a brush and Chinese white to make a rough outline of my face and figure. When I measured it, I found that my drawing was exactly half as long and half as wide as reality. I moved closer to the mirror, but the same outline still fit me. Then I stepped back a few paces, and the same outline surrounded me. Although it was a bit surprising at first, the explanation is clear. The image in the mirror moves back or forward in exactly the same way as the viewer does.

Suppose him to represent one end of a parallelogram e·s·, and his image a·b· to represent the other. The mirror AB is a perpendicular half-way between them, the diagonal e·b· is the visual ray 263 passing from the eye of the spectator to the foot of his image, and is the diagonal of a rectangle, therefore it cuts AB in the centre o, and AO represents a·b· to the spectator. This is an experiment that any one may try for himself. Perhaps the above fact may have something to do with the remarks I made about Titian at the beginning of this chapter.

Imagine him as one end of a parallelogram e·s·, and his reflection a·b· as the other end. The mirror AB stands perpendicular halfway between them, and the diagonal e·b· is the line of sight 263 that goes from the viewer's eye to the base of his reflection. This line acts as the diagonal of a rectangle, cutting AB right in the center at point o, with AO showing a·b· to the viewer. This is an experiment anyone can try for themselves. Maybe this fact ties into the comments I made about Titian at the start of this chapter.

Fig. 295.

Fig. 295.

Fig. 296.

Fig. 296.

264
CLXVIII
The Mirror at an Angle

If an object or line AB is inclined at an angle of 45° to the mirror RR, then the angle BAC will be a right angle, and this angle is exactly divided in two by the reflecting plane RR. And whatever the angle of the object or line makes with its reflection that angle will also be exactly divided.

If an object or line AB is tilted at a 45° angle to the mirror RR, then the angle BAC will be a right angle, and this angle is evenly split in two by the reflecting plane RR. Whatever angle the object or line makes with its reflection will also be evenly divided.

figure figure
Fig. 297. Fig. 298.

Now suppose our mirror to be standing on a horizontal plane and on a pivot, so that it can be inclined either way. Whatever angle the mirror is to the plane the reflection of that plane in the mirror will be at the same angle on the other side of it, so that if the mirror OA (Fig. 298) is at 45° to the plane RR then the 265 reflection of that plane in the mirror will be 45° on the other side of it, or at right angles, and the reflected plane will appear perpendicular, as shown in Fig. 299, where we have a front view of a mirror leaning forward at an angle of 45° and reflecting the square aob with a cube standing upon it, only in the reflection the cube appears to be projecting from an upright plane or wall.

Now imagine our mirror is placed on a flat surface and mounted on a pivot, allowing it to tilt in either direction. Whatever angle the mirror makes with the surface, the reflection of that surface in the mirror will be at the same angle on the opposite side. So, if the mirror OA (Fig. 298) is at a 45° angle to the surface RR, then the reflection of that surface in the mirror will also be at 45° on the other side, or perpendicular, making the reflected surface look upright. This is illustrated in Fig. 299, where we see a front view of a mirror tilted forward at a 45° angle, reflecting the square aob with a cube on it, but in the reflection, the cube looks like it’s protruding from a vertical surface or wall.

Fig. 299.

Fig. 299.

If we increase the angle from 45° to 60°, then the reflection of the plane and cube will lean backwards as shown in Fig. 300. If we place it on a level with the original plane, the cube will be standing upright twice the distance away. If the mirror is still farther tilted till it makes an angle of 135° as at E (Fig. 298), or 45° on the other side of the vertical Oc, then the plane and cube would disappear, and objects exactly over that plane, such as the ceiling, would come into view.

If we increase the angle from 45° to 60°, the reflection of the plane and cube will tilt backward as shown in Fig. 300. If we place it level with the original plane, the cube will be standing upright at twice the distance away. If the mirror is tilted even further until it forms an angle of 135° as shown at E (Fig. 298), or 45° on the other side of the vertical Oc, then the plane and cube will disappear, and objects directly above that plane, like the ceiling, will become visible.

In Fig. 300 the mirror is at 60° to the plane mn, and the plane itself at about 15° to the plane an (so that here we are using angular perspective, V being the accessible vanishing point). The reflection of the plane and cube is seen leaning back at an 266 angle of 60°. Note the way the reflection of this cube is found by the dotted lines on the plane, on the surface of the mirror, and also on the reflection.

In Fig. 300, the mirror is positioned at a 60° angle to the plane mn, and the plane itself is roughly at a 15° angle to the plane an (so we're using angular perspective here, with V being the reachable vanishing point). The reflection of the plane and cube appears to lean back at an angle of 60°. Notice how the reflection of this cube is determined by the dotted lines on the plane, the surface of the mirror, and the reflection itself. 266

Fig. 300.

Fig. 300.

CLXIX
The Upright Mirror at an Angle of 45° to the Wall

In Fig. 301 the mirror is vertical and at an angle of 45° to the wall opposite the spectator, so that it reflects a portion of that wall as though it were receding from us at right angles; and the wall with the pictures upon it, which appears to be facing us, in reality is on our left.

In Fig. 301, the mirror is upright and tilted at a 45° angle to the wall opposite the viewer, reflecting part of that wall as if it were extending away from us at a right angle. The wall with the pictures, which seems to be directly in front of us, is actually on our left.

[267] figure

[267] figure

Fig. 301.

Fig. 301.

268 An endless number of complicated problems could be invented of the inclined mirror, but they would be mere puzzles calculated rather to deter the student than to instruct him. What we chiefly have to bear in mind is the simple principle of reflections. When a mirror is vertical and placed at the end or side of a room it reflects that room and gives the impression that we are in one double the size. If two mirrors are placed opposite to each other at each end of a room they reflect and reflect, so that we see an endless number of rooms.

268 There are countless complex problems that could be created involving the inclined mirror, but they would mostly just confuse the student instead of teaching them. What we really need to focus on is the basic principle of reflections. When a mirror is vertical and positioned at the end or side of a room, it reflects that room and makes it seem like we’re in one that’s twice the size. If two mirrors are placed directly across from each other at either end of a room, they reflect off each other repeatedly, so it looks like there’s an infinite number of rooms.

Again, if we are sitting in a gallery of pictures with a hand mirror, we can so turn and twist that mirror about that we can bring any picture in front of us, whether it is behind us, at the side, or even on the ceiling. Indeed, when one goes to those old palaces and churches where pictures are painted on the ceiling, as in the Sistine Chapel or the Louvre, or the palaces at Venice, it is not a bad plan to take a hand mirror with us, so that we can see those elevated works of art in comfort.

Again, if we're sitting in an art gallery with a handheld mirror, we can angle and turn that mirror in such a way that we can reflect any picture in front of us, whether it’s behind us, to the side, or even on the ceiling. In fact, when you visit old palaces and churches where paintings are done on the ceiling, like in the Sistine Chapel or the Louvre, or in the palaces of Venice, it's a good idea to bring a handheld mirror so we can comfortably view those high-up works of art.

There are also many uses for the mirror in the studio, well known to the artist. One is to look at one's own picture reversed, when faults become more evident; and another, when the model is required to be at a longer distance than the dimensions of the studio will admit, by drawing his reflection in the glass we double the distance he is from us.

There are also many ways to use the mirror in the studio, which artists know well. One is to view one's own painting in reverse, making flaws more noticeable; another is when the model needs to be farther away than the studio allows. By drawing their reflection in the glass, we effectively double the distance between them and us.

The reason the mirror shows the fault of a work to which the eye has become accustomed is that it doubles it. Thus if a line that should be vertical is leaning to one side, in the mirror it will lean to the other; so that if it is out of the perpendicular to the left, its reflection will be out of the perpendicular to the right, making a double divergence from one to the other.

The reason the mirror reveals the flaws in a piece of work that our eyes have grown used to is that it reflects them. So, if a line that's supposed to be vertical is tilting to one side, in the mirror, it will tilt to the opposite side; meaning if it’s off-kilter to the left, its reflection will be off-kilter to the right, creating a double deviation from one side to the other.

269
CLXX
Mental Perspective

Before we part, I should like to say a word about mental perspective, for we must remember that some see farther than others, and some will endeavour to see even into the infinite. To see Nature in all her vastness and magnificence, the thought must supplement and must surpass the eye. It is this far-seeing that makes the great poet, the great philosopher, and the great artist. Let the student bear this in mind, for if he possesses this quality or even a share of it, it will give immortality to his work.

Before we say goodbye, I want to talk about mental perspective. We need to remember that some people can see further than others, and some will even try to understand the infinite. To appreciate Nature in all her vastness and beauty, our thoughts must enhance and go beyond what we see. This ability to see deeply is what makes a great poet, a great philosopher, and a great artist. The student should keep this in mind because if he has this quality, or even a bit of it, it will ensure his work lives on forever.

To explain in detail the full meaning of this suggestion is beyond the province of this book, but it may lead the student to think this question out for himself in his solitary and imaginative moments, and should, I think, give a charm and virtue to his work which he should endeavour to make of value, not only to his own time but to the generations that are to follow. Cultivate, therefore, this mental perspective, without forgetting the solid foundation of the science I have endeavoured to impart to you.

To explain the full meaning of this suggestion in detail is too much for this book, but it might encourage you to reflect on this question during your quiet and imaginative moments. I believe it could add charm and value to your work, which you should aim to make meaningful not just for your own time but for future generations as well. So, nurture this way of thinking while also remembering the solid foundation of the science I’ve tried to share with you.


Footnotes

1. Leonardo da Vinci's Treatise on Painting.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Leonardo da Vinci's Treatise on Art.

2. There is another book called The Jesuit's Perspective which I have not yet seen, but which I hear is a fine work.

2. There's another book called The Jesuit's Perspective that I haven't seen yet, but I've heard it's really good.

3. In a sea-view, owing to the rotundity of the earth, the real horizontal line is slightly below the sea line, which is noted in Chapter I.

3. When looking at a view of the sea, because of the curve of the earth, the actual horizontal line is just below the sea line, as noted in Chapter I.

4. Some will tell us that Nature abhors a straight line, that all long straight lines in space appear curved, &c., owing to certain optical conditions; but this is not apparent in short straight lines, so if our drawing is small it would be wrong to curve them; if it is large, like a scene or diorama, the same optical condition which applies to the line in space would also apply to the line in the picture.

4. Some people say that nature hates straight lines, claiming that all long straight lines in space look curved due to certain optical effects, but this isn’t noticeable with short straight lines. So, if our drawing is small, it’d be incorrect to curve them; however, if it’s large, like a scene or diorama, the same optical effect that applies to lines in space would also apply to lines in the picture.


270

INDEX

Index citations in the original book referred to page numbers. Where possible, links will lead directly to a chapter header or illustration. Note that the last two entries for Toledo are figure numbers rather than pages; these have not been corrected.

Index citations in the original book referred to page numbers. Where possible, links will lead directly to a chapter header or illustration. Note that the last two entries for Toledo are figure numbers rather than pages; these have not been corrected.

A

A

Albert Dürer, 2, 9.

Albert Dürer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Angles of Reflection, 259.

Angles of Reflection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Angular Perspective, 98-123, 133, 170.

Angular Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

"" New Method, 133, 134, 135, 136.

"" New Method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Arches, Arcades, &c., 198, 200-208.

Arches, Arcades, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Architect's Perspective, 170, 171.

Architect's View, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Art Schools Perspective, 112-118, 217.

Art Schools Viewpoint, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Atmosphere, 1, 74.

Vibe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

B

B

Balcony, Shadow of, 246.

Balcony, Shadow of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Base or groundline, 89.

Base or ground line, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

C

C

Campanile Florence, 5, 59.

Campanile Florence, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Cast Shadows, 229-253.

Cast Shadows, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Centre of Vision, 15.

Vision Hub, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Chessboard, 74.

Chessboard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Chinese Art, 11.

Chinese Art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Circle, 145, 151-156, 159.

Circle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Columns, 157, 159, 161, 169, 170.

Columns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

Conditions of Perspective, 24, 25.

Conditions of View, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Cottage in Angular Perspective, 116.

Cottage in Angular View, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Cube, 53, 65, 115, 119.

Cube, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Cylinder, 158, 159.

Cylinder, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Cylindrical picture, 227.

Cylindrical image, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

D

D

De Hoogh, 2, 62, 73.

De Hoogh, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Depths, How to measure by diagonals, 127, 128.

Depths, How to measure by diagonals, 127, 128.

Descending plane, 92-95.

Descending plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Diagonals, 45, 124, 125, 126.

Diagonals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Disproportion, How to correct, 35, 118, 157.

Disparity, How to address, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Distance, 16, 77, 78, 85, 87, 103, 128.

Distance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__.

Distorted perspective, How to correct, 118.

Fix distorted perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Dome, 163-167.

Dome, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Double Cross, 218.

Double Cross, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

E

E

Ellipse, 145, 146, 147.

Ellipse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Elliptical Arch, 207.

Elliptical Arch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

F

F

Farningham, 95.

Farningham, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Figures on descending plane, 92, 93, 94, 95.

Figures on a slanted surface, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

"" an inclined plane, 88.

"Figures on an inclined plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__."

"" a level plane, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75.

"" a level plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__.

"" uneven ground, 90, 91.

"Figures" on uneven ground, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

G

G

Geometrical and Perspective figures contrasted, 46-48.

Geometric and perspective figures compared, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

" plane, 99.

" plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Giovanni da Pistoya, Sonnet to, by Michelangelo, 60.

Giovanni da Pistoya, Sonnet to, by Michelangelo, 60.

Great Pyramid, 190.

Great Pyramid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

H

H

Hexagon, 177, 183, 185.

Hexagon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Hogarth, 9.

Hogarth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Honfleur, 83, 142.

Honfleur, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Horizon, 3, 4, 15, 20, 59, 60.

Horizon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__.

Horizontal line, 13, 15.

Horizontal line, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Horizontals, 30, 31, 36.

Horizontals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

271

I

I

Inaccessible vanishing points, 77, 78, 136, 140-144.

Inaccessible vanishing points, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

Inclined plane, 33, 118, 213, 244, 245.

Inclined plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

Interiors, 62, 117, 118, 128.

Interiors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

J

J

Japanese Art, 11.

Japanese Art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Jesuit of Paris, Practice of Perspective by, 9.

Jesuit of Paris, Practice of Perspective by, 9.

K

K

Kiosk, Application of Hexagon, 185.

Kiosk, Hexagon Application, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Kirby, Joshua, Perspective made Easy (?), 9.

Kirby, Joshua, Perspective Made Easy (?), 9.

L

L

Ladder, Step, 212, 216.

Ladder, Step, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Landscape Perspective, 74.

Landscape Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Landseer, Sir Edwin, 1.

Landseer, Sir Edwin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Leonardo da Vinci, 1, 61.

Leonardo da Vinci, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Light, Observations on, 253.

Light, Observations on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Light-house, 84.

Lighthouse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Long distances, 85, 87.

Long distances, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

M

M

Measure distances by square and diagonal, 89, 128, 129.

Measure distances using squares and diagonals, 89, 128, 129.

" vanishing lines, How to, 49, 50.

Measure vanishing lines, How to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Measuring points, 106, 113.

Measuring points, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

" point O, 108, 109, 110.

Measuring point O, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Mental Perspective, 269.

Mindset, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Michelangelo, 5, 57, 58, 60.

Michelangelo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

N

N

Natural Perspective, 12, 82, 95, 142, 144.

Natural Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

New Method of Angular Perspective, 133, 134, 135, 141, 215, 219.

New Angular Perspective Method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__.

Niche, 164, 165, 250.

Niche, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

O

O

Oblique Square, 139.

Oblique Square, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Octagon, 172-175.

Octagon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

O, measuring point, 110.

Oh, measuring point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Optic Cone, 20.

Optic Cone, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

P

P

Parallels and Diagonals, 124-128.

Parallels and Diagonals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Paul Potter, cattle, 19.

Paul Potter, cattle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Paul Veronese, 4.

Paul Veronese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Pavements, 64, 66, 176, 178, 180, 181, 183.

Pavements, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__.

Pedestal, 141, 161.

Pedestal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Pentagon, 186, 187, 188.

Pentagon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Perspective, Angular, 98-123.

Perspective, Angular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

" Definitions, 13-23.

"Perspective, Definitions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__."

" Necessity of, 1.

"Perspective, Necessity of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__."

" Parallel, 42-97.

"Perspective, Parallel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__."

" Rules and Conditions of, 24-41.

Rules and Conditions of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

" Scientific definition of, 22.

Scientific definition of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

" Theory of, 13-24.

Perspective, Theory of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

" What is it? 6-12.

Perspective, What is it? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Pictures painted according to positions they are to occupy, 59.

Pictures painted based on the positions they will hold, 59.

Point of Distance, 16-21.

Point of Distance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

"" Sight, 12, 15.

"Point of View, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__."

Points in Space, 129, 137.

Points in Space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Portico, 111.

Portico, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Projection, 21, 137.

Projection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Pyramid, 189, 190, 191, 193-196.

Pyramid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

R

R

Raphael, 3.

Raphael, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Reduced distance, 77, 78, 79, 84.

Reduced distance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Reflection, 257-268.

Reflection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Rembrandt, 59, 256.

Rembrandt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Reynolds, Sir Joshua, 9, 60.

Reynolds, Sir Joshua, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Rubens, 4.

Rubens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Rules of Perspective, 24-41.

Rules of Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

272

S

S

Scale on each side of Picture, 141, 142-144.

Scale on each side of the picture, 141, 142-144.

" Vanishing, 69, 71, 81, 84.

"Sc" Vanishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Serlio, 5, 126.

Serlio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Shadows cast by sun, 229-252.

Shadows from the sun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

""" artificial light, 252.

"casts" artificial light, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Sight, Point of, 12, 15.

Perspective, viewpoint, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Sistine Chapel, 60.

Sistine Chapel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Solid figures, 135-140.

Solid shapes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Square in Angular Perspective, 105, 106, 109, 112, 114, 121, 122, 123, 133, 134, 139.

Square in Angular Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__.

" and diagonals, 125, 138, 139, 141.

Squares and diagonals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

" of the hypotenuse (fig. 170), 149.

Square of the hypotenuse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

" in Parallel Perspective, 42, 43, 50, 53, 54.

"Square in Parallel Perspective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

" at 45°, 64-66.

"Square" at 45°, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Staircase leading to a Gallery, 221.

Staircase to a gallery, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Stairs, Winding, 222, 225.

Winding stairs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Station Point, 13.

Station Point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Steps, 209-218.

Steps, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

T

T

Taddeo Gaddi, 5.

Taddeo Gaddi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Terms made use of, 48.

Terms used, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Tiles, 176, 178, 181.

Tiles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.

Tintoretto, 4.

Tintoretto, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Titian, 59, 262.

Titian, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Toledo, 96, 144, 259, 288.

Toledo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

Trace and projection, 21.

Trace and projection, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Transposed distance, 53.

Transposed distance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Triangles, 104, 106, 132, 135, 138.

Triangles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__.

Turner, 2, 87.

Turner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

U

U

Ubaldus, Guidus, 9.

Ubaldus, Guidus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

V

V

Vanishing lines, 49.

Vanishing lines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

" point, 119.

" point, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

" scale, 68-72, 74, 77, 79, 84.

Vani's scaling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__.

Vaulted Ceiling, 203.

High Ceiling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Velasquez, 59.

Velasquez, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Vertical plane, 13.

Vertical plane, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Visual rays, 20.

Visual rays, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

W

W

Winding Stairs, 222-225.

Winding Stairs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Water, Reflections in, 257, 258, 260, 261.

Water Reflections, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.

 

 



Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!